Forex strategies – ForexCracked https://www.forexcracked.com Free Premium Forex Indicators, Strategies, Free Forex EA Tue, 25 Mar 2025 17:26:05 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.7.1 https://www.forexcracked.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/cropped-Untitled-design-7-32x32.png Forex strategies – ForexCracked https://www.forexcracked.com 32 32 173903315 Volatility Breakout Forex Strategy – Timing the Market for Maximum Profit https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/volatility-breakout-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/volatility-breakout-forex-strategy/#respond Tue, 25 Mar 2025 17:25:58 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=168194 The Volatility Breakout Forex Strategy is one of the most powerful ways to trade big moves in the market. When prices break out after a quiet period, they often move fast, and if you can catch that momentum early, the profit potential is huge.

In this guide, we’ll explain exactly how the Volatility Breakout Forex Strategy works, why it’s so effective, and how to use it step by step. From the best indicators to spotting real breakouts (not fakeouts) and managing your risk like a pro, you’ll get a full blueprint to trade volatility with confidence and precision.

Understanding Volatility in Forex

Understanding Volatility in Forex

What Is Volatility?

Volatility refers to the magnitude of market price movements over a given period. In Forex, volatility can be influenced by various factors such as economic announcements, geopolitical news, and changes in global market sentiment. A highly volatile market is characterized by larger swings—prices can rise or fall dramatically in a short amount of time.

Why Volatility Matters in Forex

  • Profit Potential – When the market moves quickly, the potential for profit (and loss) increases. By correctly anticipating these movements, traders can capitalize on larger price swings.
  • Risk Concerns – While volatility can present profit opportunities, it also introduces greater risk. Prices may move against your position more sharply than in a stable market.
  • Market Activity – Periods of high volatility often coincide with increased market participation and volume, which can improve the efficiency of trade execution.

Common Misconceptions About Volatility

  • “Volatility is always a bad thing.” While high volatility can be risky, it also offers excellent trading opportunities for those who know how to manage risk effectively.
  • “Volatility can be predicted with 100% accuracy.” No indicator or strategy can predict market movements flawlessly. The Volatility Breakout Strategy aims to react to actual market movement rather than predict it outright.

What Is a Volatility Breakout Forex Strategy?

What Is a Volatility Breakout Forex Strategy

Core Concept and Definition

A Volatility Breakout Forex Strategy is designed to capture explosive price movements that occur once the market breaks out of a period of low volatility or consolidation. Essentially, the idea is to:

  1. Identify when the market has been trading in a narrow range or exhibiting low volatility.
  2. Detect the moment when the price breaks out of this range.
  3. Execute a trade in the direction of the breakout to capitalize on the accelerated price action.

Market Timing and Volatility

Timing is crucial. Many traders look for a spike in volatility after a period of consolidation or low activity. This is often visible on a price chart as narrow ranges or “squeezes” in certain indicators such as Bollinger Bands or Keltner Channels. When the bands expand or the price breaks above/below these channels, it can signify a shift from low volatility to high volatility.

Key Indicators and Tools

To effectively implement a Volatility Breakout Strategy, you need tools to measure volatility and identify breakouts. Some of the most popular are:

  • Bollinger Bands – Highlights volatility by plotting standard deviations around a moving average.
  • Average True Range (ATR) – Measures how much an asset has been moving on average over a specified period.
  • Donchian Channels – Based on the highest high and lowest low over a specified time period, useful for breakout signals.
  • Keltner Channels – Similar to Bollinger Bands but uses the Average True Range for channel width.

Core Components of a Volatility Breakout Strategy

Core Components of a Volatility Breakout Strategy

Identifying High-Volatility Market Environments

Not all currency pairs and time frames are suitable for a Volatility Breakout Strategy at all times. Traders typically wait for:

  • Periods of Contraction: When the price movement narrows. Tools like Bollinger Band “squeezes” can help identify these moments.
  • Sudden Expansion: A swift expansion in the price range or an actual breakout of a defined channel.

Defining Entry and Exit Criteria

  • Entry: You decide on a set number of pips or an indicator-based threshold that signals a breakout. For instance, if Bollinger Bands start to expand and the price closes above the upper band, that could be your entry signal.
  • Exit: Based on ATR or other indicators, determine whether you will use a fixed take profit or a trailing stop. The point is to exit either at a specific profit target or if the price action indicates the move has lost momentum.

Stop-Loss Placement and Risk Management

A Volatility Breakout Strategy without proper stop-loss placement can be dangerous. Popular choices include:

  • Below/Above the Recent Swing: If you’re going long, place the stop-loss below the most recent swing low; if short, above the most recent swing high.
  • Indicator-Based Stop: Some traders rely on ATR for dynamic stop-loss placement. For example, you might place your stop-loss 1.5 times the ATR below the entry price on a long trade.

Choosing the Right Currency Pairs and Time Frames

Choosing the Right Currency Pairs and Time Frames

Currency Pairs With High Volatility

Certain currency pairs tend to exhibit higher volatility:

  • GBP/JPY: Known for significant daily movement.
  • GBP/USD: Pound-related pairs tend to move more due to macroeconomic factors.
  • EUR/USD: The most liquid pair, and while its volatility may be moderate, it can still present reliable breakout opportunities.
  • AUD/USD or NZD/USD: During certain times (especially related to commodity price changes), these can experience higher volatility.

Best Time Frames for Breakout Strategies

Time frames can vary based on a trader’s preference. Here are some guidelines:

  • Short-Term (15-minute to 1-hour): Suitable for intraday volatility plays and quick breakouts, but signals can be more frequent and prone to noise.
  • Medium-Term (4-hour to Daily): Fewer signals but potentially stronger and more reliable, as breakouts in these time frames are more significant and can lead to substantial trends.
  • Long-Term (Weekly/Monthly): A Volatility Breakout Strategy is less commonly used on weekly or monthly charts because you need long periods of low volatility followed by dramatic breakouts, which might be rarer.

Correlated vs. Non-Correlated Pairs

Correlated Currency Pairs

Positive CorrelationNegative Correlation
EUR/USD ↔ GBP/USDEUR/USD ↔ USD/CHF
AUD/USD ↔ NZD/USDGBP/USD ↔ USD/JPY
EUR/USD ↔ AUD/USDEUR/JPY ↔ USD/JPY
USD/CAD ↔ NZD/USDAUD/USD ↔ USD/CHF
GBP/USD ↔ AUD/USDEUR/USD ↔ USD/JPY

Non-Correlated Currency Pairs

Examples
EUR/USD ↔ USD/JPY
GBP/JPY ↔ AUD/CAD
NZD/JPY ↔ EUR/GBP
USD/CHF ↔ AUD/JPY
CAD/JPY ↔ GBP/NZD

Traders often choose non-correlated pairs to diversify. For instance, if you’re trading GBP/JPY, you might avoid taking a similar breakout signal on EUR/JPY if both move similarly. That said, focusing on correlated pairs can also compound gains if the strategy is successful, but it carries higher risk.

Setting Up Your Charts and Indicators

Bollinger Bands

Bollinger Bands

Created by John Bollinger, Bollinger Bands plot an upper and lower band around a simple moving average. The distance between the bands widens during volatile periods and narrows during low-volatility periods. For a Volatility Breakout Strategy:

  • Look for a squeeze: A period where the bands narrow significantly.
  • Await the price to close outside the band: Potential breakout signal.

Average True Range (ATR)

Average True Range (ATR)

ATR calculates the average range between high and low over a specified number of bars. Traders use ATR to:

  • Set Stop-Loss Orders: Using a multiple of the ATR below/above the entry can help accommodate normal price fluctuations.
  • Gauge Breakout Potential: An unusually high ATR might indicate a breakout or a trending market.

Keltner Channels

Keltner Channels

Keltner Channels use the ATR to plot bands around an exponential moving average. They’re often less noisy than Bollinger Bands. A breakout above the upper Keltner Channel or below the lower channel can signal a potential entry.

Donchian Channels

Donchian Channels

Developed by Richard Donchian, these channels mark the highest high and the lowest low over a set period. A break above the upper channel signals a bullish breakout, while a break below the lower channel signals a bearish one.

Step-by-Step Implementation of the Volatility Breakout Strategy

In this section, we’ll combine everything discussed so far into a cohesive step-by-step plan for trading volatility breakouts. The main objective is to detect low-volatility phases and capture profits when volatility suddenly expands.

Step 1: Pinpointing the Setup

Identify Low-Volatility Periods
  1. Scan Currency Pairs: Focus on pairs known to exhibit high volatility or check the entire market for potential breakout conditions.
  2. Identify Low-Volatility Periods: Use indicators like Bollinger Band squeezes or declining ATR values to find when a pair is trading in a narrow range.

Step 2: Confirming the Breakout

Step 2 Confirming the Breakout
  1. Look for a Price Close Beyond a Key Level: For Bollinger Bands, you’d look for a close above the upper band or below the lower band.
  2. Check Volume (if available): Higher volume can confirm that the breakout has momentum behind it.
  3. Validate With Additional Indicators (optional): Use tools such as moving average crossovers or MACD to see if momentum aligns with the breakout direction.

Step 3: Placing Entry Orders

  1. Market Orders vs. Pending Orders:
    • Market Orders: Enter immediately once the breakout is confirmed.
    • Pending Orders (Stop Orders): Place buy stop above resistance or sell stop below support to catch the breakout if it continues.
  2. Avoid Impulsive Entries: Wait for at least one candle to close beyond your breakout threshold to filter out potential fakeouts.

Step 4: Stop-Loss and Take-Profit Placement

Stop-Loss and Take-Profit Placement
  1. Stop-Loss:
    • Below/Above the Recent Swing: For a long position, a stop below the recent swing low; for a short, above the recent swing high.
    • ATR-Based: If your ATR(14) is 20 pips, consider placing a stop-loss 1.5 × 20 = 30 pips away from the entry.
  2. Take-Profit:
    • Fixed Ratio: Aim for a 2:1 or 3:1 reward-to-risk ratio.
    • Dynamic Targets: Use a trailing stop or move your stop as the trade goes in your favor, aiming to capture sustained breakouts.

Step 5: Trade Management During Live Market Conditions

Monitor ATR
  1. Monitor ATR or Volatility Indicators: If volatility spikes further, you may want to adjust targets or add to your position (scaling in).
  2. Move Stops to Break Even: Once the trade moves favorably by an amount equal to your initial risk, you might consider moving your stop-loss to your entry price to eliminate risk.
  3. Partial Profits: Some traders take partial profits at a certain level and let the remainder run.

Step 6: Exit Strategies

  1. Stop-Loss Hit: If the market reverses and your stop is hit, accept the loss and move on. Discipline is crucial.
  2. Trailing Stop Trigger: If you’re using a trailing stop, you’ll exit when the price retraces enough to trigger your stop.
  3. Indicator-Based Exit: For instance, if price moves back inside Bollinger Bands after a breakout, that could be an exit signal.

Risk Management Tactics

Position Sizing

  • Risk Per Trade: Many professionals recommend risking no more than 1%–2% of your account on any single trade.
  • Lot Size Calculation: If your stop-loss is 30 pips, and you’re risking 1% of a $10,000 account (i.e., $100), you can adjust your position size so that a 30-pip loss equals $100.

Hedging Techniques

  • Pair Hedging: Some traders open a long position in one currency pair and a short position in a correlated pair to mitigate risk. This approach is more advanced and requires a thorough understanding.
  • Instrument Diversification: Rather than trading multiple positions on the same currency pair, diversify across different pairs—though make sure you understand correlation.

Trailing Stops

  • Dynamic Risk Control: As the trade moves in your favor, you can gradually lock in profits by moving your stop-loss upward (for long trades) or downward (for short trades).
  • ATR-Based Trailing Stops: For instance, as volatility increases, you might widen your trailing stop or keep it at a consistent multiple of the ATR.

Diversification Within Forex

Trading multiple pairs can spread risk, but avoid overexposure to correlated pairs. For instance, if you’re already trading EUR/USD and GBP/USD, be mindful that both pairs may react similarly to USD-centric news.

Practical Examples and Case Studies

Practical Examples and Case Studies

Real-Time Example of a Volatility Breakout Trade

  1. Currency Pair: GBP/JPY
  2. Time Frame: 1-hour chart
  3. Indicator Setup: Bollinger Bands (20,2) and ATR(14)
  4. Market Context: GBP/JPY had been in a tight 50-pip range for several hours. Bollinger Bands narrowed noticeably, signaling reduced volatility.
  5. Breakout: Price closed above the upper Bollinger Band while ATR increased from 12 to 18 pips, indicating rising volatility.
  6. Entry: Trader placed a buy stop 5 pips above the breakout candle’s high.
  7. Stop-Loss: 1.5 × ATR (1.5 × 18 = 27 pips) below the entry point.
  8. Outcome: The pair rallied another 50 pips. The trader moved stop-loss to break even after 27 pips of profit and trailed stops by 10 pips as price climbed. Eventually closed the trade at +40 pips.

Analyzing Historical Data

Backtesting a Volatility Breakout Strategy on historical data can help validate its effectiveness. For instance, if you’re using a Bollinger Band breakout, you might review how often a close above the upper band led to sustained upward moves. Keep track of the frequency of false signals and adjust your criteria accordingly.

Lessons Learned From Successful and Failed Trades

  • Successful Trades: Typically occur when multiple factors align—breakout, rising volume, higher ATR, and supportive price action.
  • Failed Trades: Often happen when a trader ignores or misinterprets additional confirming indicators, or enters prematurely before a candle close beyond a breakout zone.

Psychological Factors and Discipline

Controlling Emotions During Volatile Markets

  • Adrenaline Rush: A sudden spike in volatility can be exciting. This excitement can lead to impulsive decisions. Have a plan and stick to it.
  • Fear of Missing Out (FOMO): Seeing a massive price move can tempt you to jump in late, which often results in poor trade entries.

Sticking to Your Plan

A well-defined trading plan outlines exactly what conditions must be met before you place a trade. If these conditions aren’t met, avoid jumping in. Consistency is the backbone of long-term success.

Overcoming Fear of Losing

All traders face losses at some point. A robust risk management plan helps mitigate the impact of losing trades, making them less emotionally distressing.

Common Mistakes and Pitfalls to Avoid

  • Overtrading in Volatile Conditions
    When volatility is high, multiple currency pairs might signal breakouts simultaneously. Jumping into all of them can escalate risk exponentially. Aim for quality over quantity.
  • Misreading False Breakouts
    Not every price movement beyond a resistance or support level constitutes a genuine breakout. Some moves quickly reverse, trapping overzealous traders. Waiting for a candle close or a secondary confirmation (e.g., volume spike, confluence with a momentum indicator) can help filter out false signals.
  • Ignoring Risk Parameters
    Failing to place a stop-loss, or placing a stop so far away that it neglects risk management, can be disastrous. Always define your risk per trade and adhere to it strictly.

Tips for Improving Your Volatility Breakout Strategy

Tips for Improving Your Volatility Breakout Strategy

Backtesting and Forward Testing

  • Backtesting: Use historical price data to simulate trades. It gives you an idea of the strategy’s potential performance under various market conditions.
  • Forward Testing/Demo Trading: Apply the strategy in real-time with a demo account to understand how the market behaves and how effectively you can execute the plan.

Refining Entry and Exit Signals

You can enhance the reliability of your signals by combining volatility indicators with momentum oscillators like RSI or MACD. This additional confluence might help distinguish real breakouts from false ones.

Staying Current With Market News and Events

Major economic announcements can spark volatility, creating breakout conditions. Stay aware of upcoming events like interest rate decisions, Non-Farm Payrolls, or GDP releases. While some traders avoid trading during major news events due to unpredictability, news-driven volatility can also present prime breakout opportunities.

Conclusion: Mastering Volatility Breakouts for Long-Term Success

The Volatility Breakout Forex Strategy is a powerful method for capturing sharp price movements during periods of sudden market expansion. By focusing on low-volatility phases that transition into breakouts, traders can time entries with precision and unlock substantial profit potential—if backed by disciplined risk management.

Key Steps:

  • Identify low volatility using tools like Bollinger Bands, ATR, Keltner, or Donchian Channels.
  • Confirm the breakout with candle closes beyond key levels and possibly volume or momentum indicators.
  • Set stop-loss and targets near logical levels with a solid reward-to-risk ratio.
  • Monitor trades closely, adjust stops, and take partial profits if needed.
  • Stay disciplined by following your plan and avoiding emotional decisions.

Takeaways:

  • Volatility offers big rewards but comes with increased risk.
  • Systematic, well-tested strategies help reduce false signals.
  • Choose the right pairs and trade during active sessions like London or New York.
  • Consistency, backtesting, and emotional control are essential for long-term success.

With proper execution, this strategy can become a key part of your trading toolkit helping you navigate and profit from the most dynamic phases of the Forex market.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/volatility-breakout-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 168194
Exponential Moving Average – EMA Strategy: Riding the Forex Trend https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ema-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ema-strategy/#respond Fri, 07 Mar 2025 21:35:34 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=167100 Forex trading moves fast, and knowing how to spot and ride trends is a game-changer if you want to stay ahead. One of the most popular tools traders use for this is moving averages, which help smooth out price action, highlight trends, and even act as dynamic support and resistance levels. The Exponential Moving Average (EMA) stands out because it reacts quickly to price changes, giving traders an edge in fast-moving markets.

In this guide, we’re diving deep into the EMA strategy, also known as “Riding the Forex Trend.” We’ll break down everything you need to know about how EMAs work and how to use them to find trade setups, manage risk, and maximize profits. Whether you’re a beginner or a experienced trader, by the end of this, you’ll have a solid strategy for using EMAs to catch and ride trends with confidence. Let’s get started!

What Is an Exponential Moving Average (EMA)?

What Is an Exponential Moving Average (EMA)

The Exponential Moving Average (EMA) is a type of moving average that places more weight on the most recent price data. This causes the EMA to react faster to recent price fluctuations than a Simple Moving Average (SMA), which gives equal weight to all data points in the period.

For instance, when a major news release causes a sudden spike or drop in price, an EMA on your chart adjusts more rapidly in response to those current price changes, whereas a simple moving average might be slower to reflect the new price level.

Key Advantages of EMAs

  • Responsiveness – Because of how it’s calculated, the EMA captures recent price movements more quickly. This can help traders spot trend changes or confirm momentum faster.
  • Trend-Clarity – Many traders use EMAs to smooth out the price curve and more readily discern the trend’s direction. The steeper the slope of the EMA line, the stronger the trend.
  • Versatility – EMAs can be applied to various market instruments, timeframes, and strategies, making them especially popular in fast-moving markets like Forex.

How the EMA Is Calculated

While most trading platforms calculate EMAs automatically, understanding the math behind the indicator helps you appreciate how it reacts to price changes.

Start with the Simple Moving Average (SMA)
For the first EMA value, you typically begin with an SMA of the most recent prices for the period you’re analyzing. For example, if you’re dealing with a 20-period EMA, calculate the 20-period SMA first.

Define the Weighting Multiplier
The weighting multiplier for the EMA is calculated as:

where n is the number of periods in the EMA (e.g., 20 for a 20-day EMA).

Apply the EMA Formula
The basic EMA formula is:

EMA today = (Price today × Multiplier) + (EMA yesterday × (1−Multiplier))

This formula shows how each new value depends partly on today’s price and partly on the previous EMA value, with recent price data given more emphasis.

Why Traders Use EMAs in Forex

  • Quick Adaptation to Market Shifts
    Forex prices can move rapidly due to economic announcements, geopolitical tensions, and investor sentiment changes. The EMA’s sensitivity to recent data helps traders adapt to these swift shifts.
  • Clearer Trend Visualization
    Many traders look at multiple EMAs on their charts (e.g., a 50-period and 200-period EMA) to quickly ascertain whether a bullish or bearish trend is in play. Crossovers and the slope of the EMA lines can help confirm trend directions.
  • Versatile Timeframe Application
    You can apply EMAs to anything from a 1-minute chart to a weekly chart. Whether you’re a day trader, scalper, or swing trader, EMAs can fit your strategy and timeframe.
  • Better Entry and Exit Points
    When combined with proper risk management, EMA signals can help you refine your trade entries and exits, often providing a more objective method than relying solely on discretionary judgments.

Trend Identification with EMAs

Trend Identification with EMAs

Identifying a Trend is the most basic but vital function of EMAs in Forex. Here are some guidelines:

  1. EMA Slope:
    • If the EMA line is sloping upward, this suggests an uptrend (bullish environment).
    • If the EMA line is sloping downward, this suggests a downtrend (bearish environment).
    • A flat EMA line could indicate a ranging or sideways market.
  2. Price in Relation to the EMA:
    • When price consistently remains above an EMA, it often signifies a bullish market.
    • When price remains below an EMA, it often signifies a bearish market.
  3. Multiple EMAs:
    • Using more than one EMA (e.g., a short-term EMA like 20 and a longer-term EMA like 50) can help you confirm trends. If the short-term EMA is above the long-term EMA, it typically indicates an uptrend; if it’s below, it typically indicates a downtrend.

Once you’ve identified the primary trend, your goal as a trader who wants to “ride the trend” is to align your positions in that direction.

Choosing the Right EMA Periods

One question traders regularly ask is: Which EMA periods should I use? The answer varies based on trading style, timeframe, and personal preference. Let’s break down some common options:

  • Short-Term EMAs (e.g., 10-day, 20-day)
    Ideal for short-term traders and scalpers aiming to capture quick moves. These EMAs react quickly, producing more signals but also more potential whipsaws.
  • Medium-Term EMAs (e.g., 50-day, 100-day)
    Often favored by swing traders who hold positions for several days or weeks. These periods strike a balance between responsiveness and stability.
  • Long-Term EMAs (e.g., 200-day)
    Commonly used by position traders and those wanting to understand the overarching market direction. They are less prone to short-term price noise and can serve as significant support or resistance levels.

The choice ultimately depends on your objectives. Some traders combine multiple EMA periods on a single chart to gain insights into short-, medium-, and long-term trends all at once.

Multi-EMA Setups

Multi-EMA Setups

A popular approach is to combine at least two EMAs a short-term EMA and a long-term EMA to get a clearer picture of the market’s trend.

Common Combinations

  1. 9 EMA & 21 EMA:
    Frequently used by short-term day traders who want quick signals.
  2. 20 EMA & 50 EMA:
    A favored combination by many swing traders.
  3. 50 EMA & 200 EMA:
    Provides a broad perspective on the overall trend and is common among long-term traders.

Why Use Multiple EMAs?

  • Trend Confirmation: If a short-term EMA is above a long-term EMA, that strongly suggests a bullish phase. If it’s below, that suggests a bearish phase.
  • Timing: Multi-EMA strategies may help in timing entries and exits better.
  • Support and Resistance: Multiple EMA lines can act as dynamic support and resistance levels. Price may pull back to these lines and then bounce in the direction of the trend.

EMA Crossover Strategy Basics

A widely recognized strategy based on EMAs involves crossovers:

Bullish Crossover

Bullish Crossover

Occurs when a faster (shorter period) EMA crosses above a slower (longer period) EMA, often signaling a potential shift to an uptrend.

Bearish Crossover

Bearish Crossover

Occurs when the faster EMA crosses below the slower EMA, often signaling a potential shift to a downtrend.

Traders often use these crossovers to generate entry signals. For instance, in a 20 EMA and 50 EMA system, a bullish crossover would be when the 20 EMA moves above the 50 EMA, leading a trader to consider opening a long position. Conversely, a bearish crossover would be when the 20 EMA falls below the 50 EMA, indicating a short entry opportunity.

While crossovers can be useful, they are not infallible. Markets can range or oscillate, causing multiple “false” signals. Thus, it’s prudent to use additional filters—like price action analysis or another indicator—to confirm the signals before taking a trade.

Riding the Trend with the EMA Strategy

To “ride” a trend effectively using EMAs, you’ll combine the concepts of trend identification, momentum confirmation, patient trade management, and money management. The steps outlined below provide a detailed framework.

Market Environment Assessment

Market Environment Assessment

First, establish if the market is trending or range-bound. If the EMAs are frequently crossing over each other in a narrow band, the market may be ranging, making a “trend-riding” strategy less effective.

If the EMAs are clearly spaced and angled in one direction, the market is likely trending.

Identify the Trend

bullish trend

For a bullish trend, ensure the shorter EMA is above the longer EMA, and price is trading above both. The EMAs should both slope upward.

bearish trend

For a bearish trend, ensure the shorter EMA is below the longer EMA, and price is trading below both. The EMAs should slope downward.

Wait for Pullbacks or Corrections

Wait for Pullbacks or Corrections

In a bullish trend, wait for price to pull back near the EMA (or set of EMAs). This zone often acts as dynamic support, offering potential low-risk entries.

In a bearish trend, wait for a rally back to the EMA region, which often serves as dynamic resistance.

Enter in the Direction of the Trend

Enter in the Direction of the Trend

Consider using candlestick patterns (e.g., bullish engulfing, hammer, pin bar) as a trigger to confirm a continuation of the established trend.

Entering on these pullbacks can provide a favorable risk-to-reward ratio, as you’re essentially “buying at a discount” or “selling at a premium” within a larger trending move.

Set Stop-Loss and Take-Profit

Set Stop-Loss and Take-Profit

A stop-loss can be placed below (in a bullish trend) or above (in a bearish trend) the swing low/high. Some traders also put the stop-loss slightly beyond the EMA to account for potential price spikes.

For targets, you can use prior swing highs or lows, a trailing stop based on the EMA itself, or a reward-to-risk ratio (e.g., aiming for 2:1 or 3:1).

Let Winners Run

The essence of “riding the trend” is to allow profitable trades to remain open as long as the market moves in your favor.

One technique is to use a trailing stop. As price advances with the trend, move your stop-loss up (for a bullish trade) or down (for a bearish trade), following the EMA. This can lock in profits while giving the trade room to extend.

Exit When Trend Weakens or Reverses

Exit When Trend Weakens or Reverses

Signs of trend exhaustion include a flattening EMA, a crossover in the opposite direction, or a break of a key swing point.

In a multi-EMA system (e.g., 20 & 50), if the faster EMA crosses below the slower EMA in an uptrend, that’s a significant red flag prompting some traders to close out their positions.

By carefully following these steps, you increase your likelihood of catching sustained Forex moves while minimizing false starts.

Timeframe Considerations

Timeframe Considerations

Timeframes can significantly alter how EMA signals appear and how you interpret them:

  1. Scalping (1-minute to 5-minute charts)
    • EMAs will generate more frequent signals, but noise is higher.
    • You’ll look for very short EMAs (e.g., 9 or 20) and rely on quick in-and-out trades.
  2. Day Trading (15-minute to 1-hour charts)
    • Ideal for traders who want multiple trades a day.
    • EMAs around 20, 50, or 100 can work well.
  3. Swing Trading (4-hour to daily charts)
    • Fewer signals, but they might be more robust with potentially larger moves.
    • EMAs like 50, 100, or 200 are common.
  4. Position Trading (Weekly charts)
    • Very few signals in a year, but each signal can represent a longer-term move.
    • Long-term EMAs (100, 200, 300) help identify significant market shifts.

Your choice depends on your availability, risk tolerance, and profit goals. Always align your EMA settings and strategy to the timeframe you plan to trade.

Entry Points, Exits, and Stop-Loss Placement

Finding Ideal Entry Points

  • EMA Bounces – An effective approach is to wait for price to retrace to the EMA in a trending market. Enter on a bounce when price resumes moving in the trend direction.
  • EMA Crossovers – A straightforward method is to enter when a short-term EMA crosses above (or below) a longer-term EMA. Use price action or another indicator (like RSI or MACD) to confirm the viability of the signal.
  • Breakouts – Some traders wait for price to break above a recent swing high or below a recent swing low while the EMAs maintain a consistent slope. This approach can minimize false signals in choppy markets.

Setting Stop-Losses

Setting Stop-Losses
  • Fixed Stop – You can choose a specific number of pips away from your entry. This method is simple but does not adapt to price swings.
  • Structure-Based Stop – More precise: place your stop below a swing low (for longs) or above a swing high (for shorts). This approach considers market structure, reducing the chance of being prematurely stopped out by random noise.
  • EMA-Based Stop – Place your stop just beyond the EMA, giving the trade enough “breathing room” while still protecting capital if price breaks decisively in the opposite direction.

Exiting Trades

Exiting Trades
  • Take Profit at Key Levels – Identify major support and resistance levels, previous highs/lows, or psychologically important round numbers (e.g., 1.2000 in EUR/USD).
  • Trailing Stop – Move the stop-loss in the direction of the trade as it becomes profitable. For instance, you might trail by the distance to the EMA or a fixed number of pips.
  • Indicator Based Exit – Use another indicator (like MACD crossing the zero line, RSI reaching oversold/overbought territory, or an opposing EMA crossover) to decide when to exit.

Choosing the right combination of entries and exits is both an art and a science. Backtesting your chosen method on historical data is essential for gaining confidence before risking real capital.

Combining EMAs with Other Indicators

Combining EMAs with Other Indicators

While EMAs are powerful tools for trend riding, combining them with other indicators or methods can offer stronger signals and reduce false positives.

  • RSI (Relative Strength Index) – Measures overbought or oversold conditions. You might wait for RSI to exit an oversold region in an uptrend before buying, reinforcing the entry signal you get from an EMA pullback.
  • MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence) – Uses EMAs in its calculation (12-day, 26-day, 9-day) to measure momentum. A MACD crossover in alignment with an EMA-based trend can be a compelling signal.
  • Stochastic Oscillator – Another momentum-based indicator. Look for a bullish or bearish crossover within a Stochastic reading that aligns with the EMA-defined trend direction.
  • Price Action – Candlestick patterns such as pin bars, engulfing patterns, and inside bars can provide precise entries or exits.
  • Support and resistance – Support and resistance zones can act as additional filters, confirming the validity of an EMA-based signal.

Combining multiple confirmations increases the probability that a trade will move in your favor, although it may reduce the number of signals you receive.

Practical Examples of EMA Strategies

Below are two simplified examples to illustrate how you might apply an EMA-based trend-riding approach in real-market scenarios:

Example 1: 20 EMA & 50 EMA for Swing Trading on a 4-Hour Chart

  1. Identify Trend
    • If the 20 EMA is above the 50 EMA, the trend is bullish. Both EMAs should be sloping upward.
  2. Wait for Pullback
    • Price dips back toward the 20 or 50 EMA. The pullback is indicated by a short-term price decline.
  3. Enter Long
    • Once price finds support around the EMAs and forms a bullish candlestick pattern (like a bullish engulfing), enter a buy trade.
  4. Stop-Loss
    • Place stop-loss just below the most recent swing low, which may also be near the 50 EMA for extra confirmation.
  5. Take-Profit
    • Aim for the next resistance level, or consider using a trailing stop.
  6. Exit
    • Exit if a 20/50 bearish crossover occurs or if price breaks below the 50 EMA decisively.

Example 2: 9 EMA & 21 EMA for Day Trading on a 15-Minute Chart

  1. Set EMAs
    • Apply 9 EMA (fast) and 21 EMA (slow) to the chart.
  2. Look for Crossovers
    • A bullish crossover (9 above 21) signals a potential uptrend.
  3. Confirmation
    • Use RSI (14) to confirm momentum is above 50 (bullish).
  4. Entry
    • Enter a long position when price closes above both EMAs.
  5. Stop-Loss
    • Place your stop-loss below the swing low formed during or before the crossover.
  6. Manage Trade
    • If price remains above the 9 EMA, you can hold the position. If it crosses back below the 9 EMA or the 9 crosses below the 21, you consider exiting.
  7. Profit Target
    • Choose a 2:1 or 3:1 reward-to-risk ratio or close the trade as you approach a known resistance level.

These examples provide a general overview of how you might operationalize an EMA-based approach in different timeframes. Adapt them based on your personal preference, risk tolerance, and market conditions.

Common Mistakes and How to Avoid Them

1. Over-Reliance on EMAs Alone

  • Mistake: Entering trades solely because price crosses an EMA.
  • Solution: Combine EMAs with other forms of technical or fundamental analysis to confirm signals.

2. Ignoring Market Conditions

  • Mistake: Using a trend-following strategy in a flat or choppy market.
  • Solution: Assess volatility and momentum. If EMAs are flat and crossing frequently, it’s often better to stand aside.

3. Neglecting Risk Management

  • Mistake: Placing large trades with tight stops, leading to frequent stop-outs.
  • Solution: Maintain consistent position sizing and ensure that each trade aligns with your risk tolerance.

4. Lack of Discipline

  • Mistake: Exiting trades prematurely or moving stop-losses further away in fear or greed.
  • Solution: Develop and stick to a well-defined trading plan. Emotions can derail even the best strategies.

5. No Proper Backtesting or Forward Testing

  • Mistake: Trading a strategy live without any historical or demo-trading validation.
  • Solution: Test your EMA approach on historical data (backtesting) and in demo environments before risking real money.

Avoiding these pitfalls enhances the probability of consistent success.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

Q1: Which EMA settings are best for Forex trading?
There is no one-size-fits-all setting. Day traders might favor shorter EMAs (like 9, 20, or 21) because they want quick signals. Swing or position traders often use 50, 100, or 200 EMAs to identify broader trends. Experimentation and backtesting are key.

Q2: Are EMAs suitable for beginner traders?
Yes, EMAs are relatively easy to learn and interpret, making them beginner-friendly. However, beginners should still practice risk management and possibly combine EMA signals with basic price action or another confirming indicator.

Q3: Can I rely on EMA crossovers alone?
While some traders do, you increase your success rate by adding other forms of analysis—technical or fundamental. Crossovers can produce “false signals” in low-volume or sideways markets, so additional confirmation is beneficial.

Q4: How do I decide when to exit a trade?
You can base exits on an opposite EMA crossover, a trailing stop that follows the EMA, or price reaching a major support/resistance zone. Many traders also let winning trades run until the market shows concrete signs of reversal.

Q5: Are EMAs effective in high-impact news events?
High-impact news releases can cause erratic price spikes that can distort EMA readings for a short period. While EMAs are good trend indicators, you should remain cautious around major news releases and consider stepping aside or using wider stops.

Q6: Should I manually calculate EMAs?
You don’t need to manually calculate EMAs, as charting platforms do it for you instantly. Understanding the formula, however, gives you deeper insight into how the indicator responds to price changes.

Q7: Do EMAs work on cryptocurrencies or stocks?
Yes, EMAs are not limited to Forex. Traders successfully apply EMAs to stocks, cryptocurrencies, and commodities. The principle remains the same: you’re smoothing out price data to identify trends.

Conclusion

The Exponential Moving Average (EMA) Strategy—often referred to as “Riding the Forex Trend”—is a cornerstone technique that underscores the power of identifying and capitalizing on prevailing price directions. EMAs provide a responsive and relatively straightforward way to gauge market sentiment, distinguish a trending environment, and pinpoint potential trade opportunities.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ema-strategy/feed/ 0 167100
Mastering Price Action Forex Trading Strategies – Your Comprehensive Guide to Consistent Profits https://www.forexcracked.com/education/price-action-forex-trading-strategies/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/price-action-forex-trading-strategies/#respond Wed, 26 Feb 2025 17:42:47 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=166588 Price Action Forex Trading Strategies represent one of the most effective and purest forms of technical analysis in the Forex market. Instead of relying on lagging indicators or complex algorithms, price action traders analyze raw market data, focusing on the open, high, low, and close prices to make informed trading decisions. By studying the patterns and structures formed on the price chart, traders can interpret market sentiment and anticipate future price movements with greater accuracy.

What makes Price Action Forex Trading Strategies so powerful is their ability to simplify the market, stripping away unnecessary noise and focusing solely on price behavior. These strategies revolve around key trading principles such as market psychology, supply and demand dynamics, support and resistance levels, and candlestick patterns. Because price action reflects the collective actions of buyers and sellers, it provides deep insights into market trends, momentum shifts, and potential reversals.

In this comprehensive guide, we will break down everything you need to know about mastering Price Action Forex Trading Strategies from identifying market structure and key levels to implementing high-probability trading setups. Whether you are a beginner or an experienced trader, understanding these strategies can help you refine your approach, enhance your decision-making, and ultimately, achieve consistent profits in Forex trading.

Why Choose Price Action Over Indicator Based Trading

Why Choose Price Action Over Indicator-Based Trading

Many Forex traders start with indicator based systems because they are relatively easy to set up. Indicators like Moving Averages, Relative Strength Index (RSI), and Bollinger Bands can provide signals for entering and exiting trades. However, there are key reasons why experienced traders often shift to price action:

  1. Simplicity – Price action does not require a cluttered chart filled with multiple indicators. Fewer distractions can help traders focus on key levels and momentum.
  2. Timeliness – Indicators are often lagging, which means they might give signals after the price has already moved substantially. Price action relies on real-time data (the price itself), enabling more timely decision-making.
  3. Better Market Insight – Price action traders learn to read the “story” behind the candlesticks, who is in control: buyers or sellers? This understanding can help anticipate shifts in momentum before they are obvious on standard indicators.
  4. Adaptability – Markets evolve. An indicator-based strategy may lose its edge if market conditions shift. Price action strategies adapt more fluidly because they are based on current price behavior, not historical calculation alone.
  5. Flexibility Across Timeframes – Price action methods are equally applicable to scalpers (trading on the 1-minute or 5-minute charts), swing traders (trading on the 4-hour or daily charts), and everything in between.

Core Principles of Price Action

Price action trading is built upon several core principles that can guide your analysis:

  1. Market Psychology – Prices move as a result of supply and demand imbalances. When buyers are in control, the price moves up; when sellers are in control, the price moves down. Price action helps you visualize this dynamic through candlesticks and patterns.
  2. Support and Resistance – Past price levels where the market has shown reactions (bounced, reversed, or consolidated) are likely to be important levels in the future. Price action traders closely observe these horizontal zones to look for trading opportunities.
  3. Trend Analysis – The market can only move up, down, or sideways. Recognizing the direction of the trend helps you align trades with the prevailing momentum, thus improving your odds of success.
  4. Candlestick Patterns – Individual and multi-candlestick formations can provide insights into immediate market psychology. For instance, a “pin bar” might suggest a reversal, while an “engulfing bar” might signal a strong shift in sentiment.
  5. Volume (If Available) – Although Forex does not have centralized volume data like the stock market, some platforms provide volume indications based on tick activity. Volume can sometimes confirm the strength of a price move. (In equities or futures markets, volume plays a crucial role, but in Forex, it may not be as definitive.)
  6. Risk Management – Successful price action trading isn’t just about picking the right entries and exits; it’s also about protecting your capital through appropriate position sizing, stop-loss placement, and profit-taking strategies.

Before placing any trade, a price action trader needs to identify the overarching market structure. Essentially, you need to answer these questions:

  • Is the market in an uptrend (series of higher highs and higher lows)?
  • Is the market in a downtrend (series of lower highs and lower lows)?
  • Is the market ranging (price oscillating between a support level and a resistance level without forming strong trends)?
  • Checkout Our list of Market Structure Indicators

Identifying an Uptrend

Identifying an Uptrend

An uptrend occurs when the market forms higher highs (HH) and higher lows (HL). On a candlestick chart, you’ll see a stair-step pattern moving upward. This indicates that buyers are dominant and pushing the price higher over time.

Key features of an uptrend:

  • Consistent bullish candlesticks
  • Breakouts above prior swing highs
  • Retracements typically find support at previous resistance zones

Identifying a Downtrend

Identifying a Downtrend

A downtrend occurs when the market forms lower highs (LH) and lower lows (LL). On the chart, price steps downward, indicating that sellers are dominant and pushing the price lower over time.

Key features of a downtrend:

  • Consistent bearish candlesticks
  • Breakouts below prior swing lows
  • Retracements typically find resistance at previous support zones

Identifying a Range (Sideways Market)

Identifying a Range (Sideways Market)

A range occurs when the price is moving horizontally between a well-defined support level and a resistance level. Neither buyers nor sellers have a clear advantage. Traders often refer to this as “consolidation” or a “choppy” market.

Key features of a range:

  • Price bounces between horizontal support and resistance
  • Lack of clear higher highs or lower lows
  • Potential for a breakout when the price eventually exits the range

Why It Matters: Trading in line with market structure can significantly increase your probability of success. For instance, if you notice the market is forming higher highs and higher lows, you’ll look primarily for long (buy) setups in key areas of support.

Support and Resistance Explained

Support and resistance (S&R) levels are among the most foundational concepts in price action trading. They act as potential turning points in the market because they are levels where supply and demand imbalances have historically caused price shifts.

Support

Support
  • Definition: A price level or zone where buying pressure has historically been strong enough to halt or reverse a downtrend.
  • Identification: Look for areas on the chart where the price previously paused or reversed from a downward move.
  • Example: If EUR/USD fell to 1.1000 multiple times and bounced back up, that area around 1.1000 can be considered strong support.

Resistance

Resistance
  • Definition: A price level or zone where selling pressure has historically been strong enough to halt or reverse an uptrend.
  • Identification: Look for areas on the chart where the price previously paused or reversed from an upward move.
  • Example: If GBP/USD rallied to 1.2500 multiple times and fell back down, that area around 1.2500 can be considered strong resistance.

Psychological Support and Resistance

Psychological Support and Resistance

Key psychological levels—often round numbers such as 1.0000, 1.1000, 1.2000, etc.—may act as natural support or resistance because they are easily recognized by a large number of traders. For example, many traders will place stop-loss orders or take-profit orders around these round-number levels.

Candlestick Patterns – The Building Blocks of Price Action

Candlestick patterns reveal valuable insights into market sentiment. By understanding these patterns, you can get a better sense of who controls the market—buyers or sellers—and how strong the momentum is.

Single-Candlestick Patterns

Pin Bar (Hammer / Shooting Star)

Pin Bar (Hammer  Shooting Star)
  • Appearance – A candlestick with a small body and a long wick (tail) extending from one side.
  • Interpretation – The wick indicates a rejection of price from a certain level. A pin bar at support (with a long lower wick) suggests bullish rejection, whereas a pin bar at resistance (with a long upper wick) suggests bearish rejection.
  • Example – If EUR/USD forms a pin bar off a key support level, it might indicate a potential reversal to the upside.

Doji

Doji
  • Appearance – The open and close are nearly the same, creating a candlestick with little to no real body.
  • Interpretation – Indicates indecision in the market. The buyers and sellers are at an equilibrium. A doji at a key level can signal a potential reversal if confirmed by subsequent price action.
  • Example – A doji at the top of a strong uptrend could hint that buying momentum is weakening.

Marubozu

Marubozu
  • Appearance – A candlestick with no wicks (or very small wicks), so the candlestick’s open and close are at or near the extremes of its range.
  • Interpretation – A strong expression of momentum (either bullish or bearish). If it’s a bullish marubozu, buyers dominated the session. If it’s a bearish marubozu, sellers were firmly in control.
  • Example – A bullish marubozu breaking above resistance might suggest a strong breakout.

Multiple-Candlestick Patterns

Engulfing Bars (Bullish/Bearish)

Engulfing Bars (BullishBearish)
  • Appearance – A candlestick that completely “engulfs” the previous candlestick’s range. A bullish engulfing bar opens below and closes above the prior bar. A bearish engulfing bar opens above and closes below the prior bar.
  • Interpretation – Strong shift in momentum. A bullish engulfing bar indicates buyers have taken control from sellers, while a bearish engulfing bar indicates sellers have taken control from buyers.
  • Example – If USD/JPY was in a small downtrend and you suddenly see a bullish engulfing candle at a key support, it may signal a reversal to the upside.

Inside Bar

Inside Bar
  • Appearance – A candlestick whose high and low are completely “inside” the range of the previous candlestick.
  • Interpretation – A period of consolidation or indecision. Traders often wait for a breakout of the inside bar’s range to determine the direction of the next move.
  • Example – An inside bar forming after a strong upward move could mean the market is pausing before continuing the trend or reversing.

Harami

Harami
  • Appearance – Similar to an inside bar, but typically the real body of the second candlestick is smaller and contained within the real body of the previous candlestick.
  • Interpretation – Potential reversal or indecision. Confirmation is often needed from subsequent candlesticks or breaks of key levels.
  • Example – A bearish harami near major resistance could warn of an upcoming downward move.

Chart Patterns and Their Significance

Chart patterns are broader formations of price action that span multiple candlesticks. They help traders identify potential trend reversals or continuations.

Reversal Patterns

Head and Shoulders / Inverse Head and Shoulders

Head and Shoulders
  • Appearance – Three peaks, with the middle peak (the “head”) being taller than the two side peaks (the “shoulders”). For an inverse head and shoulders, the pattern is flipped upside down.
  • Interpretation – A head and shoulders often signals a potential move from uptrend to downtrend. Conversely, an inverse head and shoulders indicates a move from downtrend to uptrend.
  • Example – If you see an inverse head and shoulders on GBP/USD, it could mean that sellers are losing strength and buyers are ready to push the price higher.
  • Read More Head And Shoulders Pattern Indicator MT4 Free Download

Double Top / Double Bottom

Double Top / Double Bottom
  • Appearance – Price forms two distinct peaks (double top) or two distinct troughs (double bottom) at or near the same level.
  • Interpretation – Signals that the price has failed to break through a level (double top) or failed to drop a support (double bottom) below twice, suggesting a potential reversal.
  • Example – EUR/USD forming a double top at 1.2000 might indicate a shift from an uptrend to a downtrend.

Triple Top / Triple Bottom

Triple Bottom
  • Appearance – Price forms three distinct peaks (triple top) or three distinct troughs (triple bottom) at roughly the same level.
  • Interpretation – An even stronger indication of a potential reversal compared to the double top/bottom pattern.
  • Example – Seeing a triple top in a major pair like USD/CHF near an important resistance level could be a strong signal of upcoming bearish movement.

Continuation Patterns

Triangles (Ascending, Descending, Symmetrical)

Triangles (Ascending, Descending, Symmetrical)
  • Appearance – Price converges into a triangular shape. Ascending triangles have a flat resistance and rising trendline support. Descending triangles have a flat support and falling trendline resistance. Symmetrical triangles have both a falling trendline from above and a rising trendline from below, forming a more symmetrical shape.
  • Interpretation – Triangles often indicate consolidation before the price continues in the original trend direction. A breakout in either direction can signal the next big move.
  • Example – A symmetrical triangle in the middle of an uptrend on the EUR/JPY chart might precede a breakout continuation to the upside.

Flags and Pennants

Flags and Pennants
  • Appearance – A strong impulse move (the “flagpole”) followed by a small, angled rectangular pattern (flag) or a small triangle-like pattern (pennant).
  • Interpretation – Flags and pennants generally indicate a pause in the market before continuing in the same direction as the initial flagpole.
  • Example – If GBP/USD sees a sharp move up followed by a tight consolidation channel (a flag), traders will look for a break above the channel as a sign that the uptrend is likely to continue.

Supply and Demand Zones: Identifying Key Price Areas

Supply and Demand Zones Identifying Key Price Areas

While support and resistance levels are typically drawn as horizontal lines, supply and demand zones are often depicted as “zones” or “regions” on the chart. They represent areas where large institutional orders may exist.

  • Supply Zone: An area where sellers overwhelmed buyers, causing a sharp move down. Traders watch for price to return to this area, anticipating a potential reversal or strong selling pressure again.
  • Demand Zone: An area where buyers overwhelmed sellers, causing a sharp move up. Traders watch for price to revisit this zone, anticipating a potential reversal or strong buying pressure again.

Identifying Supply and Demand Zones:

  1. Look for strong, impulsive moves in price—long bullish or bearish candlesticks that break out of a consolidation zone.
  2. Mark the origin of these impulsive moves as potential supply (if the move was downward) or demand (if the move was upward).
  3. Wait for the price to return to these zones to confirm if buyers or sellers step in again.

Supply and demand trading is a popular subset of price action because it aligns well with how major financial institutions, hedge funds, and big banks place large orders in the market.

Developing Price Action Forex Strategies

Below are three popular price action trading strategies. Each can be customized to your risk appetite, time availability, and preferred currency pairs.

Pin Bar Strategy

Pin Bar Strategy

A pin bar is a single-candlestick pattern indicating rejection of price from a certain level. It often signals a potential reversal.

Steps to Trade the Pin Bar Strategy:

  1. Identify Key Levels: Mark major support or resistance zones. Look for pin bars forming at or near these zones.
  2. Confirm with Market Structure: If the market is in an uptrend, look for bullish pin bars forming at support. If the market is in a downtrend, look for bearish pin bars forming at resistance.
  3. Entry: For a bullish pin bar, place a buy stop order just above the pin bar’s high. For a bearish pin bar, place a sell stop order just below the pin bar’s low.
  4. Stop-Loss Placement: Typically, place your stop-loss below the pin bar’s wick for a bullish setup or above the pin bar’s wick for a bearish setup. This ensures that your trade is protected if the market reverses.
  5. Take-Profit: Aim for a favorable risk-to-reward ratio (e.g., 1:2 or 1:3). You can also scale out or trail your stop-loss as the trade moves in your favor.

Example: If EUR/USD has been in a steady uptrend and you spot a bullish pin bar at a well-established support around 1.1500, you might enter a buy trade once the price breaks the high of the pin bar. Your stop-loss would be placed below the pin bar’s low, and you’d target a move back toward the previous swing high, around 1.1600 or higher.

Engulfing Bar Strategy

Engulfing Bar Strategy

An engulfing bar consists of a candlestick that completely engulfs the previous candlestick’s range, signifying a strong shift in sentiment.

Steps to Trade the Engulfing Bar Strategy:

  1. Identify Market Bias: Determine if the market is trending up, down, or ranging. Engulfing bars can appear in any market condition but are most potent in trending or key support/resistance levels.
  2. Locate Engulfing Candle: Wait for a bullish engulfing at support or in an uptrend, or a bearish engulfing at resistance or in a downtrend.
  3. Entry: Place a buy stop order above the high of a bullish engulfing bar, or a sell stop order below the low of a bearish engulfing bar.
  4. Stop-Loss: For a bullish engulfing, place the stop-loss below the engulfing candle’s low. For a bearish engulfing, place it above the engulfing candle’s high.
  5. Take-Profit: Use a suitable risk-to-reward ratio. Some traders also use trailing stops to lock in gains if the market continues to move in their favor.

Example: Suppose GBP/USD is rebounding off a major support level at 1.2200. You notice a bullish engulfing candle that engulfs the prior day’s bearish candle. This setup can provide confidence to buy, with a stop-loss below the engulfing candle’s low and a profit target at the next key resistance, such as 1.2300.

Breakout and Retest Strategy

Breakout and Retest Strategy

Markets often consolidate before making significant moves. When the price finally breaks out of the consolidation zone (range), a common approach is to wait for a retest of that broken level.

Steps to Trade Breakout and Retest:

  1. Identify Consolidation: Draw support and resistance around the range or consolidation area.
  2. Breakout Confirmation: Wait for a strong candlestick close beyond the support or resistance line, signifying a breakout.
  3. Retest: Price often returns to the breakout zone to test it. A former resistance can become new support (and vice versa).
  4. Entry: Once the retest occurs and a bullish or bearish confirmation candle appears, you enter the trade in the direction of the breakout.
  5. Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss below the new support for a bullish breakout or above the new resistance for a bearish breakout.
  6. Take-Profit: You can target the next major support/resistance zone or use a measured move approach (the height of the range projected from the breakout point).

Example: EUR/JPY is ranging between 130.00 (support) and 131.00 (resistance). When it breaks above 131.00, you wait for the price to come back to 131.00 to retest. If the retest holds with bullish price action (like a pin bar or bullish engulfing), you enter long with a stop-loss below 131.00 and target 132.00 or higher.

Risk Management and Position Sizing

Risk Management and Position Sizing

Even the most accurate strategy can fail without proper risk management. Protecting your capital is paramount to long-term success in Forex trading.

  • Risk Per Trade – Many professional traders risk 1% or less of their account balance on each trade. This way, a series of losing trades does not decimate their account.
  • Stop-Loss Orders – Always place a stop-loss at a logical level—such as beyond a swing high/low or significant support/resistance. This ensures you exit the trade if the market moves against you.
  • Position Sizing – Use a position size calculator or a formula to determine how many lots you should trade, given your risk tolerance and stop-loss distance.
    • Example – If you have a $10,000 account and decide to risk 1% ($100) per trade, and your stop-loss is 50 pips, you can calculate your lot size accordingly.
  • Risk-to-Reward Ratio – Aim for trades that offer at least a 1:2 risk-to-reward ratio. This means that for every $1 you risk, you aim to make $2 in profit.

By strictly following a risk management plan, you ensure that no single trade (or even a series of trades) will ruin your trading account.

Trading Psychology and Discipline

Psychology often separates profitable traders from those who constantly struggle. Emotional decision-making can lead to overtrading, revenge trading, or cutting winners short and letting losers run.

  1. Emotional Control – Recognize and manage emotions like greed, fear, and hope. Stick to a well-defined trading plan.
  2. Patience – Waiting for the best setups is crucial. Not every candlestick formation is a trade; high-quality setups at significant levels often yield better risk-to-reward opportunities.
  3. Consistency and Routine – Develop a daily or weekly routine—analyze charts, check economic calendars, and update trading journals. Consistency in approach often leads to consistent results.
  4. Positive Mindset – Losses are part of the game. View them as feedback, not failures. Adapt and refine your strategy as you learn.

Combining Confluences for Higher Probability Trades

Combining Confluences for Higher Probability Trades

A single price action signal can sometimes work, but combining multiple confluences can significantly increase the odds of success. Confluences are factors that align in your favor, such as:

  • Candlestick pattern at a key support/resistance level
  • Trend alignment (i.e., trading in the direction of the overall trend)
  • A Fibonacci retracement lining up with support/resistance or a supply/demand zone
  • A breakout/retest aligning with a candlestick signal

Example of Confluence: You spot a bullish pin bar at a demand zone that also coincides with the 61.8% Fibonacci retracement of a prior uptrend. The market’s overall trend is bullish. This alignment of multiple factors increases the likelihood that the market will bounce from that zone.

Example Step-by-Step Price Action Trade

Let’s walk through a hypothetical scenario to see how you might combine several elements of price action:

  1. Market Overview – You check the daily chart of EUR/USD and notice a clear uptrend (higher highs, higher lows).
  2. Identify Key Support – You find a previous swing high around 1.2000 that was broken and now might act as support.
  3. Wait for Pullback – Price starts to retrace from 1.2100 down towards 1.2000.
  4. Look for Candlestick Pattern – A bullish pin bar forms right at 1.2000. The wick dips slightly below 1.2000 but closes above it, indicating rejection of lower prices.
  5. Check Confluences –
    • Uptrend on the daily chart
    • 1.2000 is a strong round-number level
    • Pin bar forms at a previous resistance-turned-support zone
  6. Enter Long – You place a buy stop order just above the pin bar’s high.
  7. Stop-Loss Placement – Your stop-loss goes below the pin bar’s wick, ensuring enough breathing room.
  8. Take-Profit Strategy –
    • Aim for a 1:3 risk-to-reward ratio, targeting 1.2100 or higher.
    • Alternatively, you might trail your stop-loss as the price moves in your favor.
  9. Trade Management –
    • If price moves in your favor, you may shift your stop-loss to break-even once you reach a 1:1 risk-to-reward ratio, eliminating further risk.
    • If the market hits your take-profit, you book your gains. If it reverses and hits your stop-loss, you accept a small, controlled loss and move on to the next opportunity.

This example illustrates how you can stack multiple pieces of price action evidence to formulate a robust trading setup.

Common Mistakes to Avoid

  1. Overtrading – Taking trades on every minor signal can lead to inconsistent performance. Wait for clear setups at key levels.
  2. Ignoring Larger Timeframes – Always analyze higher timeframes for overall trend direction and key levels. Entering solely off a 5-minute chart without referencing the daily or 4-hour charts is risky.
  3. No Stop-Loss – Trading without a stop-loss can lead to catastrophic losses.
  4. Moving Stop-Loss Arbitrarily – If you move your stop-loss further away to “give the trade room to breathe,” you could be increasing your risk disproportionately.
  5. Risking Too Much – Poor risk management often results in blowing up your account due to a few bad trades. Stick to a consistent risk percentage (like 1% or 2%) per trade.
  6. Lack of Discipline – Inconsistent application of your strategy—exiting trades prematurely, taking impulsive trades—undermines your long-term profitability.

Frequently Asked Questions

  • Is Price Action Suitable for Beginners?

    Yes. Price action is a great way to understand market movements without relying on multiple indicators. However, it requires practice and patience to develop the skill of reading charts effectively.

  • Which Timeframe is Best for Price Action Trading?

    There is no single “best” timeframe. Scalpers may prefer 1-minute or 5-minute charts, while swing traders lean toward 4-hour or daily charts. Always confirm signals on at least one higher timeframe to understand market context.

  • How Do I Know if a Breakout is Real or False?

    Look for a strong candlestick close beyond the breakout level, ideally accompanied by higher volume if your trading platform provides reliable volume data. Additionally, watch for a successful retest of the breakout level.

  • Can I Use Indicators with Price Action?

    Yes, many traders supplement price action with simple tools like Moving Averages to gauge trend direction or RSI to spot divergences. However, the core decisions are still based on price behavior.

  • How Long Does It Take to Master Price Action?

    Mastery varies by individual. Some traders become consistently profitable within a year or two, while others might take longer. Practice on a demo account or trade with small position sizes until you build confidence.

  • Is Price Action Only Applicable to Forex?

    No. Price action methods apply to all liquid markets, including stocks, commodities, and cryptocurrencies. However, different assets may have unique behaviors or volatility patterns.

Conclusion

Price action offers a clear and direct way to interpret market movements, free from the noise often introduced by numerous technical indicators. By mastering candlestick patterns, chart formations, support and resistance, and understanding the overarching market structure, you position yourself to spot high-probability trading opportunities in Forex.

Key Takeaways:

  • Study Candlestick Patterns – Learn to read pin bars, engulfing bars, and other key signals for potential entries.
  • Identify Key Levels – Support, resistance, supply, and demand zones give you logical areas to anticipate reversals or continuations.
  • Align with the Trend – Trading in the same direction as the overall trend can significantly boost your edge.
  • Use Proper Risk Management – Protecting your capital is more important than any single trade. Employ stop-losses and position-sizing rules diligently.
  • Maintain Trading Discipline: Emotional control and a well-structured routine often separate profitable traders from those who struggle.

Remember, trading is not a get-rich-quick scheme. It demands consistent effort, ongoing education, and disciplined execution. By focusing on price action principles and solid risk management, you can build a robust foundation for generating consistent profits over the long term. Practice, review your trades, stay updated with market news, and continue honing your price action skills. Over time, the market will reward your diligence with better and more consistent results.

Final Thoughts on Your Journey

Whether you are a novice trader transitioning from indicator-heavy setups to more streamlined price action charts, or an intermediate trader refining your skills, patience and persistence are key. Embrace a growth mindset—learn from mistakes, adapt, and strive for consistent incremental improvements. Price action is a skill that grows more intuitive with each chart you analyze and each trade you manage.

Stay committed, keep learning, and remember: the market rewards those who balance knowledge with discipline and patience. Here’s to your journey towards mastering price action Forex trading strategies—and achieving the consistent profits you aim for.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/price-action-forex-trading-strategies/feed/ 0 166588
Volatile Market Scalping Strategy – Quick Profits for Forex Beginners https://www.forexcracked.com/education/volatile-market-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/volatile-market-scalping-strategy/#respond Fri, 14 Feb 2025 17:13:01 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=165932 In the world of Forex trading, many strategies cater to different trader profiles, risk appetites, and market conditions. One such method, popular among beginners and experienced traders alike, is scalping a fast-paced approach that seeks to capitalize on small price movements over very short timeframes. When implemented correctly, especially in a volatile market, scalping can deliver quick profits in a matter of minutes.

In this comprehensive guide, we will delve into the Volatile Market Scalping Strategy, exploring everything from the basics of volatility to step-by-step trading tactics, risk management, and real-world examples. By the end of this article, you will have a thorough understanding of how to scalp in the Forex market and how to optimize your results, even if you are just starting out.

Understanding Volatility and Scalping

Understanding Volatility and Scalping

What Is Volatility in Forex?

Volatility refers to how much the price of a currency pair (or any financial instrument) fluctuates over a given period. High volatility implies frequent and sometimes dramatic price moves. Low volatility suggests that prices move more slowly or remain confined in a narrow range.

  • Factors Affecting Volatility:
    • Economic data releases (e.g., Non-Farm Payrolls, central bank announcements)
    • Political events (e.g., elections, referendums)
    • Market sentiment (e.g., risk-on vs. risk-off environment)
  • Why Volatility Matters for Traders:
    • Opportunities for Profit – Big price swings create multiple entry and exit points.
    • Risk Considerations – Larger movements also mean greater risk if trades go against you.

What Is Scalping?

What Is Scalping?

Scalping is a short-term trading approach where traders open and close positions within minutes sometimes seconds to capture small yet frequent profits. Scalpers typically hold trades for a few minutes at most, aiming to make the most out of short-lived market movements.

  • Typical Scalping Characteristics:
    • Short time frames – 1-minute, 5-minute, or sometimes tick charts.
    • Small profit targets – 5–10 pips (or even less) per trade.
    • High trade frequency – Multiple trades can be taken throughout a trading session.

Why Scalping Works Best in Volatile Markets

The success of a scalping strategy often hinges on the speed and magnitude of price movements. In a volatile market, prices can quickly move from one level to another, providing multiple opportunities to jump in and out with small gains. If the market is slow and range-bound, scalpers may struggle to find trades that yield enough profit to offset transaction costs (spread, commissions, etc.).

  • Faster Profit Potential – High volatility can allow trades to hit your profit target quicker.
  • Multiple Entries/Exits – Price whipsaws and frequent fluctuations create new opportunities.
  • Risk Control – If managed carefully with tight stops, scalpers can exit a losing position rapidly.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Scalping in Volatile Markets

Before diving into the nitty-gritty, it’s crucial to understand the pros and cons of scalping, especially in a market characterized by high volatility.

Advantages

  1. Quick Profits – Because scalping targets small price movements, you can realize profits quickly, sometimes within seconds.
  2. Lower Market Exposure – Since scalping involves brief trade durations, you are less exposed to market risks like unexpected news or sudden price crashes over long periods.
  3. Many Opportunities – Volatile markets move more rapidly, offering multiple scalping opportunities throughout a single session.

Disadvantages

  1. High Transaction Costs – Scalpers execute many trades, so spreads and commissions can eat into profits.
  2. Requires Intense Focus – You must constantly monitor the charts to catch fast-moving setups. Scalping can be mentally exhausting.
  3. Tight Risk Management Needed – While you can profit quickly, you can also lose quickly. If stops are not placed effectively, a single wrong trade in a volatile market can wipe out multiple winning trades.

Key Currency Pairs and Trading Sessions for High Volatility

Key Currency Pairs and Trading Sessions for High Volatility

Major Currency Pairs

Major pairs like EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY, USD/CHF, AUD/USD, and USD/CAD are some of the most actively traded currencies in the Forex market. High liquidity translates to tighter spreads, which is advantageous for scalpers looking to keep transaction costs low.

  • EUR/USD: Typically exhibits moderate to high volatility during the London and New York sessions.
  • GBP/USD: Known for more pronounced moves, particularly during the London session when UK economic news is released.
  • USD/JPY: Can be highly active during the Asian and overlapping New York sessions.

Cross Pairs

Cross pairs, such as EUR/GBP, GBP/JPY, or EUR/JPY, can also showcase significant volatility. While liquidity may be slightly lower compared to major pairs, some cross pairs are known for robust intraday movements, providing excellent scalping opportunities.

  • GBP/JPY: Often termed the “Dragon” because of its reputation for volatile price swings.
  • EUR/GBP: Typically more moderate in volatility, but can spike around Eurozone or UK economic data.

Exotic Pairs

Exotic pairs involve a major currency alongside the currency of a developing economy (e.g., USD/TRY, USD/MXN). These pairs can be extremely volatile, but they come with wider spreads and lower liquidity, making them riskier and less ideal for scalping, especially for beginners.

  • Pros: Potentially large intraday price swings.
  • Cons: High spreads and possible execution issues, which can diminish scalping profits.

Optimal Trading Sessions for Volatility

Optimal Trading Sessions for Volatility

Forex operates 24 hours a day, 5 days a week, but not all sessions are created equal regarding volatility:

  1. London Session (08:00–16:00 GMT) – Typically features high liquidity and volatility, especially for EUR, GBP pairs.
  2. New York Session (13:00–21:00 GMT) – Overlaps with London, creating the most liquid time of the day for major pairs.
  3. Asian Session (00:00–08:00 GMT) – Generally calmer, but pairs like AUD/USD, NZD/USD, and USD/JPY can see decent activity, particularly when major data releases or Bank of Japan announcements occur.

For scalping in a volatile market, the overlap between London and New York (approximately 13:00–16:00 GMT) is often the most active and can present numerous trading opportunities.

Essential Tools and Indicators for Scalping

1. Candlestick Charts

Candlestick Charts

Candlestick charts are the foundational tool for most technical traders, including scalpers. They provide visual cues about price action, such as open, close, high, and low prices within your chosen timeframe.

  • Candlestick Patterns: Certain formations like doji, engulfing, and pin bars can indicate potential reversals or continuations, which are valuable signals for scalpers.

2. Moving Averages

Moving Averages

Moving Averages (MAs) are commonly used to identify the trend and smooth out short-term price fluctuations.

  • Simple Moving Average (SMA): Gives equal weight to all price data in a chosen period.
  • Exponential Moving Average (EMA): Places more weight on recent data, making it more responsive to current price changes (often preferred by scalpers).

A popular setup is using two EMAs (e.g., a 50-period and a 100-period EMA on a 1-minute or 5-minute chart) to determine overall short-term market direction.

3. Bollinger Bands

Bollinger Bands

Bollinger Bands consist of a moving average with two standard deviation lines, forming an upper and lower band around the price. The width of the bands expands and contracts based on volatility.

  • Scalping Usage:
    • Look for price to bounce off the upper or lower band.
    • When the bands widen, expect increased volatility.

4. Relative Strength Index (RSI)

Relative Strength Index (RSI)

RSI measures the speed and magnitude of price changes, oscillating between 0 and 100. Typically, readings above 70 suggest overbought conditions, while readings below 30 suggest oversold conditions.

  • Scalping Usage:
    • A quick indicator to gauge potential reversals in a volatile market.
    • Combine with price action to confirm entries.

5. Stochastic Oscillator

Stochastic Oscillator

Similar to RSI, the Stochastic Oscillator helps identify overbought and oversold zones but uses a different calculation method based on closing price relative to a range.

  • Scalping Usage:
    • Can provide quick entry signals in tandem with candlestick patterns.
    • Values above 80 = overbought, below 20 = oversold.

6. Support and Resistance Levels

These are price levels where the market has historically reacted. Support is a level below the current price where buying interest may prevent further declines. Resistance is a level above the current price where selling interest may cap further increases.

  • Scalping Usage:
    • Identify potential bounce or breakout points.
    • Look for confluence with indicators or candlestick patterns to refine entries.

7. Price Action Analysis

Price Action Analysis

Beyond mechanical indicators, understanding price action and the raw movement of price on the chart offers invaluable insights. Observing how candles form in real-time can help you gauge market sentiment. For instance:

  • Bullish Engulfing Candle: Suggests a possible upward continuation when it appears near support.
  • Bearish Engulfing Candle: Indicates potential downward movement near resistance.

Step-by-Step Volatile Market Scalping Strategy

Step 1: Identify the Trend or Market Direction

Step 1 Identify the Trend or Market Direction

Before placing a scalp trade, you need to assess the overall market direction. Although scalpers use short time frames, analyzing the broader trend (using the 15-minute or 30-minute charts) helps align trades with the market’s momentum.

  • Tools: Moving Averages or simply drawing trendlines on higher time frames (15-minute or 30-minute).
  • Goal: Trade in the direction of the trend whenever possible. If the larger trend is bullish, look for bullish scalping setups on the smaller timeframe (1-minute or 5-minute chart).

Step 2: Confirm Momentum with Indicators

Step 2 Confirm Momentum with Indicators

Once you identify the trend, confirm it with momentum indicators to ensure you’re not entering a market that is losing steam.

  • Common Indicators: RSI, Stochastic, MACD histogram for momentum shifts.
  • Confirmation: If the RSI is near the 50 level and pointing upward in a bullish trend, it might confirm ongoing momentum.

Step 3: Choose Optimal Entry Points

Step 3 Choose Optimal Entry Points

In a volatile market, prices can move fast, so timing is crucial. Look for clear chart patterns or indicator signals that line up with your identified trend.

  • Examples of Entry Signals:
    • Price touches a moving average (like the 20 EMA) and bounces toward the trend.
    • Candlestick reversal patterns at key support/resistance.
    • Momentum oscillators cross from oversold to upwards in a bullish trend (or overbought to downwards in a bearish trend).

Step 4: Set Stop-Loss and Take-Profit Levels

Step 4 Set Stop-Loss and Take-Profit Levels

One of the cardinal rules of scalping is to always trade with a stop-loss. Since each trade aims for only a few pips, your stop-loss must be tight but also flexible enough to handle natural price fluctuations in a volatile environment.

  • Stop-Loss Placement:
    • Just below the most recent swing low for buy trades.
    • Just above the most recent swing high for sell trades.
  • Take-Profit Placement:
    • Often set at 1:1 or 1:2 risk-to-reward ratio for scalping.
    • You can also trail your stop as the price moves in your favor.

Step 5: Execute the Trade

Once you have all signals aligning trend direction, momentum confirmation, support/resistance levels, and risk parameters in place, it’s time to place the trade. Always double-check:

  1. Spread – In a very volatile market, the spread can widen unexpectedly.
  2. Position Size – Ensure you’re not over-leveraging.
  3. Risk-Reward – Confirm your stop-loss and take-profit levels align with your plan.

Step 6: Monitor Trades and Exit Quickly

Scalping requires real-time monitoring. In a fast-moving market, your profit target or stop-loss might be hit within seconds or minutes.

  • Manual Exit – If price action stalls or reverses significantly, exit early instead of hoping it will turn back around.
  • Trailing Stop – Some scalpers use a trailing stop to lock in gains if the trade moves favorably.

Step 7: Review and Refine

After each trade, document the setup, outcome, and any lessons learned. Over time, you will refine your strategy, identify recurring market patterns, and adjust to changing market conditions.

Risk Management and Position Sizing

Even though scalping is about small, quick profits, risk management is paramount. The key is ensuring a few losses don’t wipe out your entire account.

The 1% or 2% Rule

Many professional traders recommend risking only 1% or 2% of your trading capital per trade. For instance, if you have a $1,000 account and you risk 1% per trade, your maximum risk is $10 per trade.

  • Why This Matters – Scalping can generate many trades per day. If you risk too much and lose multiple times in a row, it can significantly hurt your account.

Setting Tight Stop-Losses

A hallmark of scalping is the tight stop-loss. Given that you’re trading on 1-minute or 5-minute charts, you can typically place stops quite close to your entry.

  • Example – You might place a stop-loss 5 pips away from your entry if you’re aiming for a 5–7 pip profit target.
  • Volatility Consideration – Ensure your stop-loss is not so close that normal volatility triggers it prematurely.

Leverage Considerations

High leverage can amplify gains, but it can also magnify losses. While scalping can be profitable, using too much leverage is a common way beginners blow their accounts.

  • Recommended Leverage for Beginners – 1:10 or 1:20 is often considered safer, though some brokers offer up to 1:500. Use leverage wisely.

Emotional Control and Trading Psychology

Trading psychology plays a massive role in scalping success. Quick decisions and rapid execution can lead to emotional pitfalls like fear and greed.

  • Stay Disciplined – Follow your strategy’s rules. Don’t chase trades if you miss an entry.
  • Avoid Revenge Trading – If you incur a loss, don’t try to immediately recoup it by placing impulsive trades.
  • Take Breaks – Scalping is mentally taxing. Step away from the screen after a set number of trades or a specific time period.

Common Mistakes and How to Avoid Them

  • Overtrading – Scalping can be addictive. Some traders jump on every small price move, ignoring proper setup confirmations.
    • Solution: Stick to your trading plan. Define the number of quality setups you aim for each session.
  • Ignoring Market Conditions – Not all times are good for scalping. Major news events can cause erratic moves that wipe out stops in seconds.
    • Solution: Check the economic calendar. If you can’t handle the sudden volatility, avoid trading right before a critical announcement.
  • Poor Stop-Loss Placement – Setting stops too tight or too far is equally problematic.
    • Solution: Base your stop-loss on recent swing points or a logical distance given the currency pair’s average volatility.
  • Using High Leverage Recklessly – New traders often get excited by the potential for big returns and max out their leverage.
    • Solution: Use moderate or low leverage to give your scalping trades enough breathing room without risking a margin call.
  • Lack of Consistency – Constantly switching indicators and strategies leads to confusion and inconsistent results.
    • Solution: Pick a strategy and set of indicators, then stick to them for a defined trial period to gather sufficient data on performance.

Real-World Examples of Volatile Market Scalping

Example 1: GBP/USD During London Session

  1. Market Condition – The time is 09:00 GMT, and the London session is in full swing. GBP/USD has broken above its recent range.
  2. Trend Analysis – On the 15-minute chart, the 50 EMA is above the 100 EMA, confirming an uptrend.
  3. Indicator Confirmation – The 5-minute RSI is around 55, signaling mild bullish momentum.
  4. Entry Trigger – A pullback candle dips to the 20 EMA on the 1-minute chart but closes bullish.
  5. Trade Execution –
    • Buy at 1.2405 with a Stop-Loss at 1.2400 (5 pips).
    • Take-Profit at 1.2412 (7 pips).
  6. Outcome – Within 10 minutes, the price moves up to 1.2412, and the take-profit is hit.

Example 2: EUR/USD During New York Session

  1. Market Condition – Around 14:30 GMT, EUR/USD is experiencing sharp moves due to a US economic data release during the overlap of London and New York sessions.
  2. Trend Analysis – The 30-minute chart shows a clear downtrend, with the 50 SMA below the 100 SMA.
  3. Indicator Confirmation – The 5-minute Stochastic is in overbought territory (>80), indicating a potential short opportunity aligned with the downtrend.
  4. Entry Trigger – On the 1-minute chart, a bearish engulfing candle forms at a minor resistance level.
  5. Trade Execution –
    • Sell at 1.0850 with a Stop-Loss at 1.0855 (5 pips).
    • Take-Profit at 1.0842 (8 pips).
  6. Outcome – Price drops below 1.0842 within minutes, resulting in a successful scalp.

Practical Tips for Consistent Scalping Success

  1. Prepare a Trading Plan: Define your goals, risk parameters, and preferred indicators.
  2. Trade During High Volatility Periods – Focus on the London-New York overlap for the best price movements.
  3. Use a Demo Account First – Practice your scalping strategy in a risk-free environment before going live.
  4. Keep a Trading Journal – Record every trade, including your entry/exit points, stop-loss, take-profit, and the rationale. Analyze this data to identify patterns and improve.
  5. Manage Emotional States – If you feel stressed or fatigued, pause trading. Scalping with a clouded mind can lead to impulsive decisions.
  6. Monitor News Releases – High-impact news can drastically affect prices. Some scalpers thrive on this volatility, while others stay out to avoid unpredictable swings.
  7. Optimize Your Platform – Use a reliable broker with tight spreads and fast execution. If possible, ensure your trading platform is stable and set up with one-click trading for rapid execution.
  8. Stick to Simple Strategies – Overcomplicating your chart with too many indicators can create confusion, but it’s better to master a simple, robust setup.

Conclusion

The Volatile Market Scalping Strategy offers an exciting pathway for Forex beginners who seek quick profits. By capitalizing on the rapid price movements prevalent during high-volatility sessions, scalpers can open and close multiple trades in a short period, each targeting a small chunk of the market.

However, the fast pace of scalping is a double-edged sword:

  • Risk Management becomes crucial to avoid letting one bad trade erase the gains from several winning trades.
  • High Transaction Costs and widened spreads in times of extreme volatility must be accounted for to ensure that net profits remain healthy.
  • Emotional Discipline is necessary to handle the mental pressure that comes from watching fast-moving prices and making split-second decisions.

For those willing to put in the time to study, practice, and discipline themselves, scalping in a volatile market can be rewarding. Start small, refine your techniques through a demo or micro account, and only scale up once you consistently see positive results. By mastering the fundamentals, understanding market volatility, employing the right indicators, and implementing strict risk management, you can position yourself for success in the fast-paced world of Forex scalping.

Ultimately, Volatile Market Scalping is all about harnessing the market’s momentum for short but frequent gains. With the right approach, tools, and mindset, it’s entirely possible to carve out steady returns even for a beginner venturing into the Forex world for the first time. Remember to remain patient, analytical, and committed to continuous improvement, and you will be well on your way to turning volatility into a powerful ally in your trading journey.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/volatile-market-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 165932
Fibonacci Retracement Forex Strategy – Pinpointing Entry & Exit Levels https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/fibonacci-retracement-forex-strategy/ Thu, 23 Jan 2025 18:14:52 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=163263 The Fibonacci Retracement Forex Strategy is a powerful tool for traders aiming to enhance precision in their decision-making process. By leveraging the mathematical principles of the Fibonacci sequence, this strategy helps identify potential price levels where trends may pause, reverse, or resume. Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced trader, understanding and applying Fibonacci retracements can improve your ability to pinpoint optimal entry and exit points in the dynamic Forex market. This comprehensive guide will equip you with in-depth knowledge, step-by-step techniques, and actionable strategies to use Fibonacci retracements effectively for consistent trading success.

Introduction to Fibonacci Retracement in Forex Trading

Fibonacci Retracement Forex Strategy: Pinpointing Entry & Exit Levels

forexcracked.com

Fibonacci retracement is one of the most popular tools among Forex traders, and for good reason. It offers a systematic way to predict potential support and resistance levels by leveraging the mysterious yet powerful properties of the Fibonacci sequence and the Golden Ratio. Unlike many other technical indicators, Fibonacci retracement does not clutter your screen or lag behind price action. Instead, it provides a clean set of potential price levels where a trend could pause, reverse, or continue.

In Forex trading, identifying precise entry and exit levels is crucial. That’s where Fibonacci retracement levels can truly shine. They not only provide key zones to watch for reversals but also offer traders well-defined spots for stop-loss placements and profit targets. When used correctly, Fibonacci retracements can serve as a roadmap for price action, allowing you to pinpoint your trades more confidently.

However, there’s more to Fibonacci retracements than simply drawing lines on a chart. You need to understand how they work, why they work, and under what conditions they may fail. By the end of this comprehensive guide, you will know how to select the best Fibonacci retracement levels, how to combine them with other technical tools, and how to form a robust trading strategy that fits your style and risk tolerance.

Understanding the Fibonacci Sequence and the Golden Ratio

Understanding the Fibonacci Sequence and the Golden Ratio

forexcracked.com

Before delving deeper into applying Fibonacci retracement levels to Forex charts, let’s explore the origins of this technical tool. Leonardo of Pisa, better known as Fibonacci, was a 13th-century Italian mathematician who introduced a unique sequence of numbers to the Western world. The Fibonacci sequence begins with 0 and 1, and each subsequent number is the sum of the previous two numbers:

0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89, …

From this sequence, we derive the Golden Ratio (approximately 1.618). The Golden Ratio and its inverse (0.618) often appear in nature, architecture, art, and, interestingly, financial markets. Traders and analysts have long noticed that price movements often respect certain proportions related to Fibonacci numbers, such as 0.382 (38.2%), 0.500 (50%), and 0.618 (61.8%).

Why the Fibonacci Sequence Is Important for Traders

  • Natural Proportions: The ratio 1.618 (and its derivatives like 0.382, 0.618, etc.) shows up repeatedly in natural phenomena and in patterns of human behavior. Because market movements are partly driven by human psychology, these levels often become self-fulfilling prophecies for price retracements.
  • Identification of Support/Resistance: Traders use these Fibonacci levels to anticipate where support or resistance might form. This becomes particularly valuable in trending markets where retracements occur before the price resumes its primary trend.
  • Versatile Application: Fibonacci retracement levels can be used across different time frames (daily, 4H, hourly, etc.) and different currency pairs. The method is widely accepted, which increases its reliability.

Understanding this background helps you realize that Fibonacci retracements aren’t just random lines on your chart. They’re part of a centuries-old mathematical discovery that continues to guide modern technical analysis.

Why Fibonacci Retracement Levels Matter in Forex

Forex markets are known for their high liquidity and volatility, making them a perfect arena for applying Fibonacci retracements. Because currency pairs often experience significant price swings, identifying the levels where price corrections might end can offer a significant advantage.

  1. Precision in Entry and Exit – Fibonacci retracement lines act like a map. When the price begins to pull back from a significant move, Fibonacci levels can point you to where the price might bounce or reverse. This precision is invaluable for timing entries and exits.
  2. Visual Aid – The Fibonacci retracement tool is easy to use. It lays out horizontal lines on your chart, offering clear potential support and resistance zones. These lines help reduce guesswork, allowing you to visually gauge which levels are likely to hold.
  3. Confluence With Other Indicators – Fibonacci retracements are even more powerful when used in confluence with other technical analysis tools—like trend lines, moving averages, and candlestick patterns. Confluence means multiple indicators or signals pointing to the same level, increasing the probability that the price will react there.
  4. Versatility Across Time Frames – Whether you are a scalper, day trader, or swing trader, Fibonacci retracements can be adapted to your preferred time frame. They can help identify short-term pullbacks as well as long-term turning points.

Ultimately, Fibonacci retracement levels matter because they provide structure in a sometimes chaotic market. By applying this tool properly, traders can better anticipate potential turning points, manage risk, and improve their overall success rate.

Key Fibonacci Retracement Levels Explained

Key Fibonacci Retracement Levels Explained

forexcracked.com

There are several commonly used Fibonacci retracement levels in Forex trading, each representing a fraction of the prior move. While some traders focus on only a few key levels, others prefer to plot multiple levels to catch potentially smaller or deeper retracements. Below are the primary Fibonacci retracement levels you will see on most trading platforms:

23.6% Retracement Level

  • Definition: This level represents about one-quarter of the prior move.
  • Significance: It often marks shallow pullbacks in a strong trend. When the market is trending strongly, the price may not retrace deeply before resuming in the trend’s direction.
  • Usage: Some traders use the 23.6% level as a gauge for strong momentum. If the price only retraces to 23.6% before bouncing, it’s a sign of a robust trend.

38.2% Retracement Level

  • Definition: This level is roughly a third of the prior move.
  • Significance: The 38.2% level is viewed as a common spot for moderate pullbacks, especially in uptrends.
  • Usage: When price corrects to this level and shows bullish (or bearish in a downtrend) reversal signals, many traders interpret it as a sign the original trend will likely continue.

50% Retracement Level

  • Definition: While 50% is not a classical Fibonacci ratio, it is widely used by traders as a psychological midpoint.
  • Significance: It suggests that the market has undone half of its previous move, which often signifies a key zone for potential reversals.
  • Usage: This level is popular for placing limit orders or for partial profit-taking, particularly if the trader anticipates a bounce from this halfway mark.

61.8% Retracement Level

  • Definition: This is the inverse of the Golden Ratio (which is approximately 1.618).
  • Significance: The 61.8% level is one of the most observed retracement levels in all forms of technical analysis.
  • Usage: Traders look for strong reactions here because a bounce or break below (or above in a downtrend) the 61.8% line can signal the difference between trend continuation and a deeper reversal.

78.6% (and 76.4%) Retracement Levels

  • Definition: Another deeper Fibonacci retracement level that is close to the square root of 61.8%.
  • Significance: If the price has retraced this far, some traders see it as a sign that the trend might be weakening. However, strong price moves can still find support or resistance around this level before resuming the original trend.
  • Usage: This level is more nuanced. Often, advanced traders look for confluence at 78.6% with other indicators or patterns because the market is either nearing a full retracement or is setting up a double-bottom/double-top scenario.

88.6% Retracement Level

  • Definition: A deeper retracement that is derived from the further manipulation of the Fibonacci ratios.
  • Significance: This level is close to a complete reversal of the original move. If a trend is still going to hold, the price must bounce here or risk invalidating the prior trend move.
  • Usage: Traders who prefer deep discount entries (in the case of an uptrend) or premium entries (in the case of a downtrend) might look at this level, but it requires careful analysis and usually a strong confirming signal.

How to Draw Fibonacci Retracement Levels on a Forex Chart

The accuracy of Fibonacci retracement analysis largely depends on how you draw the tool. The basics are the same across most charting platforms—MT4, TradingView, NinjaTrader, etc. Here’s the process:

1. Identifying a Swing High and Swing Low

Identifying a Swing High and Swing Low

forexcracked.com
  • Swing High: This is a peak on the chart where the price has stopped rising and started falling. Visually, it’s the highest point in a particular price wave.
  • Swing Low: This is the trough where the price has stopped falling and started climbing. It’s the lowest point in a particular price wave.

For an uptrend, you’ll typically draw Fibonacci retracement from the most recent significant Swing Low to the Swing High.
For a downtrend, you draw it from the Swing High to the Swing Low.

2. Drawing the Retracement Tool Correctly

Drawing the Retracement Tool Correctly

forexcracked.com
  1. Select the Fibonacci Retracement Tool on your charting platform.
  2. Click on the swing low or high where you want to start.
  3. Drag the tool to the opposite swing, ensuring you capture the most significant recent price wave.
  4. Release the mouse (or lift your finger) to finalize the placement. Your charting software will automatically draw the corresponding Fibonacci retracement levels (23.6%, 38.2%, 50%, 61.8%, 78.6%, etc.) between the two points.

3. Practical Tips for Accuracy

  • Use Significant Swings Only: Avoid small, inconsequential bumps in price. Focus on prominent swing points that stand out on the chart.
  • Consistency: If you’re trading on the 4-hour time frame, use swing points that are clearly visible on that time frame. Don’t mix short-term swing points with long-term ones if you intend to hold positions for days.
  • Multiple Time Frame Analysis: Consider applying Fibonacci on the higher time frame (like daily or weekly) to identify major levels, then zoom into a lower time frame (4-hour or 1-hour) for finer entries.
  • Confluence Zones: Watch for areas where multiple Fibonacci levels or other technical features overlap. A cluster of levels often proves stronger.

Drawing Fibonacci retracements is straightforward, but the challenge lies in choosing the correct swing points and interpreting the levels. Practice drawing retracements on historical charts to get a feel for how price reacts at each Fibonacci level.

Combining Fibonacci Retracements With Other Tools

Fibonacci retracements rarely work well in isolation. They become significantly more reliable when used alongside other forms of technical analysis. This process is known as confluence, where multiple indicators or chart patterns suggest the same potential outcome.

1. Trend Lines and Support/Resistance

  • Trend Lines: Draw diagonal lines that connect two or more swing highs or swing lows. If a Fibonacci level coincides with a trend line, that level gains importance.
  • Horizontal Support/Resistance: Mark past support or resistance levels. If a Fibonacci retracement aligns with a historical support or resistance line, it’s more likely to hold.

2. Candlestick Patterns

  • Reversal Candlestick Patterns: Look for pin bars, doji, or engulfing candles forming at Fibonacci retracement levels. These candlestick signals can confirm that the market is respecting that level.
  • Continuation Patterns: Sometimes the market will form bullish or bearish continuation candles at significant Fibonacci retracement points, indicating a resumption of the trend.

3. Moving Averages

  • Dynamic Support/Resistance: A 50-day or 200-day simple moving average can also act as support or resistance. If this moving average lines up with a Fibonacci level, it increases the probability of a bounce or reversal.
  • Crossover Signals: Moving average crossovers can provide additional context. For instance, if a short-term MA crosses above a long-term MA near a Fibonacci level, it may signal a stronger bullish reversal.

4. RSI and MACD Confluence

  • RSI: The Relative Strength Index helps you spot overbought or oversold conditions. If the price pulls back to a Fibonacci level and the RSI transitions from oversold to rising, that’s a bullish sign.
  • MACD: Look for bullish or bearish divergences on the MACD when price approaches a Fibonacci retracement. A bullish divergence at a key Fibonacci support can strengthen the case for a reversal.

When these tools line up at a Fibonacci retracement level, it boosts confidence in the trade. However, remember that confluence is not a guarantee it merely increases the probability of a successful outcome.

Fibonacci Retracement Forex Strategies

Fibonacci Retracement Forex Strategies

forexcracked.com

There are various ways to incorporate Fibonacci retracements into your trading plan. Below are some of the most common strategies that focus on pinpointing entry and exit levels in Forex.

A. Trend Continuation Strategy

  1. Identify the Primary Trend: Is the currency pair in an uptrend or downtrend? Analyze the larger time frame (daily or 4-hour) to confirm.
  2. Wait for a Retracement: As the price retraces from a swing high or swing low, apply Fibonacci retracements to the most recent impulsive move.
  3. Look for Confluence: If a key Fibonacci level (38.2%, 50%, or 61.8%) coincides with a trend line or support/resistance zone, it’s a strong sign.
  4. Enter on Confirmation: Use candlestick patterns or oscillator signals to confirm the price is likely to bounce. Place a buy order (in an uptrend) or a sell order (in a downtrend) at or near the Fibonacci level.
  5. Stop-Loss Placement: Usually goes below the swing low (for a buy) or above the swing high (for a sell). Aim to keep a positive risk-reward ratio—at least 1:2 or better.
  6. Take Profit: You can use the next Fibonacci extension level (127.2% or 161.8%) or a prior swing high/low as a target.

B. Range Trading Strategy

  1. Identify the Range: The market is neither making higher highs nor lower lows but oscillating between a horizontal support and resistance.
  2. Apply Fibonacci in the Range: Even within a range, the price often respects Fibonacci retracements on smaller moves.
  3. Look for Overlaps: If 50% or 61.8% lines up with range support or resistance, that’s a cue to enter.
  4. Use Oscillators: Stochastic or RSI can help confirm overbought or oversold conditions in a range. Enter near support when the market is oversold and exit near resistance—or vice versa.
  5. Stop-Loss Placement: Beyond the range boundaries (above resistance or below support).
  6. Profit Target: Opposite end of the range, or partial profits at intermediate Fibonacci lines within the range.

C. Breakout and Pullback Strategy

  1. Wait for a Breakout: A currency pair breaks a significant support or resistance level.
  2. Identify the Breakout Swing: Mark the high/low before the breakout and the peak of the breakout move.
  3. Apply Fibonacci: If the price pulls back, see which Fibonacci levels might offer a retest of the broken line.
  4. Enter on Retest: Often, the 38.2% or 50% retracement aligns with the previous breakout area. If the breakout is genuine, the price should hold this retest and continue in the breakout direction.
  5. Stop-Loss Placement: Place it below the breakout area or the next Fibonacci level to protect against false breakouts.
  6. Target: The next major support/resistance or a Fibonacci extension like 161.8%.

D. Fibonacci Extensions for Profit Targets

While this guide focuses on retracements, it’s also important to note Fibonacci extension levels, such as 127.2%, 161.8%, 200%, and more. These levels are used to project where the price may head next after a retracement. If you entered on a Fibonacci retracement, you can place your take profit near one of the extension levels, especially if it coincides with other forms of technical confluence.

Pinpointing Entry and Exit Levels

Pinpointing entry and exit levels using Fibonacci retracement levels is both an art and a science. Here are detailed guidelines to help you refine your approach.

1. Optimizing Entry Points With Confluence

  • Wait for Candlestick Confirmation: A bullish engulfing, hammer, or piercing line at a Fibonacci support can confirm a buy entry. For sell entries, look for bearish engulfing, shooting star, or dark cloud cover at a Fibonacci resistance.
  • Check Volume (If Available): Volume spikes near a Fibonacci level can hint at institutional participation. This is particularly relevant in stock or futures markets, but Forex volume indicators provided by brokers can still offer some insight.
  • Verify Momentum: Use RSI, Stochastic, or MACD to ensure that momentum isn’t heavily against your trade idea. For instance, a deeply oversold RSI at a 61.8% Fibonacci support is a bullish sign.

2. Setting Target Profit Levels

  • Nearby Swing High/Low: This is often the first level to watch. If the price respects that swing again, you might take partial profits.
  • Fibonacci Extension: Levels like 127.2% and 161.8% of the original move can serve as excellent take-profit targets.
  • Trailing Stop: For traders who like to ride trends, consider a trailing stop approach moving your stop-loss below higher lows (in an uptrend) or above lower highs (in a downtrend) as the price moves in your favor.

3. Placing Stop-Loss Orders

  • Below/Above the Swing: A common technique is to place your stop-loss a few pips below the swing low (for a buy) or above the swing high (for a sell).
  • Beyond the Next Fibonacci Level: For more conservative traders, place stops beyond a deeper Fibonacci line. If the price breaks multiple Fibonacci levels, the trade idea might be invalid.
  • ATR-Based Stops: Some traders use the Average True Range (ATR) to gauge volatility and add that distance to their stops to avoid getting whipsawed by normal price fluctuations.

Pinpointing entries and exits effectively requires practice and experience. Don’t be discouraged by early mistakes. Keep detailed trade journals to study how price reacted at certain Fibonacci levels and refine your approach over time.

Risk Management and Position Sizing

Risk Management and Position Sizing

forexcracked.com

Risk management is often the dividing line between successful traders and those who eventually blow their accounts. Even the best analysis can fail if the market decides to do something unexpected. Fibonacci retracement levels can assist with risk management, but only if you use them properly.

1. Using Fibonacci Levels to Determine Risk-Reward Ratios

  • Risk-Reward Ratio (RRR): This is the ratio between the amount you’re willing to risk and the potential profit you aim to gain. A 1:2 RRR means you risk 1% to gain 2%.
  • Identify Clear Stop and Target: With Fibonacci, your stop is often located beyond a certain retracement (e.g., 61.8%) or beyond the swing high/low. Your target could be another retracement or an extension level.
  • Ensure Acceptable RRR: If the target is 50 pips away and your stop is also 50 pips away, you have a 1:1 RRR. Ideally, aim for at least 1:1.5 or 1:2 to ensure you can absorb losing trades and still come out ahead over a series of trades.

2. Stop-Loss Placement for Enhanced Safety

  • Wide vs. Tight Stops: Too tight a stop might result in quick losses due to normal price noise. Too wide a stop might reduce your RRR or increase your risk. Strive for a balance based on market volatility.
  • Use Confluence: Placing a stop just under a confluence of Fibonacci retracements, trend lines, or moving averages often provides an extra layer of protection.
  • Adjust for News: Major economic releases can cause large, sudden moves. Either tighten stops or close positions if the trade is not near your target before a high-volatility event.

Risk management should be approached systematically. Never risk more than you can afford to lose on any single trade many professional traders limit each trade to 1-2% of their account capital.

Common Mistakes and How to Avoid Them

Even seasoned traders can fall prey to errors when using Fibonacci retracements. Here are some pitfalls to watch for:

  1. Incorrect Swing Points: Choosing minor or irrelevant swing highs/lows leads to inaccurate levels. Always pick the most significant swings on the time frame you’re trading.
  2. Over-Reliance on a Single Tool: Using Fibonacci retracements alone can be risky. Integrate other forms of technical or fundamental analysis for better confluence.
  3. Ignoring Trend Context: Applying Fibonacci retracements in a sideways or choppy market without first identifying a clear trend often results in confusion and false signals.
  4. Forgetting Risk Management: A perfect Fibonacci setup can still fail. Always set a stop-loss and plan your trades around a sensible risk-reward ratio.
  5. Forcing Trades: Just because a Fibonacci level exists doesn’t mean the market will bounce there. Wait for confirmation.
  6. Not Practicing: Trading with Fibonacci levels effectively requires screen time and practice. Use a demo account or backtesting tools to refine your entry and exit tactics before going live.

Practical Example of a Fibonacci Retracement Trade

To illustrate how Fibonacci retracement might be used in a real-world scenario, let’s walk through a hypothetical trade example on the EUR/USD pair. Assume we’re looking at a 4-hour chart.

Step-by-Step Chart Analysis

  1. Identify Trend: The 4-hour chart shows a clear uptrend, with higher highs and higher lows.
  2. Most Recent Impulsive Move: The price has just completed a strong move from 1.0800 (Swing Low) to 1.1000 (Swing High).
  3. Draw Fibonacci: We select the Swing Low at 1.0800 and drag up to the Swing High at 1.1000. The key retracement levels appear at 1.0962 (23.6%), 1.0945 (38.2%), 1.0900 (61.8%), and so forth.

Monitoring the Trade

  1. Price Pullback: The price begins to pull back from 1.1000. We watch how it reacts at each Fibonacci level.
  2. Candlestick Confirmation: At the 38.2% level (around 1.0945), a bullish pin bar forms, with a long lower wick touching that retracement level. RSI on the 4-hour chart is above 50 but not overbought, suggesting continued bullish momentum.
  3. Entry Trigger: We enter a long position at 1.0945, anticipating the uptrend will continue from this Fibonacci support.

Trade Management and Exit

  1. Stop-Loss Placement: Place a stop-loss about 20 pips below the pin bar’s wick, around 1.0925. That’s also beneath the 50% retracement level, adding a layer of protection.
  2. Profit Target: We decide to target the previous swing high at 1.1000 initially. If the price breaks above that, we may let part of the position ride to a Fibonacci extension at 1.1050 (127.2% extension).
  3. Outcome: Price bounces from 1.0945 and heads to 1.1000, hitting our first profit target. We close half the position, move our stop-loss to break even, and hold the rest for a potential extension move.

This is a textbook example, and not all trades will be this clean. Nonetheless, it demonstrates how to identify a trend, draw Fibonacci, wait for confluence signals, and manage the trade throughout its lifecycle.

Advanced Tips for Mastering Fibonacci Retracements

For traders looking to elevate their Fibonacci retracement skills, consider the following advanced tips:

Multiple Time Frame Alignment

  • Check Fibonacci levels on the weekly or daily chart for major zones.
  • Zoom into the 4-hour or 1-hour chart to refine your entries.
  • Look for overlaps of Fibonacci levels from different time frames—major confluence often signals a strong support or resistance area.

Fibonacci Clusters

  • Draw multiple Fibonacci retracements on overlapping price swings.
  • Identify “clusters” or “zones” where several Fibonacci levels (from different swings) overlap within a small price range. These clusters often act as powerful reversal zones.

Harmonic Patterns

  • Patterns like Gartley, Bat, Crab, and Butterfly heavily rely on Fibonacci measurements. Understanding these can help you spot high-probability reversal setups.
  • For instance, a Gartley pattern involves retracements to 61.8% and 78.6% in specific sequences.

Pivot Points

  • Traditional pivot points can add another dimension to Fibonacci-based strategies. If a Fibonacci retracement aligns with a pivot level or camarilla pivot, it may serve as an especially high-probability zone.

Fibonacci Time Zones

  • While less commonly used, Fibonacci time zones can provide insight into when a market might reverse or consolidate. By placing vertical lines at Fibonacci-based intervals, you may gain clues about the timing of price moves in addition to their magnitude.

Psychological Levels

  • Price levels such as 1.1000, 1.2000, or 1.0000 in EUR/USD often act as psychological magnets. If a Fibonacci retracement lines up near such a big round number, it’s an extra factor to consider.
  • Mastering Fibonacci retracements is not about memorizing every ratio. Instead, it’s about understanding which levels are most relevant to your trading style, how to combine them with other tools, and how to manage your trades effectively.

Conclusion

Fibonacci retracement is a robust, time-tested tool that can help Forex traders pinpoint entry and exit levels with remarkable accuracy. Its foundation lies in the Fibonacci sequence and the Golden Ratio, which appear frequently in both nature and financial markets. By drawing retracement levels between significant swing highs and lows, traders can identify potential support and resistance zones where price might bounce or reverse.

However, success with Fibonacci retracements doesn’t come from these lines alone. To truly harness their power, combine them with trend analysis, candlestick patterns, moving averages, momentum oscillators, and other forms of confluence. Always pay close attention to risk management, ensuring you have a solid stop-loss strategy, a well-defined risk-reward ratio, and a keen understanding of position sizing.

While the examples in this guide illustrate the concepts, the real skill comes from practice and experience. Spend ample time backtesting your Fibonacci strategies and refining your approach in a demo environment before going live. With the right methodology, discipline, and patience, Fibonacci retracements can become a cornerstone of your Forex trading toolkit—helping you navigate price movements more confidently and consistently.

Final Thoughts

  • Stay Flexible: Markets are dynamic; don’t treat Fibonacci levels as hard-and-fast rules.
  • Use Confluence: Combine Fibonacci with other indicators for a higher probability of success.
  • Manage Risk: Protect your capital so you can withstand the inevitable losing trades.
  • Review and Adapt: Keep a trade journal, noting which Fibonacci levels worked best and why.

By embracing these principles, you’ll be well on your way to making more informed, strategic trading decisions using Fibonacci retracement levels ultimately improving your ability to pinpoint entry and exit levels in the ever-volatile world of Forex.

]]>
163263
Bollinger Bands Breakout Strategy: Step-by-Step Forex Guide https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/bollinger-bands-breakout-strategy/ Sat, 11 Jan 2025 20:30:00 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=160146 Bollinger Bands are one of the most widely recognized and frequently utilized technical analysis tools in the forex market. Developed by John Bollinger in the early 1980s, these bands help traders identify market volatility and potential price extremes. At their core, Bollinger Bands consist of three lines plotted on a price chart:

  1. The Middle Band – Typically a simple moving average (SMA).
  2. The Upper Band – This is the SMA plus a certain number of standard deviations.
  3. The Lower Band – This is the SMA minus a certain number of standard deviations.
Bollinger Bands

forexcracked.com

Bollinger Bands are a dynamic envelope that expands and contracts based on the market’s volatility. The concept behind Bollinger Bands is that when volatility increases, the distance between the upper and lower bands widens; when volatility decreases, the distance tightens. Traders can use this expansion and contraction to gauge whether the market is in a state of heightened activity or is trading quietly.

Why are they so popular? Because they can be applied to virtually any market or timeframe, including forex, stocks, futures, and cryptocurrencies. Bollinger Bands can help identify overbought and oversold conditions, as well as potential breakout opportunities both of which are vital for successful forex trading.

In this article, we’ll focus on one particular application of Bollinger Bands: the Bollinger Bands Breakout Strategy. We’ll explain how to implement this strategy step by step, discuss how to optimize your trades and share tips on how to manage risk effectively.

Why Use Bollinger Bands for Forex Trading

Bollinger Bands for Forex Trading

forexcracked.com

The forex market is known for its liquidity and volatility. Currency prices can swing significantly in short periods, especially during major economic news releases or shifts in central bank policies. Bollinger Bands are specifically designed to:

  1. Track volatility – By measuring standard deviations around a moving average, Bollinger Bands indicate when volatility is high or low.
  2. Identify price extremes – Price touching or crossing the upper or lower band can highlight potential overbought or oversold levels, prompting traders to look for reversals or continuations.
  3. Highlight trading opportunities – Periods of low volatility (when the bands contract) often precede major price movements. Recognizing these so-called “squeeze” phases can help traders anticipate breakouts.
  4. Adapt to changing market conditions – The bands adjust themselves automatically based on recent price data, making them dynamic rather than static indicators.

Because of these qualities, Bollinger Bands are well-suited for strategies that revolve around breakouts, particularly in the fast-moving forex market. This is crucial for active traders who look for short-term or medium-term gains.

Key Components of Bollinger Bands

Key Components of Bollinger Bands

forexcracked.com
  1. Simple Moving Average (SMA): The default number of periods used in the middle band is typically 20. This number can be adjusted based on your personal trading style and the currency pair volatility you’re trading.
  2. Standard Deviations: Bollinger Bands are usually set to 2 standard deviations above and below the SMA. This is the typical setting John Bollinger recommended, as around 95% of price action tends to stay within 2 standard deviations of the average under a normal distribution assumption. However, traders sometimes use 1.5 or 2.5 standard deviations to tailor the bandwidth more precisely.
  3. Volatility: The primary reason for the bands’ expansion and contraction is market volatility. When volatility is low, bands contract; when volatility is high, they expand.
  4. Price Action and Candlestick Patterns: While Bollinger Bands can function as a standalone indicator, many traders also pay attention to candlestick patterns (e.g., Doji, engulfing candles) and chart formations (e.g., triangles, wedges) to confirm signals.

Note: Bollinger Bands should not be used as a singular tool to predict future price movement in isolation. Instead, they provide a framework within which you can apply additional technical or fundamental analysis to make informed trading decisions.

How Bollinger Bands Are Calculated

Bell Curve

forexcracked.com

Bollinger Bands are constructed using the following approach:

Calculate the 20-day Simple Moving Average (SMA):

SMA = Sum of closing prices for the last 20 periods / 20

Calculate the Standard Deviation: For each of those 20 periods, determine how far the price deviated from the SMA. Then, sum the squares of those deviations and divide by the total number of observations to get the variance. Finally, take the square root to get the standard deviation.

Upper Band:

Upper Band = SMA + k × Standard Deviation

Where k is typically 2.

Lower Band:

Lower Band = SMA − k × Standard Deviation

This mathematical formulation ensures that when price volatility increases, the standard deviation increases, pushing the upper and lower bands farther apart. Conversely, when volatility decreases, the bands move closer together.

Different Settings for Bollinger Bands

Different Settings for Bollinger Bands

forexcracked.com

Although the default setting (20-period SMA, 2 standard deviations) is the most common, variations can be made to suit different trading environments:

  1. Short-term trading: Some traders prefer a 10-day SMA with 1.5 standard deviations for more sensitive signals.
  2. Long-term trading: Swing or position traders who hold trades for weeks may use a 50-day SMA with 2.5 standard deviations to capture larger market moves.
  3. Variations in standard deviation: Using 1 standard deviation or 2.5 can help highlight either more frequent trading signals (1 SD) or fewer but potentially stronger signals (2.5 SD).

The key is to test different settings on your specific currency pairs and timeframes, as each market can have unique volatility characteristics.

Understanding Breakouts in Forex

Understanding Breakouts in Forex

forexcracked.com

A breakout occurs when the price decisively moves beyond a defined support or resistance level (which Bollinger Bands can sometimes indicate). Breakouts are often accompanied by an increase in trading volume and volatility. In the context of Bollinger Bands, traders often look for situations when:

  1. Price breaks above the upper band: A strong move beyond the upper band can signal a bullish breakout.
  2. Price breaks below the lower band: A strong move beyond the lower band can signal a bearish breakout.
  3. The bands squeeze tightly together: This “squeeze” indicates a period of low volatility, which often precedes a big price move—either up or down.

Spotting a breakout early allows traders to position themselves near the start of a potentially significant price movement, thereby improving the potential risk-to-reward ratio.

Bollinger Bands Breakout Strategy Overview

Bollinger Bands Breakout Strategy Overview

forexcracked.com

The Bollinger Bands Breakout Strategy typically seeks to exploit the “squeeze” phase when the Bollinger Bands contract is followed by an explosive breakout beyond the upper or lower band. The core idea is that when volatility is low, it can’t remain suppressed for too long; eventually, market forces (news, economic shifts, etc.) push the price in one direction forcefully.

Key Steps in a Breakout Strategy

  1. Identify when the Bollinger Bands are contracting – This signals the market may be coiling up for a larger move.
  2. Wait for a breakout candle – A candle that moves decisively outside the Bollinger Bands.
  3. Confirm the breakout with additional indicators or price action signals – This might involve momentum oscillators (RSI, MACD, …) or chart patterns.
  4. Enter the trade – Once you have confirmation that the breakout has legs (not a fake breakout).
  5. Manage your risk – Using stop-loss orders just below or above key support/resistance or the middle band.
  6. Exit – Either via a predetermined profit target or a trailing stop.

In the following sections, we’ll break down each step in detail.

Step-by-Step Guide to Implementing the Strategy

Step 1: Select the Appropriate Timeframe

Different traders operate on different time horizons:

  • Scalpers might use the 1-minute or 5-minute chart, looking for small intraday moves.
  • Day traders may prefer the 15-minute or 30-minute chart, closing all positions by the end of the trading day.
  • Swing traders might use the 4-hour or daily chart, holding positions for several days to weeks.

When applying the Bollinger Bands Breakout Strategy, choose a timeframe that suits your lifestyle, risk tolerance, and experience. Make sure you have enough liquidity and volatility in that timeframe to find meaningful breakout opportunities.

Tips:

  • Test your strategy on multiple timeframes to see which one yields the best risk-to-reward ratio.
  • Remember that higher timeframes generally provide more reliable signals, though fewer trading opportunities.

Step 2: Apply Bollinger Bands

Most trading platforms have Bollinger Bands readily available. You can typically find them under the “Indicators” menu. Once you select Bollinger Bands:

  1. Enter your desired moving average length – 20 is a popular choice.
  2. Select the number of standard deviations – Usually 2 standard deviations.
  3. Style and color – Adjust to your preference, but ensure the bands are clearly visible.

Note: If you’re new, start with the default 20-period, 2 standard deviations setup. As you gain experience, you can experiment with other settings.

Step 3: Identify Squeeze Periods

Step 3: Identify Squeeze Periods

forexcracked.com

A “squeeze” is when the upper and lower Bollinger Bands move closer together, indicating declining volatility. Visually, it looks like the bands are “pinching” the price. To identify squeeze periods:

  1. Look for the narrowest part of the bands in recent history.
  2. Compare the current band width to previous widths over several days or weeks.
  3. If the Bollinger Band width is near a multi-week or multi-day low, it often signals an upcoming potential breakout.

Some traders use an indicator known as the Bollinger Bandwidth, which calculates the relative width of the bands to help quantify how “tight” they are.

Step 4: Look for Breakouts

Step 4: Look for Breakouts

forexcracked.com

Once you see a squeeze, watch for the price to close decisively outside either the upper or lower band. A decisive close means the candle’s body (not just the wick) breaks above the upper band or below the lower band. This could be the beginning of a significant price movement.

Be cautious

  • Not every close outside the band is a legitimate breakout. Prices can poke outside the band briefly, only to snap back into range. Look for a strong candle body, increased volume, or additional confirmation signals.
  • Check for important economic news or geopolitical events that might be fueling the move.

Step 5: Confirm the Breakout

Breakout confirmation is crucial because the forex market often experiences false breakouts or “fakeouts.” A false breakout is when the price momentarily moves outside the Bollinger Band but quickly reverses, trapping traders who entered prematurely.

Confirmation methods:

  1. Volume spike – In many trading platforms, volume data on currency pairs can be less reliable than on stock exchanges, but you can still look for relative increases in volume.
  2. Additional indicators – RSI crossing above 50 (bullish) or below 50 (bearish), MACD crossovers, or Stochastic turning up/down can reinforce the breakout signal.
  3. Price retest – Sometimes, waiting for a retest of the band’s boundary (now acting as support or resistance) can confirm the breakout’s integrity. If the price retests the upper band and doesn’t fall back inside, this adds confidence to a bullish trade.

Step 6: Plan Your Entry

Step 6: Plan Your Entry

forexcracked.com

Once you confirm the breakout, you need a clear entry plan:

  1. Buy Stop Order (for bullish breakouts) – Place a buy order slightly above the breakout candle’s high.
  2. Sell Stop Order (for bearish breakouts) – Place a sell order slightly below the breakout candle’s low.

The idea is to avoid entering prematurely. Waiting for that extra pip or two above/below the breakout candle can sometimes spare you from false breakouts.

Step 7: Place Stop-Loss Orders

Stop-loss orders are essential for capital preservation. In a Bollinger Band breakout strategy, you might place your stop-loss:

  1. Below is the most recent swing low (for longs) – If the price breaks above the upper band and continues upward, you can set your stop just below the last significant low or potentially below the middle band if you’re using a wider stop.
  2. Above the most recent swing high (for shorts) – If price breaks below the lower band, set your stop just above the nearest swing high, or above the middle band for a more conservative approach.

Trailing stops can also be effective. As the price moves in your favor, you can incrementally move your stop-loss to lock in gains.

Step 8: Decide Your Profit Targets

Step 8: Decide Your Profit Targets

forexcracked.com

Having a defined exit strategy can help you avoid emotional trading decisions. Common ways to set profit targets for a Bollinger Bands breakout strategy:

  1. Risk-to-Reward Ratio – For instance, if your stop-loss is 50 pips away from entry, aim for at least 100 pips in profit for a 1:2 risk-to-reward ratio.
  2. Previous Support/Resistance – Identify nearby areas where price has historically reacted (e.g., a major pivot point).
  3. Psychological Levels – Round numbers like 1.2000 or 1.2500 often act as natural barriers.
  4. Bollinger Band Dynamics – Some traders use the middle band or the opposite Bollinger Band as a potential target.

Pro tip: You can use multiple partial take-profit points. For example, take half the position off at a 1:1 risk-to-reward ratio, then let the rest ride toward a more ambitious target.

Step 9: Trade Management and Exit

Once in the trade, successful trade management can make a big difference in your overall profitability:

  1. Monitor Price Action – Monitor how the price behaves around major support/resistance levels.
  2. Look for Signs of Reversal – Candlestick patterns (e.g., pin bars, shooting stars, hammer candles) can warn you of a potential shift in momentum.
  3. Adjust Stops – Consider using a trailing stop based on either a fixed pip distance or technical levels (like the middle Bollinger Band).
  4. Exit Timing – If the price quickly hits your profit target, exit the trade. If you see a strong reversal pattern forming, you may choose to exit early to protect profits.

Practical Examples of Bollinger Bands Breakout Trades

Example 1: Bullish Breakout on the EUR/USD (4-Hour Chart)

  1. Squeeze Observation – The Bollinger Bands (20,2) on the 4-hour chart begin to contract over a week, indicating low volatility.
  2. Breakout Candle – A large bullish candlestick closes above the upper Bollinger Band, signaling a potential breakout.
  3. Confirmation – RSI, previously hovering around 45-55, jumps above 60, indicating building momentum.
  4. Entry – Place a buy stop a few pips above the breakout candle’s high.
  5. Stop-Loss – Position it below the last swing low, about 50 pips away.
  6. Target – Aim for a 1:2 risk-to-reward, setting your profit target 100 pips above entry. You could also watch for the price to approach a major resistance level, such as 1.1050, and exit near that zone.
  7. Trade Management – As the price moves in your favor, shift your stop to breakeven. After hitting the first partial profit, hold the remainder for an extended run.

Example 2: Bearish Breakout on the GBP/USD (1-Hour Chart)

  1. Squeeze Formation – Over two trading sessions, the GBP/USD’s Bollinger Bands (20,2) tighten as the pair consolidates near a round number (e.g., 1.3000).
  2. Breakout Candle – A strong bearish candle forms during the London session, closing well below the lower Bollinger Band.
  3. Confirmation – The MACD histogram crosses below the zero line, reinforcing the bearish momentum.
  4. Entry – Place a sell stop a few pips below the breakout candle.
  5. Stop-Loss – Set it above the recent swing high, roughly 40 pips away.
  6. Profit Target – Aim for 80 pips (1:2 R:R). Alternatively, use the middle band as a trailing stop reference. if the price moves significantly away from the lower band, tighten your stop.
  7. Follow-Up – The price continues downward until it reaches a major support level. If the pair bounces strongly, exit the position to protect your profits.

Common Mistakes to Avoid

  1. Entering on Every Band Touch – Not every touch of the upper or lower band signals a breakout. The price can often move along the band without a decisive breakout. Always wait for a candle close and confirmation.
  2. Ignoring Fundamentals – Major news events (e.g., central bank rate decisions, GDP data) can invalidate technical setups or create fakeouts. Keep an economic calendar handy.
  3. No Stop-Loss – Failing to place a stop-loss can be disastrous, especially when volatility spikes.
  4. Overleveraging – Using excessive leverage can magnify losses. Always stick to a prudent risk management approach.
  5. Chasing Late Breakouts – If the price has already moved significantly outside the bands, jumping in late could mean a poor risk-to-reward setup.

Risk Management and Position Sizing

Risk management is pivotal for long-term success, especially in the high-volatility environment of forex trading. Here are the essential components of a robust risk management plan:

Position Sizing – Never risk more than 1-2% of your account on a single trade. To calculate position size:

Position Size = Account Risk(in dollars)​ / Stop-Loss(in pips) × Pip Value

Stop-Loss Placement – Don’t randomly pick a stop-loss level. Base it on technical considerations like recent swing highs/lows or the middle Bollinger Band.

Diversification – If you’re trading multiple currency pairs, avoid over-concentrating risk in pairs that are highly correlated (e.g., EUR/USD and GBP/USD).

Emotional Discipline – If the trade goes against you, accept the loss and move on. Revenge trading can quickly erode your account balance.

Example: You have a $10,000 trading account and don’t want to risk more than 2% ($200) per trade. If your stop-loss is 50 pips away, and each pip for 1 standard lot (100,000 units) is roughly $10 for EUR/USD, then:

  • 50 pips * $10 = $500 risk with 1 standard lot, which is too high.
  • To keep risk at $200, you’d trade 0.4 lots because 50 pips * $4 = $200.

Thus, you’d enter the trade with 0.4 lots (40,000 units).

Advanced Tips and Variations

  • Combine Bollinger Bands with Other Indicators
    • Bollinger + RSI – Look for RSI divergence near Bollinger Band breakouts.
    • Bollinger + MACD – MACD crossovers can validate breakouts and filter out false signals.
    • Bollinger + Volume Indicators It often signals a stronger follow-through if volume spikes at a Bollinger Band breakout.
  • Bollinger Band Squeeze with Keltner Channels – Some traders apply a strategy known as the “Bollinger Squeeze,” comparing Bollinger Bands with Keltner Channels. When the Bollinger Bands move inside the Keltner Channels, it indicates extremely low volatility (a super-squeeze), often preceding explosive moves.
  • Double Bollinger Bands – A technique popularized by Kathy Lien: using two sets of Bollinger Bands (for instance, 20,2 and 20,1) to gauge momentum and trend strength. If the price stays within the upper band set, it indicates a strong uptrend; if it stays within the lower band set, it’s a strong downtrend.
  • Bollinger Band Mean Reversion + Breakout Hybrid – Some traders watch for mean reversion trades when the price is near the outer bands and then switch to a breakout approach if the price consolidates near a band and then breaks out further.
  • Time of Day Considerations – Forex volatility is not consistent around the clock. The London and New York sessions are typically more volatile than the Asian session. Consider focusing on times when the market is most active if you want more frequent breakouts.
  • News Trading with Bollinger Bands – When major economic news is due (Non-Farm Payrolls, interest rate decisions), Bollinger Bands might tighten in anticipation. A breakout strategy can be highly effective if you can handle the associated risk and potential slippage during high-impact releases.

Frequently Asked Questions

  • Can Bollinger Bands be used on any currency pair?

    Yes, Bollinger Bands are versatile and can be used on any currency pair, although you should be mindful of each pair’s volatility characteristics. Exotic pairs might require different Bollinger Band settings.

  • What is the best timeframe for Bollinger Band breakouts?

    There is no universal “best” timeframe. Scalpers may use 1- or 5-minute charts, while swing traders opt for 4-hour or daily charts. It depends on your trading style and risk tolerance.

  • How do I avoid false breakouts?

    Wait for a decisive close beyond the band.
    Confirm with additional technical indicators like RSI or MACD.
    Watch out for major economic news that can create whipsaws.

  • Should I always wait for the bands to contract?

    The contraction phase (squeeze) often precedes big moves, but breakouts from an already volatile state can also occur. Monitoring band width simply increases your odds of catching an explosive move.

  • Can I use exponential moving averages (EMA) for the middle band?

    Yes, you can. Some traders prefer EMAs due to their responsiveness to recent price changes. However, you’d need to experiment to see if that improves your trading results.

  • What if the market consolidates after a breakout?

    If the market fails to follow through and consolidates, consider tightening your stop or exiting early. Not every breakout results in a big trend move.

  • Is the Bollinger Bands Breakout Strategy suitable for beginners?

    Yes, as long as they understand the basics of technical analysis and risk management. Bollinger Bands are relatively straightforward to interpret. The main challenge is maintaining discipline and avoiding emotional mistakes.

Conclusion

The Bollinger Bands Breakout Strategy is a powerful approach for forex traders seeking to capitalize on volatility expansions following periods of low volatility. By understanding how Bollinger Bands measure standard deviation around a moving average, traders gain insight into when the market might be “coiled up” for a large move. Successfully implementing this strategy involves:

  1. Identifying squeeze periods (bands contracting).
  2. Waiting for a decisive breakout candle.
  3. Confirming the breakout with additional tools and market context.
  4. Carefully placing entries, stop-losses, and profit targets.
  5. Employing robust risk management and position sizing.

Always remember that no strategy guarantees profit. Market conditions change, and unexpected news events can derail even the most technically sound setups. The key to long term success with Bollinger Band breakouts or any trading strategy is discipline, risk management, and continual learning.

If you’re new to Bollinger Bands or breakout trading, consider practicing on a demo account first. Refine your approach, document your trades in a journal, and adjust your parameters as needed. Over time, you’ll better understand market behavior and how Bollinger Bands can best serve your trading goals.

]]>
160146
McGinley Dynamic and Adaptive Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mcginley-dynamic-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mcginley-dynamic-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Mon, 06 Jan 2025 18:59:07 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=159978 The McGinley Dynamic and Adaptive Forex Trading Strategy is a simple forex indicator that helps you get good entries. Combining the McGinley Dynamic Indicator with the principles of adaptability, this strategy gives traders a powerful edge in identifying trends and optimizing trades.

If you’re looking for a strategy that minimizes lag, filters market noise, and adapts to volatility, this might just be the game changer you need.

Mcginley Dynamic and Adaptive forex strategy

Why Use the McGinley Dynamic and Adaptive Strategy?

Traditional moving averages like the SMA and EMA often fall short in fast-moving markets, lagging behind price action and leading to missed opportunities. The McGinley Dynamic Indicator solves this issue by adjusting to market conditions, offering a more accurate trend. When paired with adaptive trading principles, you get a Forex strategy that’s reliable and flexible enough to work across various market conditions.

McGinley Dynamic Indicator: Smoothing Out the Noise

The McGinley Dynamic Indicator is a step ahead of standard moving averages. Developed by John R. McGinley, this tool adjusts its smoothing factor in real time based on price changes, making it highly responsive during volatile periods and stable during calmer ones.

Key Benefits:

  • Lag Reduction: Tracks price action more closely than traditional MAs.
  • Adaptability: Adjusts to market speed, reducing false signals.
  • Clarity: Provides a clear view of the trend, even in choppy markets.

For traders, this means more accurate signals and less second-guessing during high-pressure moments.

The Adaptive Indicator: Real-Time Flexibility

Adaptive indicators are designed to adjust their parameters based on current market conditions. Unlike static indicators, they adapt dynamically, filtering out noise and delivering more reliable signals. The McGinley Dynamic Indicator embodies this adaptability, allowing traders to stay ahead of market shifts.

Why It’s Effective:

  • Real-Time Adjustments: Responds to volatility and trend strength.
  • Noise Reduction: Filters out minor price fluctuations.
  • Enhanced Decision-Making: Provides timely entry and exit signals.

This adaptability makes it a perfect fit for traders who want to optimize their strategies without constantly recalibrating their tools.

How to Trade with McGinley Dynamic and Adaptive Forex Trading Strategy

This straightforward strategy relies on the McGinley Dynamic Indicator to guide your trades. Here’s how you can implement it effectively:

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Identify an Uptrend:
    • Look for higher highs and higher lows on the price chart.
    • Confirm the uptrend with the McGinley Dynamic Indicator sloping upward.
  2. Entry Signal:
    • Wait for the price to cross above the McGinley Dynamic Indicator.
    • Ensure the candle closes above the indicator for confirmation.
  3. Stop-Loss Placement:
    • Place the stop-loss below the recent swing low or a few pips below the McGinley Dynamic Indicator.
  4. Take-Profit Target:
    • Set your target at a previous resistance level or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio.
  5. Optional Trailing Stop:
    • Use a trailing stop to lock in profits as the price moves in your favor.

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Identify a Downtrend:
    • Look for lower highs and lower lows on the price chart.
    • Confirm the downtrend with the McGinley Dynamic Indicator sloping downward.
  2. Entry Signal:
    • Wait for the price to cross below the McGinley Dynamic Indicator.
    • Ensure the candle closes below the indicator for confirmation.
  3. Stop-Loss Placement:
    • Place the stop-loss above the recent swing high or a few pips above the McGinley Dynamic Indicator.
  4. Take-Profit Target:
    • Set your target at a previous support level or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio.
  5. Optional Trailing Stop:
    • Use a trailing stop to maximize gains as the price continues to fall.

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Lag-Free Signals:
    • The McGinley Dynamic Indicator’s adaptability ensures signals are timely and accurate.
  2. Noise Reduction:
    • Filters out minor price fluctuations, allowing traders to focus on meaningful trends.
  3. Clear Entry and Exit Rules:
    • The strategy provides precise criteria for opening and closing trades, reducing emotional decision-making.
  4. Versatility:
    • Works across different timeframes and market conditions, making it suitable for day traders, swing traders, and even long-term investors.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Pro Tips for Success

  • Combine with Volume Indicators:
    • Adding volume analysis can help confirm the strength of trends and improve trade reliability.
  • Focus on High-Volatility Sessions:
    • Trade during the London and New York sessions, where market activity is highest.
  • Backtest and Practice:
    • Use an MT4 demo account to familiarize yourself with the McGinley Dynamic Indicator and refine your strategy.
  • Stay Updated on Market News:
    • Be aware of economic events that could impact market volatility and trend direction.

Free Download McGinley Dynamic and Adaptive Forex Trading Strategy

(Mirror Download)

Read More FXMAX Scalping Indicator FREE Download

Final Thoughts

The McGinley Dynamic and Adaptive Forex Trading Strategy is a must-try for traders looking to navigate the forex market with precision and adaptability. You can gain a significant edge in your trading by leveraging the McGinley Dynamic Indicator’s responsiveness and combining it with disciplined risk management.

Whether dealing with high volatility or calmer markets, this strategy keeps you aligned with the true market trend, helping you make smarter, more confident decisions. Take the time to practice, stay disciplined, and watch your trading performance improve.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mcginley-dynamic-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 159978
Mega Trend and Trigger Lines MT4 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mega-trend-and-trigger-lines-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mega-trend-and-trigger-lines-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Fri, 03 Jan 2025 18:08:43 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=159881 The Mega Trend and Trigger Lines MT4 Forex Trading Strategy simplifies trading by combining two powerful indicators to help traders make informed, confident decisions. This strategy focuses on spotting the primary market trend and precisely timing entries and exits.

Whether you’re new to trading or an experienced pro, this strategy is a simple yet effective way to find good trades.

Mega Trend and Trigger Lines MT4 Forex Trading Strategy

Why Use the Mega Trend and Trigger Lines Forex Strategy?

This strategy is built on two fundamental principles:

  1. Identify the Main Trend: The Mega Trend Indicator smooths out market noise, revealing the overall trend direction so you can trade in line with the market.
  2. Pinpoint Entry and Exit Points: The Trigger Lines Indicator highlights when momentum shifts, helping you precisely time your trades.

By using these tools in tandem, traders can stay on the right side of the market and make decisions based on clear, actionable signals.

Mega Trend Indicator: The Big Picture

The Mega Trend Indicator filters out short-term price fluctuations, allowing traders to focus on the market’s dominant trend. It’s essentially a smoothed moving average, helping you determine whether the market is in an uptrend, downtrend, or range.

Key Benefits:

  • Clarity: Shows the direction of the primary trend.
  • Simplicity: Easy to interpret, making it accessible for all traders.
  • Confidence: Helps you avoid trading against the market’s momentum.

For instance:

  • If the Mega Trend line is sloping upwards, the market is in an uptrend.
  • If it’s sloping downwards, the market is in a downtrend.

Sticking with the trend reduces the risk of getting caught in false breakouts or short-term reversals.

Trigger Lines Indicator: Precision Timing

The Trigger Lines Indicator consists of two moving averages (short-term and long-term) that interact to signal momentum shifts. A crossover between these lines indicates a potential buy or sell opportunity.

How It Works:

  • Bullish Crossover: The short-term moving average crosses above the long-term moving average, signaling an upward momentum shift.
  • Bearish Crossover: The short-term moving average crosses below the long-term moving average, signaling downward momentum.

These signals provide a systematic way to enter and exit trades without second-guessing your decisions.

How to Trade Using the Mega Trend and Trigger Lines Strategy

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Identify the Trend:
    • Check the Mega Trend Indicator for an uptrend. The line should slope upwards, confirming bullish market conditions.
  2. Confirm with Trigger Lines:
    • Look for a bullish crossover where the short-term moving average crosses above the long-term moving average.
  3. Additional Confirmation:
    • Consider using a supporting indicator like RSI or MACD for further validation, ensuring market momentum aligns with your trade setup.
  4. Enter the Trade:
    • Open a buy position when both indicators confirm the bullish trend.
  5. Set Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss below the recent swing low or a key support level.
  6. Set Take-Profit:
    • Target the next resistance level or use a risk-reward ratio like 1:2 to secure profits.
  7. Optional Trailing Stop:
    • Use a trailing stop to lock in gains if the trend continues strongly.

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Identify the Trend:
    • Use the Mega Trend Indicator for a downtrend. The line should slope downwards, confirming bearish market conditions.
  2. Confirm with Trigger Lines:
    • Look for a bearish crossover where the short-term moving average crosses below the long-term moving average.
  3. Additional Confirmation:
    • Use an indicator like RSI or MACD for further confirmations, ensuring downward momentum supports your trade.
  4. Enter the Trade:
    • Open a sell trade when both indicators confirm the bearish trend.
  5. Set Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss above the recent swing high or a key resistance level.
  6. Set Take-Profit:
    • Target the next support level or use a risk-reward ratio like 1:2.
  7. Optional Trailing Stop:
    • Use a trailing stop.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Trend-Focused Approach:
    • Following the primary trend increases your chances of success and avoids getting caught in counter-trend moves.
  2. Clear Signals:
    • The Trigger Lines Indicator provides precise entry and exit points, reducing guesswork and emotional trading.
  3. Risk Management:
    • You can manage risk effectively and protect your capital with clear stop-loss and take-profit rules.
  4. Adaptability:
    • This strategy works on multiple timeframes, making it suitable for day traders, swing traders, and even long-term investors.

Tips for Success

  1. Trade High-Volatility Sessions:
    • Focus on the London and New York sessions, where market movements are more pronounced.
  2. Stick to the Plan:
    • Don’t overtrade or trade too many setups. Wait for both the Mega Trend and Trigger Lines to align before entering a new trade.
  3. Practice Makes Perfect:
    • Use a Forex MT4 demo account to practice this strategy and practice your execution.
  4. Monitor News Events:
    • Check economic releases and market news.

Free Download Mega Trend and Trigger Lines MT4 Forex Trading Strategy

Forum(Mirror Download)

Read More Small Deposit Binary BOT (10$) FREE Download

Final Thoughts

The Mega Trend and Trigger Lines MT4 Forex Trading Strategy gives a simple way to trade in line with the market’s momentum. Combining the Mega Trend Indicator with the Trigger Lines ensures you can enter and exit trades at the right time.

Whether you’re a beginner looking for a simple strategy or a pro trader testing your methods, this strategy provides the indicators and rules you need to be profitable in the forex market. Practice, stay disciplined, and watch as your trading confidence grows.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mega-trend-and-trigger-lines-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 159881
Uni Volume Delta and Correlation MT4 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/correlation-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/correlation-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Tue, 31 Dec 2024 17:25:12 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=159786 If you’re ready to take your forex trading to the next level, the Uni Volume Delta and Correlation MT4 Forex Trading Strategy offers a fresh perspective by combining the power of volume analysis with the insights of market correlations. Whether aiming to confirm trends, anticipate reversals, or diversify your trading strategy, this approach is built to provide clarity in a sometimes chaotic market.

Let’s explain how this strategy works, how to use it effectively with MT4, and why it’s worth adding to your trading arsenal.

Uni Volume Delta and Correlation Forex Trading Strategy

Why Use the Uni Volume Delta and Correlation Strategy?

This strategy pairs two powerful concepts:

  1. Uni Volume Delta: Tracks the difference between buying and selling volumes, providing insights into market sentiment and momentum.
  2. Correlation Analysis: Examines how different currency pairs or assets move in relation to each other, uncovering patterns and enhancing risk management.

Together, these tools create a robust framework for making well-informed decisions in the fast-moving forex market.


Uni Volume Delta Indicator: Understanding Market Sentiment

The Uni Volume Delta Indicator offers a detailed look into the market by analyzing the balance between buying and selling activity at different price levels. It provides:

  • Trend Confirmation: A strong buying delta supports an uptrend, while a strong selling delta confirms a downtrend.
  • Reversal Alerts: Divergences between price action and volume delta may signal weakening momentum and potential reversals.

How It Works:

  • Positive Volume Delta: Indicates stronger buying pressure, suggesting bullish sentiment.
  • Negative Volume Delta: Indicates stronger selling pressure, pointing to bearish sentiment.

By integrating this indicator into your analysis, you can validate trends and spot shifts in market dynamics early, giving you an edge in timing your trades.


Correlation Indicator: Unlocking Market Relationships

The Correlation Indicator identifies how currency pairs or assets move relative to each other, providing a broader market context. Correlations can be:

  • Positive: Pairs that move in the same direction, such as EUR/USD and GBP/USD.
  • Negative: Pairs that move inversely, such as USD/JPY and EUR/USD.

Benefits of Correlation Analysis:

  • Diversification: Trade related pairs to amplify opportunities.
  • Risk Management: Hedge positions using inversely correlated pairs.
  • Pattern Discovery: Spot opportunities where correlations align with volume delta insights.

Combined with the Uni Volume Delta Indicator, correlation analysis enhances decision-making by aligning multiple factors for higher probability trades.


How to Trade Using the Uni Volume Delta and Correlation Strategy

Here’s a step-by-step guide to applying this strategy for buy and sell trades.


Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Identify Trend:
    • Confirm an uptrend on the price chart with higher highs and higher lows.
  2. Volume Confirmation:
    • Use the Uni Volume Delta Indicator to check for strong positive buying delta during the uptrend.
  3. Correlation Check:
    • Look for positive correlations with related currency pairs to strengthen the buy signal.
  4. Entry Point:
    • Enter the trade when there’s a significant increase in buying volume delta, ideally near a support level or after a price pullback.
  5. Set a Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss below the recent swing low or a key support level.
  6. Take-Profit Target:
    • Aim for the next resistance level or use a risk-reward ratio (e.g., 1:2) to secure profits.

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Identify Trend:
    • Confirm a downtrend on the price chart with lower lows and lower highs.
  2. Volume Confirmation:
    • Use the Uni Volume Delta Indicator to check for strong negative selling delta during the downtrend.
  3. Correlation Check:
    • Look for negative correlations with related currency pairs to confirm the sell signal.
  4. Entry Point:
    • Enter the trade when there’s a significant increase in selling volume delta, preferably near a resistance level or after a price rally.
  5. Set a Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss above the recent swing high or a key resistance level.
  6. Take-Profit Target:
    • Target the next support level or use a risk-reward ratio to lock in gains.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE


Why This Strategy Works

  1. Volume as a Leading Indicator:
    • Volume delta provides real-time insights into market sentiment, helping you anticipate moves before they fully develop.
  2. Correlation for Confirmation:
    • Market correlations add an extra layer of validation, increasing confidence in your trades.
  3. Risk Management:
    • Stop-loss and take-profit levels ensure disciplined trading while correlation analysis helps hedge risks effectively.
  4. Flexibility:
    • Suitable for various timeframes and currency pairs, making it adaptable to different trading styles.

Tips for Success

  1. Trade During Active Sessions:
    • Focus on the London and New York sessions, where liquidity and volume are highest.
  2. Monitor Correlations Regularly:
    • Correlations can change based on market conditions, so keep them updated to avoid surprises.
  3. Backtest the Strategy:
    • Use MT4’s backtesting tools to refine your approach and build confidence before trading live.
  4. Stay Disciplined:
    • Stick to your entry and exit criteria, and don’t let emotions override your strategy.

Free Download Uni Volume Delta and Correlation MT4 Forex Trading Strategy

Forum(Mirror Download)

Read More FXMAX Scalping Indicator FREE Download


Final Thoughts

The Uni Volume Delta and Correlation Forex Trading Strategy is a versatile and insightful approach to forex trading. By combining the power of volume analysis with correlation insights, it offers a well-rounded framework for making precise, informed trading decisions.

Whether you’re confirming trends, identifying reversals, or managing risk through correlation strategies, this method provides the tools needed to thrive in the competitive forex market. Practice it on your MT4 platform, refine your skills, and watch as it elevates your trading game.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/correlation-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 159786
MT4 Forex Trading Strategy: TSI MACD and Scalper Dream Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt4-forex-trading-strategy-tsi-macd-and-scalper-dream-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt4-forex-trading-strategy-tsi-macd-and-scalper-dream-strategy/#respond Wed, 25 Dec 2024 18:21:39 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=159585 Suppose you’re in the forex market and looking for a strategy that combines precision, speed, and adaptability. In that case, the TSI MACD and Scalper Dream Forex Trading Strategy might be exactly what you need. This powerful approach integrates the True Strength Index (TSI) and Moving Average Convergence Divergence (MACD) indicators with the fast-paced action of the Scalper Dream indicator to deliver a strategy designed for short-term trading success.

Whether a beginner or a seasoned trader, this strategy allows you to capitalize on small price movements while minimizing risks with disciplined, data-driven decisions.

MT4 Forex Trading Strategy TSI MACD and Scalper Dream Strategy

Why Use the TSI MACD and Scalper Dream Strategy?

This strategy brings together three critical elements:

  1. TSI (True Strength Index): Helps filter out market noise, delivering clear signals of trend direction and strength.
  2. MACD: Tracks momentum shifts and market trend direction, giving Forex traders insights into when a market might reverse.
  3. Scalper Dream Indicator: Provides good entry and exit signals, making sure you can act quickly in fast moving markets.

By using these tools, this strategy offers a good foundation for forex scalping strategies, making it a go to for traders who thrive on short term trades.

TSI MACD Indicator: The Core of the Strategy

The True Strength Index (TSI) measures market trend strength and price momentum by smoothing price fluctuations and filtering out market noise. It’s a game changer for Forex traders who want accurate signals.

The MACD, the other hand, is a well-known momentum and trend-following indicator that highlights when trends are gaining strength or reversing. Together, they offer:

  • Clear Direction: TSI shows when trends are gaining strength, while MACD confirms momentum shifts.
  • Reliable Signals: Avoid false breakouts with these proven indicators.

Scalper Dream Indicator: Precision for Entry and Exit

The Scalper Dream Indicator is built for traders who thrive on speed. It provides real-time signals for short-term price movements, helping you execute trades quickly. When paired with TSI and MACD, it delivers:

  • Accurate Entry Points: Alerts you when it’s time to jump into a trade.
  • Clear Exit Signals: Ensures you lock in profits or cut losses immediately.

This indicator perfectly complements the TSI MACD combo, giving you the confidence to trade efficiently.

How to Use the TSI MACD and Scalper Dream Strategy

Here’s a step-by-step guide to executing buy and sell trades using this simple trading strategy on MT4.

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Identify Momentum:
    • Wait for the TSI line to cross above the signal line, signaling bullish momentum.
    • Ensure the TSI value is above the zero line for stronger confirmation.
  2. Confirm with MACD:
    • Check for the MACD histogram turning positive or a bullish MACD crossover.
  3. Scalper Dream Signal:
    • Look for a buy signal from the Scalper Dream Indicator, such as an arrow or confirmation from other scalping metrics.
  4. Enter the Trade:
    • Open a buy position at market price, or the next candle will open after confirmation.
  5. Set a Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss below the recent swing low or a support level.
  6. Take-Profit Target:
    • Aim for a take-profit level at the next resistance zone or use a risk-reward ratio of 1:2 or 1:3.
  7. Trailing Stop Option:
    • Use a trailing stop to secure profits if the trend continues strongly.

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Identify Momentum:
    • Wait for the TSI line to cross below the signal line, signaling bearish momentum.
    • Ensure the TSI value is below the zero line for stronger confirmation.
  2. Confirm with MACD:
    • Check for the MACD histogram turning negative or a bearish MACD crossover.
  3. Scalper Dream Signal:
    • Look for a sell signal from the Scalper Dream Indicator, such as an arrow or confirmation from other scalping metrics.
  4. Enter the Trade:
    • Open a sell position at market price, or the next candle will open after confirmation.
  5. Set a Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss above the recent swing high or a resistance level.
  6. Take-Profit Target:
    • Target the next support level or use a risk-reward ratio of 1:2 or 1:3.
  7. Trailing Stop Option:
    • Use a trailing stop to lock in profits as the trade progresses.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Combines Trend and Momentum:
    • Together, TSI and MACD provide a strong foundation for identifying trends and momentum shifts.
  2. Precision Scalping:
    • Scalper Dream delivers real time, actionable signals for fast trades.
  3. Risk Management:
    • Clear stop-loss and take-profit rules reduce emotional trading and increase discipline.
  4. Flexibility:
    • Adapts to different market conditions, making it one of the best forex strategies for short-term trading.

Tips for Success

  1. Trade Active Sessions:
    • Use this strategy during the highest volatility in London and New York sessions.
  2. Stick to the Plan:
    • Don’t overtrade or force setups—wait for all three indicators to align.
  3. Practice First:
    • Use an MT4 demo account to backtest this scalping trading strategy and practice your execution.
  4. Monitor News Events:
    • Be aware of economic releases that could impact short-term market movements.

Free Download TSI MACD and Scalper Dream Forex Trading Strategy

Forum(Mirror Download)

Read More Small Deposit Binary BOT (10$) FREE Download

Final Thoughts

The TSI MACD and Scalper Dream Forex Trading Strategy is a simple approach to scalping that integrates powerful indicators for trend direction, momentum, and precision entries. Whether you’re just starting or an experienced trader, this forex scalping strategy offers a clear framework for navigating the forex market.

By combining the TSI MACD with the Scalper Dream for fast execution, this Forex strategy make sure you’re well equipped to get on short term price movements. Practice, refine, and implement this strategy on your MT4 platform, and watch your trading game reach new heights.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt4-forex-trading-strategy-tsi-macd-and-scalper-dream-strategy/feed/ 0 159585
Free Scalping and 100 Pips MT4 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/scalping-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/scalping-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Mon, 23 Dec 2024 17:51:48 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=159507 If you’re exploring ways to optimize your forex trading game, the Free Scalping Strategy and 100 Pips Strategy offer a powerful combination. Designed for different market conditions and trading styles, these approaches allow traders to adapt and profit, whether they’re scalping for small, quick gains or aiming for larger price movements over extended timeframes. In this guide, we’ll walk through these strategies, how to use them on MT4, and why they rank among the best forex strategies for traders of all levels.

What Is the Free Scalping Strategy?

Scalping is a popular forex scalping strategy where traders aim to make small, frequent profits by capitalizing on rapid price movements. The Free Scalping Indicator is an excellent tool for this style, offering precise entry and exit signals on short timeframes like 1-minute or 5-minute charts.

Free Scalping and 100 Pips MT4 Forex Trading Strategy

Key Features:

  • Short Timeframes: Works best on 1-minute and 5-minute charts for quick decision-making.
  • Frequent Trades: Allows for multiple trading opportunities during active market sessions.
  • Fast Signals: Designed for traders who thrive on high-speed market action.

If you enjoy the fast-paced nature of forex, this scalping trading strategy might be perfect for you.

What Is the 100 Pips Strategy?

The 100 Pips Strategy takes a slow approach, focusing on entering larger price moves,100 pips per trade over longer timeframes. It’s a simple trading strategy that finds clear trends and takes advantage of market momentum.

Key Features:

  • Profit Targets: Target for 100 pips per trade, making it a great choice for traders looking for good gains.
  • Larger Timeframes: Works on 1-hour or 4-hour charts to filter out market noise.
  • Fewer Trades: Requires patience, but each trade has the potential for significant returns.

This strategy is best for traders who like a calculated, long-term approach.

Why Combine Free Scalping and 100 Pips Strategy?

When combined, these two strategies provide a comprehensive framework:

  • Free Scalping Strategy: Helps you profit from short-term volatility during high-activity sessions.
  • 100 Pips Strategy: Keeps you focused on larger market trends for bigger gains.

Using both, you can adapt to different market conditions and diversify your trading approach, making this combination one of the best forex strategies available.

How to Trade with Free Scalping and 100 Pips Strategy

Let’s find out the step-by-step process for applying these Forex strategies effectively.

Free Scalping: Precision and Speed

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Signal:
    • Look for a bullish crossover of the 5-period EMA above the 20-period EMA on a 1-minute or 5-minute chart.
  2. Confirmation:
    • Ensure the price remains above both moving averages.
  3. Entry:
    • Enter a buy trade when the price retraces to the 5-period EMA and turns upward.
  4. Stop-Loss:
    • Set your stop-loss just below the recent swing low.
  5. Take-Profit:
    • Aim for 5–15 pips per trade, depending on market conditions.

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Signal:
    • Look for a bearish crossover of the 5-period EMA below the 20-period EMA.
  2. Confirmation:
    • Ensure the price stays below both moving averages.
  3. Entry:
    • Enter a sell trade when the price retraces to the 5-period EMA and resumes downward.
  4. Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss just above the recent swing high.
  5. Take-Profit:
    • Target 5–15 pips based on market activity.

100 Pips: Patience Pays

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Signal:
    • Look for a bullish crossover of the 5-period EMA above the 20-period EMA on a 1-hour or 4-hour chart.
  2. Confirmation:
    • Check that the price is trending above moving averages and additional indicators like RSI above 50.
  3. Entry:
    • Buy when the price pulls back to the 5-period EMA and resumes upward.
  4. Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss below the recent swing low.
  5. Take-Profit:
    • Target 100 pips or the next significant resistance level.

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Signal:
    • Look for a bearish crossover of the 5-period EMA below the 20-period EMA.
  2. Confirmation:
    • Ensure the price is trending below both moving averages, with RSI below 50.
  3. Entry:
    • Sell when the price pulls back to the 5-period EMA and resumes downward.
  4. Stop-Loss:
    • Set your stop-loss above the recent swing high.
  5. Take-Profit:
    • Aim for 100 pips or the next significant support level.

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Versatility:
    • Adapts to both short term and long term market conditions, making it good for all trading environments.
  2. Risk Management:
    • Clear stop loss and take profit levels avoid emotional decision making and enhance risk control.
  3. Efficiency:
    • The Free Scalping Strategy find quick wins, while the 100 Pips Strategy make sure you don’t miss out on larger trends.
  4. Simplicity:
    • Both strategies rely on straightforward EMA crossovers, making them easy to understand and execute.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Tips for Success

  1. Trade Active Sessions:
    • Scalping works best during the London and New York sessions when volatility is high.
  2. Backtest Your Strategy:
  3. Stick to Your Plan:
    • Avoid overtrading or deviating from the strategy’s rules, even during volatile conditions.
  4. Monitor News Events:
    • Look for Major economic announcements that could impact short term and long term market trends.

Free Download Scalping and 100 Pips Forex Trading Strategy

Forum(Mirror Download)

Read More Lucre Reborn Scalping Robot For FREE Download

Final Thoughts

The Free Scalping and 100 Pips Forex Trading Strategy offers a easy way to trade forex, with fast entry and exit scalping with the patience of long term trading. Whether you’re looking for more trades or bigger moves, this strategy provides good signals for different forex market conditions.

By practicing this Forex strategy on your MT4 platform, you can build confidence and consistency and achieve your trading goals. With its simplicity, adaptability, and potential for high returns, this is one of the best forex strategies for traders seeking to navigate the market effectively.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/scalping-mt4-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 159507
Professional Swing Intraday Channel Breakout MT4 Forex Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-intraday-channel-breakout-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-intraday-channel-breakout-forex-strategy/#respond Fri, 20 Dec 2024 18:19:04 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=159401 If you’re a trader looking to capitalize on both fast intraday moves and longer-term trends, the Intraday Channel Breakout and Professional Swing Strategy Is the Best Forex Strategy in your toolbox. This hybrid approach combines the precision of intraday trading with the strategic patience of swing trading, allowing you to adapt to various market conditions and capture profits across multiple timeframes.

Here’s how this strategy works, why it’s so effective, and how you can start using it on your MT4 platform today.

Professional Swing Intraday Channel Breakout MT4 Forex Strategy

What Is the Intraday Channel Breakout Strategy?

The Intraday Channel Breakout focuses on price movements within price channels. These channels are shown using the daily highs and lows, Showing support and resistance.

How It Works:

  • Upper Channel Line: resistance.
  • Lower Channel Line: support.
  • Breakouts: When the price breaks above the resistance or below the support, it signals a potential trade opportunity.

This Simple Forex strategy work best on market volatility, making it ideal for traders who want to seize quick opportunities during active trading sessions.

What Is the Professional Swing Strategy?

The Professional Swing Strategy takes a broader view, focusing on capturing larger trends over several days or weeks. By using indicators like moving averages and Fibonacci levels.

Key Components:

  • Trend Analysis: Using daily or weekly charts to find the market direction.
  • Reversal Points: Finding where trends might turn using technical indicators like MACD or RSI.
  • Patience: Holding trades longer to maximize profit potential.

This works in Forex intraday trading by giving you a long-term perspective, ensuring you don’t miss bigger moves while focusing on short-term trades.

Why Combine These Forex Strategies?

The real power of this Forex strategy is combining intraday breakouts with swing trading insights. Here’s why:

  1. Intraday Precision: Helps you catch quick moves within a single trading session.
  2. Swing Perspective: Keeps you aligned with the overall market trend, lowering the risk of going against the trend.
  3. Adaptability: Works across different market conditions, whether it’s a trending or ranging market.

Together, these approaches create a balanced, versatile strategy for consistent trading success.

How to Trade the Intraday Channel Breakout and Professional Swing Strategy

Let’s dive into the steps for executing buy and sell trades using this strategy.

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Identify the Channel:
    • On your MT4 platform, draw an intraday price channel by connecting the day’s highs and lows.
  2. Wait for a Breakout:
    • Check the price as it approaches the upper channel line (resistance). Enter a buy trade when the price breaks above this line.
  3. Set a Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss just below the lower channel line (support) or the recent swing low.
  4. Take-Profit Target:
    • Aim for the next resistance level or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio to lock in profits.
  5. Confirm with the Swing Indicator:
    • Check daily or weekly charts to ensure the price is above key moving averages (e.g., 50-period or 200-period SMA/EMA).
    • Use additional confirmation like a bullish MACD crossover or RSI above 50.
Professional Swing Intraday Channel Breakout MT4

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Identify the Channel:
    • Draw an intraday price channel on your chart, using daily highs and lows.
  2. Wait for a Breakdown:
    • Watch for the price to break below the lower channel line (support). Enter a sell trade when the price breaches this line.
  3. Set a Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss just above the upper channel line (resistance) or the recent swing high.
  4. Take-Profit Target:
    • Target the next support level or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio.
  5. Confirm with the Swing Indicator:
    • Check daily or weekly charts to ensure the price is below key moving averages.
    • Look for additional confirmation like a bearish MACD crossover or RSI below 50.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Intraday Precision:
    • The Intraday Channel Breakout find price movements, giving you immediate trading opportunities.
  2. Swing Perspective:
    • The Professional Swing Indicator ensures you’re trading in line with the larger trend, reducing the risk of short-term trades going against the market’s overall direction.
  3. Clear Risk Management:
    • Defined stop-loss and take-profit levels help manage risk effectively and improve your risk-reward ratio.
  4. Adaptability:
    • Works in volatile sessions like the London and New York overlaps and during quieter Asian sessions.

Tips for Success

  1. Focus on Active Sessions:
    • The London and New York sessions provide the most volatility, making them ideal for intraday breakouts.
  2. Use Multiple Timeframes:
    • Analyze lower timeframes (15-minute or 1-hour) for breakouts and higher timeframes (daily or weekly) for trend confirmation.
  3. Practice on a Demo Account:
    • Test this Forex strategy on an MT4 demo account to get comfortable with indicators and entries.
  4. Stay Disciplined:
    • Only trade when both the channel breakout and swing confirmations align.

Free Download Intraday Channel Breakout and Professional Swing Strategy

Forum(Mirror Download)

Read More Pandorum NON-Repaint Indicator – [Cost $99] – For FREE

Final Thoughts

The Intraday Channel Breakout and Professional Swing Forex Trading Strategy is a good approach that combines the best of two worlds: the agility of intraday trading and the patience of swing trading. By leveraging price channels for precise entries and using swing indicators for long-term direction, you can confidently trade across different market conditions.

This strategy is perfect for the MT4 platform, offering the tools and flexibility needed to execute trades effectively. Whether you’re a seasoned trader or just starting out, give this strategy a try and see how it can elevate your trading game.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-intraday-channel-breakout-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 159401
Exit and Fisher No Repainting MT4 Forex Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/fisher-no-repainting-mt4-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/fisher-no-repainting-mt4-forex-strategy/#respond Sat, 14 Dec 2024 18:22:16 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=158796 Trading in the forex market can be challenging, especially when unreliable indicators lead to poor decision-making. The Exit and Fisher No Repainting Forex Trading Strategy solves this problem by providing consistent, unchanging signals you can trust. With a focus on accurate entry and exit points, this strategy eliminates the common frustration of repainting indicators that shift signals after the fact, giving you greater clarity and confidence in your trades.

Here’s a step-by-step guide to understanding and applying this practical MT4 forex strategy for better results in the fast-moving forex market.

Exit and Fisher No Repainting Forex Trading Strategy

Why Use the Exit Indicator?

The Exit Indicator is the main tool of this forex strategy, giving non repainting signals for closing trades. Unlike repainting mt4 indicators that change their signals as new data comes in, the Exit mt4 Indicator never repaint.

Key Benefits:

  • Clarity in Exits: Provides unchanging exit signals to help traders close positions confidently.
  • Simplicity: Reduces the need for constant reevaluation of trades.
  • Improved Risk Management: Ensures timely exits, preventing unnecessary losses and locking in profits.

In fast-paced forex markets, the Exit Indicator simplifies decision-making, allowing you to act quickly and with confidence.

What is the Fisher No Repainting Indicator?

The Fisher No Repainting Indicator transforms price action data making it easier to identify overbought or oversold market conditions. More importantly, it provides signals that don’t repaint, meaning they remain fixed once generated.

Why It’s Effective:

  • Accurate Entry Points: Highlights extreme price levels where reversals are likely.
  • No Repainting: Signals remain constant, eliminating confusion and second-guessing.
  • Reliable Trend Identification: Detects potential market reversals and continuations.

On MT4, the Fisher No Repainting Indicator pairs perfectly with the Exit Indicator to create a solid foundation for this strategy.

Why Combine These Tools?

The mix between the Exit Indicator and Fisher No Repainting Indicator creates a strategy that is both reliable and simple:

  1. Fisher No Repainting Indicator identifies ideal entry points by detecting market conditions.
  2. Exit Indicator provides stable signals for timely exits, making sure you get profits and avoid unnecessary risk.

This combination is perfect for traders who value consistency and simplicity in their trading approach.

How to Use the Exit and Fisher No Repainting Strategy

Here’s how to implement this MT4 forex strategy for both buy and sell trades.

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Identify a Buy Signal:
    • Wait for the Fisher Indicator to generate a buy signal. This happens when the Fisher indicator value crosses above a key level, indicating potential up move.
  2. Confirm with the Exit Indicator:
    • Check if the Exit Indicator match with the Fisher signal, confirming the upward trend.
  3. Enter the Trade:
    • Open a buy entry at the price level where both indicators confirm the signal.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss:
    • Place the stop-loss below the recent swing low or a predefined distance from the entry point to manage risk effectively.
  5. Define Your Take-Profit Target:
    • Aim for the next resistance level or use a risk-to-reward ratio of at least 1:2 (e.g., risking 20 pips for a 40-pip profit).

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Identify a Sell Signal:
    • Look for a sell signal from the Fisher Indicator, which happens when the Fisher indicator value crosses below a key level, indicating potential down move.
  2. Confirm with the Exit Indicator:
    • Check that the Exit Indicator supports the sell entry, confirming the downward trend.
  3. Enter the Trade:
    • Open a sell entry at the price level where both indicators confirm the signal.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss:
    • Position the stop-loss above the recent swing high or a predefined distance from the entry point.
  5. Define Your Take-Profit Target:
    • Target the next support level or use a risk reward ratio of at least 1:2 to lock in profits.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Fixed Signals:
    • Both the Exit and Fisher No Repainting Indicators provide stable, unchanging signals, reducing confusion and false entries.
  2. Focus on Key Market Points:
    • The Fisher Indicator identifies overbought or oversold price levels, while the Exit Indicator confirms exit points.
  3. Versatility:
    • This strategy works well on multiple mt4 timeframes and currency pairs, making it very good for scalping, day trading, or swing trading.
  4. Improved Confidence:
    • By eliminating the issue of repainting, Forex traders can trust the signals and make decisions easily.

Tips for Success

  1. Trade During Active Market Sessions:
    • Focus on the London and New York sessions for higher volatility and better opportunities.
  2. Use Higher Timeframes for Confirmation:
    • Check 4-hour or daily charts to confirm trends before entering trades on lower timeframes.
  3. Avoid Overtrading:
    • Only enter trades when both indicators match. Patience is key to avoiding losses.
  4. Backtest the Strategy:
    • Practice using this strategy in MT4’s backtest to refine your skills and adjust the approach to suit your trading style.

Free Download Exit and Fisher No Repainting Forex Trading Strategy

Read More Daily Pips Hunter Trading Strategy MT4 FREE Download

Final Thoughts

The Exit and Fisher No Repainting Forex Trading Strategy is a reliable and simple method for trading in the forex market. By combining the precision of the Fisher No Repainting MT4 Indicator with the stability of the Exit Indicator, this strategy eliminates the common pitfalls of repainting signals and provides a solid framework for consistent results.

Perfectly suited for the MT4 platform, this strategy is ideal for traders who value simplicity, clarity, and confidence in their trades. Start practicing this approach today, and watch how it transforms your trading outcomes.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/fisher-no-repainting-mt4-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 158796
MT4 Forex Trading Strategy: Trendline and BB Alert Arrows https://www.forexcracked.com/education/trendline-and-bb-alert-arrows-mt4-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/trendline-and-bb-alert-arrows-mt4-strategy/#respond Wed, 11 Dec 2024 18:07:21 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=157706 Navigating the forex market doesn’t have to be complicated. The Trendline and BB Alert Arrows Forex Trading Strategy offers a simple yet powerful approach by combining the time-tested accuracy of trendlines with the modern efficiency of BB Alert Arrows. This strategy leverages both classic technical analysis and innovative volatility indicators, making it an excellent fit for traders looking for precision and confidence in their trades.

Here’s a complete breakdown of how to use this strategy effectively and optimize your forex trading performance.

Trendline and BB Alert Arrows Forex Trading Strategy mt4

What Are Trendlines?

Trendlines are one of the most reliable tools in a trader’s arsenal. They help map the market’s direction by connecting a series of higher lows in an uptrend or lower highs in a downtrend. These lines serve as dynamic support and resistance levels, giving Forex traders a way to find potential reversals or trend continuations.

Why Trendlines Work:

  • Support and Resistance: Price bounces off these lines, providing good entry and exit points.
  • Trend Clarity: They highlight the overall direction, helping you trade in line with the market momentum.

When used with MT4, the trendline tool is straightforward and essential for any technical analysis strategy.

What Are BB Alert Arrows?

The BB Alert Arrows Indicator is an advanced tool based on Bollinger Bands, which are renowned for their ability to measure market volatility. Bollinger Bands consist of an upper band, lower band, and a central moving average. The BB Alert Arrows make it easy to use by adding visual arrows on the chart to signal overbought or oversold conditions.

Key Features of BB Alert Arrows:

  • Bullish Arrows: Appear near the lower Bollinger Band, signaling a upward reversal.
  • Bearish Arrows: Appear near the upper Bollinger Band, signaling a potential downward reversal.
  • Volatility Insight: These signals help identify moments when price is likely to reverse or break out.

The BB Alert Arrows Indicator works seamlessly on MT4, making it a great complement to the trendline tool.

Why Combine Trendlines and BB Alert Arrows?

When combined, trendlines and BB Alert Arrows create a simple strategy that improves your trading accuracy:

  1. Trendlines establish the market’s direction and identify key support and resistance levels.
  2. BB Alert Arrows confirm potential entry and exit points based on volatility and price behavior.

This synergy ensures that you’re not only trading with the trend but also timing your entries with precision.

How to Use the Trendline and BB Alert Arrows Strategy

Here’s a step-by-step guide to applying this strategy for both buy and sell trades.

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Identify the Trend:
    • Draw a trendline connecting at least two swing lows to confirm an uptrend. Make sure the price is keep touching this line without breaking below it.
  2. Wait for Price to Test Support:
    • Watch for the price to move or touch the trendline. This signals that the market is at a support zone.
  3. Look for BB Alert Arrow Confirmation:
    • A bullish BB Alert Arrow should appear near the lower Bollinger Band, confirming a reversal to the upside.
  4. Enter the Trade:
    • Place a buy order when the price begins moving upward after the arrow appears and bounces off the trendline.
  5. Set Your Stop-Loss:
    • Position your stop-loss just below the recent swing low or slightly below the trendline.
  6. Take Profit:
    • Aim for the upper Bollinger Band or the next significant resistance level.

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Identify the Trend:
    • Draw a trendline connecting at least two swing highs to confirm a downtrend. Ensure the price is respecting this line without breaking above it.
  2. Wait for Price to Test Resistance:
    • Monitor the price as it approaches or touches the trendline, indicating a resistance zone.
  3. Look for BB Alert Arrow Confirmation:
    • A bearish BB Alert Arrow should appear near the upper Bollinger Band, signaling a potential reversal to the downside.
  4. Enter the Trade:
    • Place a sell order when the price starts moving downward after the arrow appears and rejects the trendline.
  5. Set Your Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss just above the recent swing high or slightly above the trendline.
  6. Take Profit:
    • Target the lower Bollinger Band or the next significant support level.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Trendline Precision:
    • Trendlines provide a clear visual framework for identifying support and resistance zones.
  2. Volatility Signals:
    • BB Alert Arrows ensure you’re trading with the market’s momentum, reducing false entries.
  3. Simplicity and Flexibility:
    • This strategy works across all timeframes, making it suitable for scalping, day trading, or swing trading.
  4. Risk Management:
    • Combining trendlines with Bollinger Bands gives you clear stop-loss and take-profit levels, improving overall risk control.

Tips for Success

  1. Trade High-Volatility Sessions:
    • Focus on the London and New York sessions when price movements are more active.
  2. Use Higher Timeframes for Confirmation:
    • Check 4-hour or daily charts to confirm the trend before trading on lower timeframes.
  3. Avoid Overtrading:
    • Only trade when the price touch the trendline and match with a BB Alert Arrow signal.
  4. Backtest Your Strategy:
    • Use the MT4 backtesting feature to test this strategy in market conditions and fine-tune your approach.

Free Download Trendline and BB Alert Arrows MT4 Forex Trading Strategy

Read More Daily Pips Hunter Trading Strategy MT4 FREE Download

Final Thoughts

The Trendline and BB Alert Arrows Forex Trading Strategy combines the simplicity of trendlines with the power of Bollinger Bands to give you an edge in the forex market. By focusing on clear signals and well-defined support and resistance levels, this strategy helps you trade with confidence and precision.

Perfectly suited for the MT4 platform, this strategy is good enough for traders at all levels, from beginners to professionals. Practice this strategy, refine your entry, and watch your trading results improve.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/trendline-and-bb-alert-arrows-mt4-strategy/feed/ 0 157706
Simple Display Panel and Trend Arrows Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-display-panel-and-trend-arrows-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-display-panel-and-trend-arrows-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Sun, 08 Dec 2024 18:20:40 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=157621 The Simple Display Panel and Trend Arrows Forex Trading Strategy is a straightforward and effective method for trading in the fast-paced forex market. By combining the clarity of the Simple Display Panel with the precision of the Trend Arrows MT5 Indicator, this strategy simplifies decision-making and helps traders identify high-probability setups with confidence. Perfectly suited for the MT5 trading platform, this approach is ideal for Forex traders at any experience level, from beginners to seasoned Traders.

This guide will walk you through how to use this powerful MT5 forex strategy, explaining its components, how to execute trades, and tips for maximizing its effectiveness.

Simple Display Panel and Trend Arrows mt5 Forex Trading Strategy

Why Use the Simple Display Panel?

The Simple Display Panel is your command center for analyzing the forex market. It consolidates key data into one user-friendly interface, providing:

  • Current price levels
  • Major support and resistance zones
  • Trend direction and momentum

This indicator is especially valuable for fast-moving markets, allowing Forex traders to make good decisions without being confused down by excessive data. Its simple design helps both novice and experienced traders quickly identify market trends and find entry and exit opportunities.

On MT5, the Simple Display Panel integrates seamlessly into your trading setup, giving you instant access to critical information in real time.

What Is the Trend Arrows Indicator?

The Trend Arrows Indicator is a visual tool that provides clear signals on market direction:

  • Upward arrows: Indicate a bullish trend or potential reversal to the upside.
  • Downward arrows: Suggest a bearish trend or potential trend reversal to the downside.

By displaying these arrows on your MT5 charts, the Trend Arrows MT5 Indicator help you with market technical analysis and confirms trade setups. Its ability to detect trend momentum and reversals makes it an indispensable part of this strategy.

Why Combine These Tools?

Combining the Simple Display Panel and Trend Arrows Indicator creates a dynamic system that balances clarity and precision:

  1. The Simple Display Panel identifies critical price levels and trends.
  2. The Trend Arrows Indicator confirms those trends and signals optimal entry and exit points.

This combination ensures that you’re trading with market momentum while staying aware of key support and resistance levels.

How to Use the Simple Display Panel and Trend Arrows Strategy

This strategy works across multiple timeframes, making it versatile for scalping, intraday, or swing trading. Here’s how to execute buy and sell trades effectively.

Buy Setup (Long Position)

  1. Identify the Uptrend:
    • Check the Simple Display Panel to confirm that the market is in an uptrend with higher highs and higher lows.
  2. Confirm with Trend Arrows:
    • Wait for the Trend Arrows Indicator to display an upward arrow, signaling bullish momentum or a reversal.
  3. Enter the Trade:
    • Open a buy order at the close of the candle that confirms the uptrend.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss:
    • Position your stop-loss just below the nearest support level or the most recent swing low.
  5. Define Your Take-Profit Target:
    • Target the next resistance level or aim for a risk-reward ratio of at least 1:2.

Sell Setup (Short Position)

  1. Identify the Downtrend:
    • Use the Simple Display Panel to confirm that the market is in a downtrend with lower lows and lower highs.
  2. Confirm with Trend Arrows:
    • Wait for the Trend Arrows Indicator to display a downward arrow, signaling bearish momentum or a reversal.
  3. Enter the Trade:
    • Place a sell order at the close of the candle that confirms the downtrend.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss:
    • Place your stop-loss just above the nearest resistance level or the most recent swing high.
  5. Define Your Take-Profit Target:
    • Target the next support level or use a risk-reward ratio of at least 1:2.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Clear Signals:
    • The Trend Arrows Indicator reduces confusion by providing direct visual cues on market direction.
  2. Efficient Market Analysis:
    • The Simple Display Panel consolidates crucial data, saving time and makeing it easy to make trades.
  3. Adaptable Across Timeframes:
    • This MT5 strategy works for scalpers, day traders, and swing traders, good for any trading style.
  4. Improved Risk Management:
    • By combining clear entry signals with support and resistance levels, this Forex strategy improves risk management and trade precision.

Tips for Success

  1. Trade High-Volatility Sessions:
    • Use this Forex strategy during the London and New York trading sessions when price movements are more pronounced.
  2. Combine with Additional Indicators:
    • Pair this strategy with complementary indicators like RSI or MACD for added confirmation in challenging market conditions.
  3. Start with a Demo Account:
    • Practice this Forex strategy on a demo account to refine your execution and build confidence before trading live.
  4. Stick to the Plan:
    • Avoid overtrading. Only enter trades when both the Simple Display Panel and Trend Arrows align.

Free Download Simple Display Panel and Trend Arrows Forex Trading Strategy

Read More Best Currency Correlation Forex Indicator mt4 Free Download

Final Thoughts

The Simple Display Panel and Trend Arrows Forex Trading Strategy is an good choice for traders looking a simple Forex Strategy. By leveraging the clarity of the Simple Display Panel MT5 indicator and the precision of the Trend Arrows MT5 Indicator, this strategy help you to make informed decisions and open trades correctly.

Perfectly good for the MT5 platform, this strategy can help you navigate the forex market. Try it today, and take the first step toward more consistent trading success.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-display-panel-and-trend-arrows-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 157621
Best Pivot Points and Trading Sessions MT5 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/trading-sessions-mt5-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/trading-sessions-mt5-forex-strategy/#respond Thu, 05 Dec 2024 18:44:29 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=157518 If you’ve been trading forex for a while, you know that timing is just as important as knowing where the price is likely to turn. The Pivot Points and Trading Sessions Strategy helps you tackle both. It combines key price levels with an understanding of market behavior during different trading sessions. This strategy works particularly well for traders looking to maximize opportunities in a structured, predictable way.

Let me walk you through how it works.

What Are Pivot Points?

Pivot Points are calculated price levels that traders use to identify potential support and resistance. They’re based on the previous day’s high, low, and close prices, making them good markers for the forex market.

The setup:

  • Central Pivot Point (P): The main pivot level. If the price is over it, the forex market is generally bullish; if below, it’s bearish.
  • Support Levels (S1, S2, S3): Below the central pivot, these indicate where the chart price might bounce.
  • Resistance Levels (R1, R2, R3): Above the pivot, these entry signal where the price might reverse downward.

The beauty of Pivot Points is how simple and effective they are. They give you a clear framework for identifying potential trade setups without adding too much clutter to your chart.

Pivot Points and Trading Sessions Forex Trading Strategy

Why Focus on Trading Sessions?

The forex market runs 24/5, but not all hours are equal. The market is split into three main sessions:

  1. Asian Session: Lower volatility, often ranging.
  2. European Session: High liquidity, lots of movement.
  3. North American Session: Another high-volatility market session, often overlapping with the European session for even stronger price action.

Knowing which session you’re trading in can help you time your entries. For example:

  • During the European and North American sessions, price tends to move more sharply, making it ideal for breakout trades.
  • During the Asian session, the market is quieter, so support and resistance levels might hold more firmly.

Why Combine These Two?

The combination of Pivot Points and Trading Sessions gives you a dynamic way to trade:

  1. Pivot Points highlight where the price is likely to react.
  2. Trading Sessions tell you when the price is most likely to move with strength or respect key levels.

Together, they help you trade with more precision and confidence.

How to Trade This Strategy

Here’s how to set up and execute both buy and sell trades using Pivot Points and Trading Sessions on your MT5 platform.

Buy Setup (Going Long)

  1. Check the Price Position:
    • Make sure the price is above the central pivot point (P). This indicates a bullish bias.
  2. Look for Support:
    • Watch for the price to test and bounce off a support level (S1 or S2).
  3. Time It Right:
    • Enter during the European or North American session when volatility is higher.
  4. Wait for a Breakout (Optional):
    • If the price breaks above a resistance level (R1) with strong momentum, this can confirm a buy signal.
  5. Confirm with Indicators:
    • Use tools like RSI or MACD to confirm bullish momentum. For instance, if RSI is below 30 and rising, it suggests the market was oversold and is now gaining strength.
  6. Place Your Buy Order:
    • Execute your buy trade once all conditions align.
  7. Set Stop-Loss and Take-Profit:
    • Place your stop-loss just below the support level or the recent swing low.
    • Target the next resistance level (R1 or R2), or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio.

Sell Setup (Going Short)

  1. Check the Price Position:
    • Ensure the price is below the central pivot point (P). This indicates a bearish bias.
  2. Look for Resistance:
    • Watch for the price to test and reject a resistance level (R1 or R2).
  3. Time It Right:
    • Enter during the European or North American session for better follow-through.
  4. Wait for a Breakdown (Optional):
    • If the price breaks below a support level (S1) with strong momentum, this can confirm a sell signal.
  5. Confirm with Indicators:
    • Use tools like RSI or MACD to confirm bearish momentum. For example, if RSI is above 70 and turning down, it signals the market may be overbought.
  6. Place Your Sell Order:
    • Execute your sell trade once all conditions align.
  7. Set Stop-Loss and Take-Profit:
    • Place your stop-loss just above the resistance level or recent swing high.
    • Target the next support level (S1 or S2), or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Structured Levels: Pivot Points give you clear support and resistance levels, making it easier to spot trade opportunities.
  2. Session Context: Forex Trading Sessions add timing to the mix, helping to focus on periods when price is most likely to move significantly.
  3. Momentum Confirmation: Using additional indicators like RSI or MACD ensures you’re trading with the trend or at key reversal points.

Tips for Success

  1. Start with Demo Trading:
    • Test this strategy on a demo account to get comfortable with how Pivot Points and Trading Sessions interact.
  2. Focus on Overlaps:
    • The London-New York overlap is often the most volatile and provides the best opportunities for this strategy.
  3. Be Patient:
    • Not every bounce or breakout will lead to a winning trade. Wait for confirmation from multiple factors.
  4. Adjust for Timeframes:
    • This mt5 forex strategy works on multiple timeframes, but I recommend using 15-minute to 1-hour charts for day trading.

Free Download Pivot Points and Trading Sessions MT5 Strategy

Read More White Walker MetaTrader 4 Trading System FREE Download

Final Thoughts

The Pivot Points and Trading Sessions Strategy is all about combining structure with timing. By using Pivot Points to map out key price levels and aligning your trades with the most active sessions, you’re putting yourself in a position to make smarter, more calculated good decisions.

Give this forex strategy a shot on your MT5 platform and tweak it to fit your trading style. Remember, no strategy is perfect, so always manage your risk and stay disciplined.

Good luck and happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/trading-sessions-mt5-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 157518
Relative Volatility Index and Japanese Candlesticks MT5 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/japanese-candlesticks-mt5-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/japanese-candlesticks-mt5-strategy/#respond Mon, 02 Dec 2024 15:31:31 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=157371 If you’ve been trading forex for a while, you know how challenging it can be to filter out the noise and focus on meaningful signals. That’s where the Relative Volatility Index and Japanese Candlesticks MT5 Strategy come in. Together, they make a powerful combo that helps you spot high-probability trades by blending volatility analysis with price action.

This strategy is all about timing. The RVI tells you whether the market is gaining momentum or losing steam, while candlestick patterns give you visual confirmation of what’s happening in real time. Let me break it down step by step.

What is the Relative Volatility Index (RVI)?

The RVI measures the market’s volatility while factoring in the direction of price movement. It works on a scale from 0 to 100:

  • Above 50: Indicates bullish volatility—momentum is pushing upward.
  • Below 50: Suggests bearish volatility—momentum is pointing downward.

What’s great about the RVI is how it helps you confirm the strength of a trend. If the price is moving up but the RVI isn’t following, that could mean the trend is weakening. On the flip side, if both the price and RVI are aligned, it’s a good sign the trend has strength behind it.

Relative Volatility Index and Japanese Candlestick mt5 Forex Trading Strategy

What Are Japanese Candlestick Patterns?

Candlestick patterns are your bread and butter for reading price action. They show you whether buyers or sellers are in control and can indicate potential reversals or trend continuations.

Some of the key patterns to watch for include:

  • Bullish Engulfing: A strong green candle that completely engulfs the previous red candle, signaling buyer strength.
  • Hammer: A small body with a long lower wick, showing buyers stepping in after sellers tried to push the price down.
  • Bearish Engulfing: A strong red candle engulfs the previous green candle, indicating selling pressure.
  • Shooting Star: A small body with a long upper wick, showing sellers gaining control after buyers pushed the price up.

Why Combine These Two?

The RVI and candlestick patterns complement each other perfectly. Candlesticks are great for spotting potential setups, but they can give false signals, especially in choppy markets. The RVI acts as a filter, confirming whether the market has the momentum to back up what the candlesticks are telling you.

How to Trade the Strategy

Here’s how to put this strategy into action, step by step.

Buy Setup (Going Long)

  1. Check the RVI: Ensure the RVI is above 50, indicating bullish momentum.
  2. Look for a Bullish Candlestick Pattern: Wait for confirmation with one of these:
    • Bullish Engulfing: A strong green candle fully engulfs the previous red candle.
    • Hammer: A small body with a long lower wick, signaling buyer strength.
  3. Enter the Trade: Place a buy order just above the high of the confirming candlestick. This ensures you’re entering once the market confirms the move.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just below the low of the confirming candlestick to protect against sudden reversals.
  5. Take Profit: Aim for the nearest resistance level or use a risk-reward ratio of at least 1:2. For example, if your stop-loss is 20 pips, your take-profit should be at least 40 pips.

Sell Setup (Going Short)

  1. Check the RVI: Ensure the RVI is below 50, signaling bearish momentum.
  2. Look for a Bearish Candlestick Pattern: Wait for confirmation with one of these:
    • Bearish Engulfing: A strong red candle fully engulfs the previous green candle.
    • Shooting Star: A small body with a long upper wick, indicating selling pressure.
  3. Enter the Trade: Place a sell order just below the low of the confirming candlestick. This confirms that sellers are taking control.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just above the high of the confirming candlestick to limit your risk.
  5. Take Profit: Target the nearest support level or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio. Adjust based on market conditions.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

This strategy is effective because it combines two key elements:

  1. RVI for Confirmation: The RVI filters out false signals by confirming whether the market has the momentum to support a trade.
  2. Candlestick Patterns for Precision: Candlesticks give you clear entry signals based on price action and market psychology.

By using these tools together, you’re reducing the guesswork and focusing on high-probability setups.

Tips for Success

  1. Focus on Active Sessions: Use this strategy during the London and New York sessions when the market is most active.
  2. Watch for Divergences: If the price makes a new high but the RVI doesn’t, it could signal a weakening trend and potential reversal.
  3. Be Patient: Wait for clear signals. If the RVI and candlestick patterns don’t align, it’s better to skip the trade.
  4. Practice on a Demo Account: Before going live, test this forex strategy on a demo account and learn how the indicators interact.

Free Download Relative Volatility Index and Japanese Candlestick MT5 Strategy

Read More Hidden Signals Forex Trading Strategy

Wrapping It Up

The Relative Volatility Index and Japanese Candlestick MT5 Strategy are great ways to bring structure and confidence to your trading. By combining the RVI’s volatility analysis with the visual clarity of candlestick patterns, you’re getting a good solid edge in the forex market.

Try this strategy on your MT5 platform, and don’t forget to tweak it to fit your trading style. As always, stay disciplined, manage your risk, and trust the process.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/japanese-candlesticks-mt5-strategy/feed/ 0 157371
Top 5 Simple Forex Strategies for Beginners https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/5-simple-forex-strategies-for-beginners/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/5-simple-forex-strategies-for-beginners/#respond Mon, 02 Dec 2024 15:26:53 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=157187 Forex trading is both an art and a science. For beginners, navigating the complexities of the forex market can be daunting. To succeed, you need strategies that are not only effective but also simple enough to understand and execute. This guide dives deep into five Simple Forex Strategies for Beginners, offering detailed insights into how they work, why they are effective, and how you can implement them.

Top 5 Simple Forex Strategies for Beginners
forexcracked.com

To understand these strategies better, you need to know how the market works, how prices move, and how analysts study the forex market. Your goal isn’t to predict exactly where the market will go, but to understand what other traders are likely to do, as their actions drive prices. Learning how price action works will give you a clearer understanding.

To explore each strategy in detail, follow the links provided with each one.

1. Trend Following Strategy

Trend Following Strategy

forexcracked.com

The trend-following strategy is the cornerstone of trading. It involves identifying and trading in the direction of a market’s prevailing trend. Trends represent collective market sentiment and often persist for extended periods, making them reliable indicators for trading.

Understanding Market Trends
forexcracked.com

Market trends occur in three directions:

  1. Uptrend: Prices move higher with higher highs and higher lows.
  2. Downtrend: Prices move lower with lower highs and lower lows.
  3. Sideways trend (Range): Prices fluctuate within a horizontal range without clear direction.

How Trend Following Works

Trend following is about riding the wave of momentum:

  1. Identify the Trend: Use higher timeframes to spot the overall trend. For instance, on a daily chart, an uptrend is characterized by a series of higher highs and lows.
  2. Use Indicators for Confirmation: Common indicators include:
    • Moving Averages (MA): A 50-day moving average crossing above a 200-day moving average confirms an uptrend.
    • ADX (Average Directional Index): An ADX value above 25 indicates a strong trend.
  3. Plan Your Entry: In an uptrend, wait for the price to pull back to a support level (e.g., a moving average or trendline). Enter when the price shows signs of resuming the trend.

Example Trade

Let’s say EUR/USD is in an uptrend. On the 4-hour chart, the price pulls back to the 50-day MA. A bullish candlestick signals the continuation of the trend. You place a buy order, setting a stop-loss below the recent swing low. As the price resumes its uptrend, you take profit at the next resistance level.


2. Breakout Trading Strategy

Breakout Trading Strategy
forexcracked.com

Breakouts occur when the price moves out of a defined range, often leading to significant price momentum. This strategy capitalizes on these moves, making it ideal for volatile markets.

Why Breakouts Happen

Breakouts are driven by increased market interest, often triggered by economic data releases or major geopolitical events. When prices breach support or resistance, they attract traders who further fuel the momentum.

Steps to Implement a Breakout Strategy

  1. Identify Consolidation Zones: Look for areas where prices are moving sideways, forming a tight range.
  2. Draw Support and Resistance Levels: Mark the high (resistance) and low (support) of the range.
  3. Wait for a Breakout: A valid breakout requires a strong candlestick closing above resistance (for bullish moves) or below support (for bearish moves).
  4. Confirm the Breakout: Use volume indicators. A spike in trading volume validates the breakout.
  5. Plan Your Entry and Exit:
    • Enter on the breakout candle’s close.
    • Set your stop-loss just below the breakout level for bullish trades or above for bearish trades.
    • Measure the height of the consolidation range and use it to project your profit target.

Example Trade

GBP/USD consolidates between 1.3000 (resistance) and 1.2900 (support). After a strong economic report, the price breaks above 1.3000 with high volume. You enter a buy trade, setting your stop-loss at 1.2970 and your profit target at 1.3100.


3. Moving Average Crossover Strategy

Moving Average Crossover Strategy
forexcracked.com

Moving averages smooth out price data, making it easier to identify trends. A crossover strategy uses two moving averages of different lengths to generate buy and sell signals.

Why Moving Averages Work

Moving averages reflect the average price over a specific period. By comparing a short-term average with a long-term one, traders can spot changes in momentum.

Executing the Crossover Strategy

  1. Choose Two Moving Averages:
    • A fast-moving average (e.g., 10-period EMA) reacts quickly to price changes.
    • A slow-moving average (e.g., 50-period EMA) smooths out noise.
  2. Look for Crossovers:
    • Bullish Crossover: The short-term MA crosses above the long-term MA, signaling an uptrend.
    • Bearish Crossover: The short-term MA crosses below the long-term MA, signaling a downtrend.
  3. Combine with Trend Filters: Use RSI or MACD to ensure trades align with the broader trend.
  4. Set Risk Management Rules: Place stop-losses at recent swing lows/highs. Use trailing stops to lock in profits.

Example Trade

On USD/JPY, the 10-day EMA crosses above the 50-day EMA, confirming an uptrend. You enter a buy trade and set your stop-loss below the recent swing low. As the price rises, you adjust your stop-loss to protect profits.


4. Support and Resistance Strategy

Support and Resistance Strategy
forexcracked.com

Support and resistance levels are critical in forex trading as they represent areas where prices often reverse or consolidate. This strategy involves trading around these levels to capitalize on price reversals or breakouts.

Understanding Support and Resistance

  • Support: A price level where buying pressure prevents further declines.
  • Resistance: A price level where selling pressure prevents further rises.

How to Trade Support and Resistance

  1. Mark Key Levels: Use historical data to identify recurring support and resistance levels on higher timeframes.
  2. Wait for Price Action Confirmation:
    • Bullish signals at support: Hammer candlesticks, bullish engulfing patterns.
    • Bearish signals at resistance: Shooting star, bearish engulfing patterns.
  3. Set Stop-Loss and Take-Profit:
    • Place stop-loss orders slightly beyond the level.
    • Use the next support or resistance level as your profit target.

Example Trade

AUD/USD approaches a support level at 0.6500. A bullish hammer forms, signaling a reversal. You enter a buy trade with a stop-loss below 0.6480 and a profit target at the next resistance of 0.6600.


5. RSI Divergence Strategy

RSI Divergence Strategy
forexcracked.com

The RSI (Relative Strength Index) divergence strategy helps traders identify potential reversals by comparing price action with the RSI indicator.

What is RSI Divergence?

  • Bullish Divergence: Price makes lower lows, but RSI makes higher lows, signaling weakening selling pressure.
  • Bearish Divergence: Price makes higher highs, but RSI makes lower highs, signaling weakening buying pressure.

Steps to Trade RSI Divergence

  1. Identify Divergence:
    • Spot discrepancies between price action and RSI movements.
    • Use higher timeframes for more reliable signals.
  2. Combine with Key Levels: Look for divergence near support or resistance zones to enhance accuracy.
  3. Enter the Trade:
    • Buy when bullish divergence forms at support.
    • Sell when bearish divergence forms at resistance.
  4. Set Risk Management Rules:
    • Place stop-loss orders below/above the divergence point.
    • Use the next support/resistance level for profit targets.

Example Trade

USD/CHF shows a bullish divergence near a support level of 0.9000. You enter a buy trade with a stop-loss at 0.8980 and a profit target at 0.9100.


Additional Tips for Success

  1. Understand Risk Management: Always risk no more than 1-2% of your trading capital per trade.
  2. Stick to One Strategy at a Time: Master one strategy before experimenting with others.
  3. Track Your Performance: Maintain a trading journal to analyze your trades and improve.
  4. Stay Informed: Keep an eye on economic events that could impact your trades.
  5. 5 Best Indicators for Your Trading [FREE Downloads]

By diving deeper into each strategy and understanding its meaning, you can confidently implement these techniques in your trading journey. Remember, success in forex requires patience, discipline, and a commitment to continuous learning. Start with a demo account to practice these strategies before transitioning to live trading.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/5-simple-forex-strategies-for-beginners/feed/ 0 157187
FRAMA and Support and Resistance MT5 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/frama-support-and-resistance-mt5-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/frama-support-and-resistance-mt5-strategy/#respond Wed, 27 Nov 2024 16:42:18 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=157249 If you’ve been in the forex game for a while, you know that two things matter the most: understanding where the market might turn and knowing how to ride a trend when it takes off. That’s where the FRAMA and Support and Resistance MT5 Strategy comes in. It’s simple but effective, combining a dynamic moving average (FRAMA) with tried-and-true support and resistance levels to help you make confident trading decisions.

Let me break it down for you.

What is FRAMA?

The Fractal Adaptive Moving Average (FRAMA) is like a moving average on steroids. It adapts to market conditions, meaning it becomes more responsive during volatile trends and steadier during quieter periods. This is huge because it helps you avoid lag and stay closer to what the market is doing.

Here’s how it works in practice:

  • Upward slope: Signals an uptrend.
  • Downward slope: Signals a downtrend.

Unlike a simple moving average that sticks to fixed periods, FRAMA adjusts itself based on market price action. This makes it perfect for identifying when a trend is gaining or losing strength.

What About Support and Resistance?

Support and resistance are a main part of any good trading strategy. These are psychological levels where the price tends to stall or reverse:

  • Support: A level where buyers step in and stop the price from falling.
  • Resistance: A level where sellers step in and prevent the price from rising.

By combining these levels with FRAMA, you can identify not only where the market is likely to react but also how strong that reaction might be.

Why Use These Together?

The beauty of combining FRAMA with support and resistance is that you’re getting two layers of confirmation:

  1. FRAMA tells you if the market is trending or consolidating.
  2. Support and Resistance MT5 tells you where the price is likely to react.

This setup helps you time your entries better and avoid getting caught in false breakouts.

Frama and Support and Resistance mt5 Forex Trading Strategy

How to Trade the Strategy

Let’s walk through the steps for both buy and sell setups.

Buy Setup (Going Long)

  1. Find a Support Level: Look for a key level where the price has previously bounced. This is your first clue that buyers might be waiting there.
  2. Check FRAMA: Make sure FRAMA is sloping upward. This confirms the market is in an uptrend and aligns with the potential bounce off support.
  3. Wait for the Price to Approach Support: Don’t rush in. Let the price move closer to the support level.
  4. Look for Bullish Confirmation: Watch for bullish candlestick patterns like a pin bar or engulfing pattern near the support level. This is your green light.
  5. Enter the Trade: Place your buy trade once all the conditions align.
  6. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just below the support level or the recent swing low. This keeps your risk small.
  7. Take Profit: Aim for the next resistance level or use a trailing stop to lock in profits as the price moves up.

Sell Setup (Going Short)

  1. Find a Resistance Level: Look for a key level where the price has previously reversed or stalled. This will act as your line in the sand.
  2. Check FRAMA: Make sure FRAMA is sloping downward, confirming a downtrend.
  3. Wait for the Price to Approach Resistance: Again, patience is key. Let the price move closer to the resistance level.
  4. Look for Bearish Confirmation: Watch for bearish candlestick patterns like a shooting star or bearish engulfing pattern near the resistance level.
  5. Enter the Trade: Enter your sell trade when everything lines up.
  6. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just above the resistance level or recent swing high.
  7. Take Profit: Target the next support level or use a trailing stop to capture additional profits if the price keeps dropping.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

This strategy works because it combines two powerful tools:

  1. FRAMA adapts to changing market conditions, giving you a dynamic view of the trend.
  2. Support and Resistance provide clear levels to watch for potential reversals or breakouts.

By layering these tools, you’re not just guessing—you’re making decisions based on what the market is telling you.

Tips for Success

  1. Stick to Key Levels: Not all support and resistance levels are equal. Focus on those that have been tested multiple times.
  2. Trade Active Sessions: Use this strategy during the London and New York sessions when volatility is higher.
  3. Avoid Overtrading: Wait for all the conditions to align. If something feels off, skip the trade.
  4. Use a Demo Account First: Test this strategy on a demo account before putting real money on the line.

Free Download FRAMA and Support and Resistance MT5 Strategy

Read More Best Currency Correlation Forex Indicator mt4 Free Download

Final Thoughts

The FRAMA and Support and Resistance MT5 Strategy is perfect if you’re looking for a reliable, straightforward approach to trading forex. By combining a dynamic moving average with key price levels, you can make more informed decisions and improve your trade timing.

Give it a try on your MT5 platform and tweak it to suit your trading style. Just remember, no strategy is foolproof, so always manage your risk and stay disciplined.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/frama-support-and-resistance-mt5-strategy/feed/ 0 157249
Trend Arrows Sign and Daily Range Projections MT5 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-daily-range-mt5-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-daily-range-mt5-strategy/#respond Sun, 24 Nov 2024 17:03:30 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=156354 If you’ve been trading forex for any length of time, you know how critical it is to have a strategy that combines clear trend signals with a way to set realistic profit and risk levels. That’s exactly what the Trend Arrows Sign and Daily Range Projections Strategy brings to the table. It’s a simple yet effective way to trade with confidence, even in volatile markets.

Here’s how it works: the Trend Arrows Sign helps you identify market direction, while the Daily Range Projections give you a sense of how far price is likely to move in a day. Together, they help you find trades with solid potential while keeping your expectations grounded.

What’s the Trend Arrows Sign Indicator?

This indicator is all about clarity. On your MT5 chart, you’ll see arrows that point out the direction of the trend. It simplifies decision-making by showing whether the market is bullish (uptrend) or bearish (downtrend).

Here’s how you use it:

  • Bullish arrows: Indicate upward momentum—look for buy opportunities.
  • Bearish arrows: Signal downward momentum—look for sell opportunities.

What I like about this tool is how straightforward it is. No guesswork, just clear visual cues.

Trend Arrows Sign and Daily Range Projections mt5 Forex Trading Strategy

What’s the Daily Range Projections Indicator?

The Daily Range Projections Indicator takes a more predictive approach. It estimates the high and low price levels for the day based on historical data and current market conditions. These levels act like invisible boundaries, helping you figure out realistic take profit targets and where to set your stop-loss.

Key points:

  • If the daily range is wide, you can aim for big profits.
  • If it’s narrow, you’ll want to set tighter targets to avoid overreaching.

This is especially helpful because it keeps your trades aligned with the day’s volatility.

Why Combine These Two Indicators?

Using the Trend Arrows to spot opportunities and the Daily Range Projections to set your parameters is a powerful combo. The arrows show you where the market is heading, and the range projections make sure you’re not expecting too much—or too little—from the trade. It’s all about balance.

How to Use the Strategy

Let’s break it down into buy and sell setups so you can see how to apply this strategy on your MT5 platform.

Buy Setup (Going Long)

  1. Spot the Trend: Look for a bullish trend arrow on your chart. Ideally, you want to see consecutive arrows pointing upward or one that appears after a pullback.
  2. Confirm with Range Projections: Check the Daily Range Projections to ensure there’s enough volatility for price to move significantly. If the projected range is narrow, it might not be worth the trade.
  3. Enter the Trade: Enter a buy trade when the price closes above a key resistance level or moving average. The bullish arrow and price confirmation together signal it’s time to act.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just below the recent swing low or a key support level to limit your risk.
  5. Take-Profit Target: Aim for the upper boundary of the daily range projection or the next resistance level. If momentum is strong, you can adjust your target accordingly.

Sell Setup (Going Short)

  1. Spot the Trend: Look for a bearish trend arrow. Similar to the buy setup, consecutive bearish arrows or one appearing after a pullback are strong signals.
  2. Confirm with Range Projections: Ensure the Daily Range Projections indicate enough room for price to move lower. If the range is too tight, the trade might not be worth taking.
  3. Enter the Trade: Enter a sell trade when the price closes below a key support level or moving average. The bearish arrow confirms the downtrend.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just above the recent swing high or a key resistance level.
  5. Take-Profit Target: Target the lower boundary of the range projection or the next support level. Adjust your take-profit if the trend gains strength.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

  1. Simple Trend Identification: The Trend Arrows Sign keeps you focused on the market’s direction without overcomplicating things.
  2. Realistic Expectations: The Daily Range Projections ensure your targets and risk levels are aligned with the day’s potential price movement.
  3. Better Risk Management: Knowing the day’s range helps you avoid setting unrealistic stop-losses or take-profit levels, which can make or break your trades.

Tips for Success

  1. Trade Active Sessions: This strategy works best during the London and New York sessions when the market is most active.
  2. Avoid Overtrading: Not every arrow will lead to a winning trade. Be selective and wait for confirmation from both indicators.
  3. Watch the News: Major economic events can blow past daily range projections, so always check the calendar before placing a trade.
  4. Use a Demo Account First: If this is your first time using these indicators, test the strategy on a demo account to get comfortable.

Free Download Trend Arrows Sign and Daily Range Projections

Read More Volatility Quality Zero Line Forex Indicator For MT4 Free Download

Wrapping It Up

The Trend Arrows Sign and Daily Range Projections Strategy is a balanced approach that keeps things simple while giving you the tools to trade with confidence. The trend arrows point you in the right direction, while the daily range projections ensure your expectations match what the market can realistically deliver.

Try it out on MT5, and tweak it to fit your trading style. Remember, no strategy guarantees success every time, but with discipline and proper risk management, this one can give you a solid edge.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-daily-range-mt5-strategy/feed/ 0 156354
Xmaster Formula and Silver Trend Signal MT5 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/xmaster-formula-mt5-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/xmaster-formula-mt5-strategy/#respond Thu, 21 Nov 2024 17:51:45 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=156246 If you’ve been trading forex for a while, you know how important it is to have a strategy that doesn’t just point out opportunities but also confirms them. That’s where the Xmaster Formula and Silver Trend Signal Strategy shines. It’s a simple setup that helps you to find market trends and confirm entries, making your trading decisions more precise and confident.

This trend strategy is for forex traders who want to combine technical analysis with simple signals. Let’s dive into how these two forex indicators work together and how you can use them effectively.

What’s the Xmaster Formula MT5 Indicator?

The Xmaster Formula is a versatile indicator that pulls together various technical tools—like moving averages and oscillators—to give you clear buy or sell signals. It simplifies what could otherwise be a messy chart by providing straightforward visual cues:

  • Green signals mean the market is trending up, and it’s time to look for a buy.
  • Red signals suggest a downtrend, so you’d focus on selling.

What I like about the Xmaster Formula is its ability to adapt to different market conditions. It helps you spot trends early while filtering out a lot of the false signals that can mess with your trades.

Xmaster Formula and Silver Trend Signal Forex Trading Strategy

What’s the Silver Trend Signal Indicator?

The Silver Trend Signal is your backup. It confirms what the Xmaster Formula is telling you, acting as a second layer of validation. This indicator uses a unique algorithm to highlight trend strength and direction, showing clear arrows for potential entries.

  • Green arrows confirm bullish momentum.
  • Red arrows validate bearish trends.

It’s especially handy because it filters out market noise, helping you avoid whipsaws in choppy conditions.

Why Use These Two Together?

The beauty of combining the Xmaster Formula and Silver Trend Signal is that they complement each other. While the Xmaster Formula identifies opportunities, the Silver Trend Signal gives you the confidence to pull the trigger by confirming the trend. Together, they reduce the guesswork and make trading decisions feel more calculated.

How to Use This Strategy

Here’s how to set up and execute trades using the Xmaster Formula and Silver Trend Signal on MT5.

Buy Setup (When to Go Long)

  1. Xmaster Formula Signal: Wait for the Xmaster Formula to turn green. You should also see a green arrow below the price, indicating bullish momentum.
  2. Silver Trend Confirmation: Check that the Silver Trend Signal shows a green arrow and a blue dot below the price candle. This confirms the trend and strengthens your buy setup.
  3. Enter the Trade: Place your buy trade when these signals align. This is your green light to go long.
  4. Stop-Loss: Set your stop-loss below the recent swing low or just below the blue dot from the Silver Trend Signal. This keeps your risk in check.
  5. Take-Profit: Aim for a target that’s 1.5 to 2 times your stop-loss distance, or close the trade when the Xmaster Formula turns red or a red arrow appears from the Silver Trend Signal.

Sell Setup (When to Go Short)

  1. Xmaster Formula Signal: Wait for the Xmaster Formula to turn red, accompanied by a red arrow above the price. This signals bearish momentum.
  2. Silver Trend Confirmation: Look for the Silver Trend Signal to confirm the sell setup with a red arrow and a red dot above the price candle.
  3. Enter the Trade: Place your sell trade when these signals align. This setup gives you the confidence to short the market.
  4. Stop-Loss: Set your stop-loss above the recent swing high or just above the red dot from the Silver Trend Signal.
  5. Take-Profit: Target a profit level that’s 1.5 to 2 times your stop-loss, or close the trade when the Xmaster Formula turns green or a green arrow appears from the Silver Trend Signal.

Why This Strategy Works

This strategy works because it combines two strong indicators that play to each other’s strengths:

  • The Xmaster Formula does the heavy lifting by spotting opportunities early.
  • The Silver Trend Signal acts as a second opinion, ensuring the trend is legitimate before you enter.

With both indicators working together, you’re less likely to jump into false moves, and you can trade with more confidence.

Tips for Success

  1. Stick to Active Market Hours: Use this strategy during the London or New York sessions when the market is most volatile. This increases the chances of catching strong trends.
  2. Avoid Overtrading: Not every signal will lead to a winning trade. Wait for the perfect alignment of the forex indicators before pulling the trigger.
  3. Watch for News: Big economic announcements can disrupt even the best setups. Check the calendar and avoid trading during high-impact news events.
  4. Test It First: Before going live, test this mt5 strategy on a mt5 demo account to get comfortable with how the indicators behave in different conditions.

Free Download Xmaster Formula and Silver Trend Signal MT5 Strategy

Read More Best Currency Correlation Forex Indicator mt4 Free Download

Wrapping It Up

The Xmaster Formula and Silver Trend Signal Strategy is an excellent choice for traders who want to simplify their decision-making process. By combining two powerful MT5 indicators, you get a system that not only identifies opportunities but also confirms them, reducing the chances of getting caught in false moves.

Try this setup on your MT5 platform, and don’t forget to adjust the risk and targets to suit your trading style. As always, stay disciplined, manage your risk, and trust the process.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/xmaster-formula-mt5-strategy/feed/ 0 156246
Trend Magic and Trigger Line MT5 Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt5-forex-trading-strategy-trend-magic-and-trigger-line/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt5-forex-trading-strategy-trend-magic-and-trigger-line/#respond Mon, 18 Nov 2024 18:04:57 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=156135 The Trend Magic and Trigger Line MT5 Forex Trading Strategy. It’s a simple approach that helps you spot market trends, validate setups, and make trades with more confidence. The combo of the Trend Magic Indicator and the Trigger Line gives you the tools to both follow trends and confirm opportunities, cutting down on second-guessing.

Let me walk you through how it works.

What’s the Trend Magic Indicator?

The Trend Magic Indicator is all about showing you where the trend is heading and how strong it is. Think of it as a more intelligent moving average. It reacts to price movements and volatility, which means it doesn’t just trail behind but adapts to the market.

Here’s how you use it:

  • Blue line = Uptrend: Time to look for buys.
  • Red line = Downtrend: Time to focus on sells.

What’s great is that it helps smooth out market noise, so you’re not chasing every little price move.

Trend Magic and Trigger Line Forex Trading Strategy

What’s the Trigger Line?

The Trigger Line is your confirmation tool. While the Trend Magic Indicator shows you the big picture, the Trigger Line validates potential trade setups. It’s great to find when momentum aligns with the market trend or when the market might be ready to reverse.

The Power of Combining These Indicators

Using these two together is where the magic happens. The Trend Magic gives you the overall direction, while the Trigger Line tells you when it’s safe to jump in. Together, they keep you trading in the right direction and reduce the chances of false entries.

Now let’s dive into how actually to use this strategy.

Buy Setup (When to Go Long)

  1. Spot the Trend: First, check the Trend Magic Indicator. If the line is blue, you’re in an uptrend. That’s your signal to start looking for a buy.
  2. Validate with the Trigger Line: Wait for the price to pull back slightly and cross above the Trigger Line. This tells you momentum is back in your favor.
  3. Enter the Trade: Place your buy order as soon as the price crosses the Trigger Line in the direction of the blue Trend Magic line.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss below the recent swing low or slightly under the Trend Magic line.
  5. Take Profit: Aim for the next significant resistance level or a risk-reward ratio of at least 1:2.

Sell Setup (When to Go Short)

  1. Spot the Trend: Check if the Trend Magic line is red. If it is, you’re in a downtrend, so start looking for sell opportunities.
  2. Validate with the Trigger Line: Wait for a slight pullback, then look for the price to cross below the Trigger Line. This confirms bearish momentum.
  3. Enter the Trade: Enter your sell order as soon as the price crosses the Trigger Line in the direction of the red Trend Magic line.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just above the recent swing high or slightly over the Trend Magic line.
  5. Take Profit: Target the next support level or stick to a 1:2 risk-reward ratio.

Why This Strategy Works

This strategy works because it’s simple and focused. You’re trading with the trend (Trend Magic) and only entering when momentum is on your side (Trigger Line). Here’s why it’s effective:

  • Clear Trend Direction: The Trend Magic Indicator keeps you aligned with the market’s direction, so you’re not fighting against the flow.
  • Validated Entries: sureTrigger Line indicates that you’re not jumping in too early or chasing moves that lack momentum.
  • Risk Management: With clear stop-loss(SL) and take-profit levels(TP), you manage risk while aiming for solid returns.

Tips to Maximize This Strategy

  1. Use the Right Timeframes: This strategy works on most, but it’s especially effective on 15-minute, 1-hour, and 4-hour charts. Scalpers might prefer lower timeframes, while swing traders can go higher.
  2. Trade Active Sessions: Stick to the London and New York sessions for the best results. These periods usually have the most volatility, on which this strategy thrives.
  3. Avoid News Volatility: Check the economic calendar before trading. Big news events can create spikes that throw off your setup.
  4. Combine with Support and Resistance: While the indicators are powerful, adding basic support and resistance levels can help you spot even better entry and exit points.

Free Download Trend Magic and Trigger Line MT5 Forex Trading Strategy

Read More FX Profitude Forex Indicator FREE Download

Wrapping It Up

The Trend Magic and Trigger Line MT5 Strategy is one of those approaches that just makes sense. It’s very simple, flexible, and works in different market conditions. Combining trend following with confirmation keeps you on the right side of the market while minimizing the risk of false entries.

Try this MT5 strategy on MT5 platform, and tweak it to suit your trading style. Just remember: no strategy is perfect, and risk management is key. Stay disciplined, stick to the plan, and let the market do the rest.

Good luck and happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt5-forex-trading-strategy-trend-magic-and-trigger-line/feed/ 0 156135
Profitable MACD Strategy Enhanced by ChatGPT Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/profitable-macd-strategy-enhanced-by-chatgpt-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/profitable-macd-strategy-enhanced-by-chatgpt-trading-strategy/#respond Sun, 17 Nov 2024 18:42:22 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=153493 The Moving Average Convergence Divergence (MACD) indicator is one of the most popular tools traders use to identify trends and potential reversals in the forex market. Combining the power of the MACD with an advanced AI tool like ChatGPT can lead to a profitable MACD strategy that enhances decision-making and maximizes returns. In this guide, we’ll cover the essential elements of the MACD indicator, how to integrate it with ChatGPT for deeper insights, and a step-by-step process for executing trades based on this ChatGPT Trading Strategy.

What is the MACD Indicator?

MACD Indicator
forexcracked.com

The MACD is a trend-following momentum indicator that shows the relationship between two moving averages of a security’s price. It consists of three components:

  1. MACD Line: This is calculated by subtracting the 26-period Exponential Moving Average (EMA) from the 12-period EMA. It shows the short-term price movements relative to longer-term movements.
  2. Signal Line: A 9-period EMA of the MACD line. This acts as a trigger for buy or sell signals.
  3. Histogram: The difference between the MACD line and the signal line. It visually represents the momentum of the price and helps detect trends.

The key signal generated by the MACD is when the MACD line crosses above or below the signal line.

Understanding MACD Signals

Before diving into the strategy, it’s important to understand the key signals the MACD generates:

MACD indicator Bullish Signal (Buy)
forexcracked.com
  • Bullish Signal (Buy) – When the MACD line crosses above the signal line, it indicates upward momentum, signaling a buy opportunity.
MACD indicator Bearish Signal (Sell)
forexcracked.com
  • Bearish Signal (Sell) – When the MACD line crosses below the signal line, it signals downward momentum, indicating a sell opportunity.
MACD indicator divergences
forexcracked.com
  • Divergences – MACD divergence occurs when the price moves in the opposite direction of the MACD, often indicating a potential reversal.
MACD indicator Zero Line Cross
forexcracked.com
  • Zero Line Cross – When the MACD line crosses the zero line, it suggests a trend reversal. If the MACD crosses from below to above the zero line, it’s a bullish signal; if it crosses from above to below, it’s a bearish signal.

Integrating ChatGPT into the MACD Strategy

ChatGPT can act as a powerful tool when combined with MACD-based strategies. Here’s how:

  • Data Analysis and Signal Confirmation – ChatGPT can be programmed to confirm MACD signals by analyzing fundamental data or cross-referencing with other technical indicators such as RSI, stochastic oscillators, or Bollinger Bands.
  • Trade Sentiment Analysis – ChatGPT can scan news articles, social media posts, and economic reports to assess overall market sentiment, helping traders decide if the MACD signals align with broader market trends.
  • Custom Alerts and Automation – With the right API integration, ChatGPT can monitor real-time charts and notify traders when certain conditions in the MACD strategy are met. For advanced traders, it can even automate entries and exits.

Step-by-Step Guide to ChatGPT Trading Strategy

Step 1: Set Up Your Chart and MACD Indicator

Before starting the ChatGPT trading strategy, you need to ensure your trading platform is set up correctly:

  1. Open your trading platform (e.g., MetaTrader, TradingView, or any other platform that supports MACD).
  2. Apply the MACD indicator to the chart. Use the default settings:
    • MACD Line: 12-period EMA minus 26-period EMA
    • Signal Line: 9-period EMA
    • Histogram: The difference between the MACD line and the signal line
  3. Set your chart time frame to 1-hour or 4-hour for short- to medium-term trades or daily for longer-term trades.

Step 2: Identify the Market Trend

The MACD strategy works best in trending markets. To filter out false signals, it’s essential first to determine the market’s overall trend. You can use the following methods:

trend identification with higher timeframes
forexcracked.com
  • Higher Time Frames – Check the daily or weekly chart to see if the currency pair is in a clear uptrend or downtrend.
Simple Moving Averages uptrend confirmation 
forexcracked.com
Simple Moving Averages downtrend confirmation
forexcracked.com

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

  • Simple Moving Averages – Add 50-day and 200-day moving averages to your chart. If the price is above both, it confirms an uptrend; if it’s below both, it confirms a downtrend.

Step 3: Look for MACD Crossovers

Once the trend is identified, you can move forward by analyzing the MACD for crossovers:

buy signal
forexcracked.com
  • Buy Signal – In an uptrend, wait for the MACD line to cross above the signal line while both lines are above the zero line. This crossover confirms bullish momentum, and you can prepare for a long entry.
Sell Signal
forexcracked.com
  • Sell Signal – In a downtrend, look for the MACD line to cross below the signal line while both are below the zero line. This suggests bearish momentum, signaling a short entry.

Step 4: Use the MACD Histogram to Gauge Momentum

The histogram can be used as an early warning signal for potential trend reversals:

MACD Increasing Histogram Bars
forexcracked.com
  • Increasing Histogram Bars – When the histogram bars grow taller, it means that the momentum is strengthening, so you can confidently enter the trade.
MACD Decreasing Histogram Bars
forexcracked.com
  • Decreasing Histogram Bars – If the bars start shrinking, the momentum is weakening, which can be a signal to exit the trade or tighten your stop-loss.

Step 5: Risk Management with Stop-Loss and Take-Profit Levels

No strategy is complete without proper risk management. Here’s how you can protect your capital when using the ChatGPT Trading Strategy:

Risk Management with Stop-Loss
forexcracked.com
  • Stop-Loss Placement – Place your stop-loss just below the recent swing low (for buy trades) or above the recent swing high (for sell trades).
  • Take-Profit Target – You can set take-profit levels based on key support/resistance zones, Fibonacci levels, or a fixed risk-reward ratio of 1:2 or higher.
  • Trailing Stops – As the trade moves in your favor, you can adjust your stop-loss to lock in profits. ChatGPT can automate this process by monitoring price movements.

Step 6: Use ChatGPT for Market Analysis and Confirmation

Now that you have identified a trade setup using the MACD, you can use ChatGPT to confirm your trade by:

  • Sentiment Analysis – Input market news into ChatGPT and ask it to summarize the sentiment surrounding the currency pair. If the sentiment aligns with your technical analysis, it strengthens the case for your trade.
  • Fundamental Data – ChatGPT can help you analyze upcoming economic events, central bank announcements, or geopolitical news that may affect your trade. For instance, if you’re trading EURUSD, check for any impending ECB policy changes.
  • Trend Confirmation with Additional Indicators – You can ask ChatGPT to analyze other technical indicators, such as RSI (Relative Strength Index) or stochastic oscillators, to verify that the MACD signal aligns with these tools.

Example Trade Using the ChatGPT MACD Forex Strategy

Let’s walk through a hypothetical trade on the EURUSD pair using this strategy:

  1. Market Context – EURUSD is in an uptrend on the daily chart.
  2. MACD Setup – On the 4-hour chart, the MACD line crosses above the signal line with both lines above the zero line. The histogram bars are growing, showing increasing bullish momentum.
  3. Entry Point – Place a buy order as soon as the MACD crossover is confirmed.
  4. Stop-Loss – Set your stop-loss just below the recent swing low, approximately 30 pips away.
  5. Take-Profit – Set your take-profit at twice the distance of your stop-loss (e.g., 60 pips) or at a key resistance level.
  6. ChatGPT Confirmation – Ask ChatGPT to analyze recent ECB news and check sentiment for EURUSD. If it’s bullish, proceed with the trade confidently.
  7. Trade Execution – As the price moves in your favor, monitor the MACD histogram and adjust your stop-loss accordingly.

Final Thoughts: Advantages of the ChatGPT MACD Forex Strategy

The integration of MACD and ChatGPT provides traders with a unique edge. Not only can the MACD identify precise technical signals, but ChatGPT can provide valuable insights by analyzing real-time data, market sentiment, and news events. This combination ensures that your trades are well-informed and backed by both technical and fundamental analysis.

Key Advantages:

  • Simple yet powerful trend-following system
  • Confirmation from multiple data sources using ChatGPT
  • Real-time trade alerts and sentiment analysis
  • Strong risk management tools

By using the MACD Strategy consistently, you’ll be able to spot profitable opportunities in the forex market while reducing the risk of false signals. Remember to backtest this ChatGPT Trading Strategy and fine-tune it according to your preferred currency pairs and time frames.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/profitable-macd-strategy-enhanced-by-chatgpt-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 153493
Custom High Low and Xmaster Formula MT5 Forex Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/custom-high-low-and-xmaster-formula-mt5-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/custom-high-low-and-xmaster-formula-mt5-forex-strategy/#respond Fri, 15 Nov 2024 17:49:39 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=156035 As forex traders, we’re always looking for that edge, which helps us get in at the right time and out before the market turns against us. The Custom High Low and Xmaster Formula Strategy is one of those setups that combines simple logic with powerful tools. It’s all about identifying key price levels and using reliable signals to time your trades. Let me walk you through how it works.

What’s the Deal with the Custom High Low Indicator?

This is your go-to tool for spotting support and resistance levels. Unlike standard indicators, the Custom High Low lets you adjust its timeframe to calculate the highest highs and lowest lows. This is great because you can set it up for short-term trades or zoom out for swing trades.

Here’s how you use it:

  • Support Levels: The price tends to bounce back up in these areas.
  • Resistance Levels: These are zones where the price often reverses and heads down.

It’s simple but effective. When the price gets close to these levels, that’s your first clue to start looking for a trade.

Custom High Low and Xmaster Formula Forex Forex Trading Strategy

The Xmaster Formula Indicator: A Signal You Can Trust

The Xmaster Formula does the heavy lifting. It combines technical indicators, moving averages, oscillators, trend lines, and clear buy-and-sell signals. It’s great for confirming momentum, which is key to solid trades.

What I like about the Xmaster Formula is how it simplifies everything. Instead of juggling so many indicators, you get a unified signal. Green for buy, red for sell. Easy.

How It All Comes Together

Now, let’s talk about how to use these tools together. The idea is to spot key levels with the Custom High Low Indicator and then wait for the Xmaster Formula to confirm the move. Here’s how to set it up for both buy and sell trades.

Buy Setup (Going Long)

  1. Find the Support Level: Watch for the Custom High Low Indicator to mark a significant support level. This is where the price has previously bounced.
  2. Wait for Confirmation: Check the Xmaster Formula. If it gives you a green signal, you’re looking at bullish momentum, exactly what you want.
  3. Enter the Trade: Enter your buy trade when the price breaks above the identified support level. This confirms that buyers are stepping in.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just below the recent low. If the trade doesn’t work out, this will protect you from big losses.
  5. Take Profit: Aim for the next resistance level or a 1:2 risk-reward ratio. For example, if your stop-loss is 20 pips, set your take-profit at 40 pips.

Sell Setup (Going Short)

  1. Find the Resistance Level: Use the Custom High Low Indicator to spot a strong resistance level—an area where the price has struggled to move higher.
  2. Look for Bearish Momentum: Wait for the Xmaster Formula to show a red signal. This tells you that sellers are in control.
  3. Enter the Trade: Jump into a sell trade when the price breaks below the resistance level. This confirms the downtrend.
  4. Set Your Stop-Loss: Place it just above the recent high. Again, this keeps your risk manageable.
  5. Take Profit: Target the next support level or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio, just like with the buy setup.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This Strategy Works

This setup works because it combines the strengths of two indicators:

  1. The Custom High Low Indicator pinpoints where the price will likely reverse or continue.
  2. The Xmaster Formula gives you the confidence to act with clear buy or sell signals.

By layering these tools, you reduce the guesswork and focus on high-probability trades.

Tips for Using This Strategy

  • Adjust Timeframes: If you’re scalping, stick to shorter timeframes, like 5 or 15 minutes. For swing trades, use 1-hour or 4-hour charts.
  • Check Market Sessions: This strategy works best during active sessions, such as when London or New York overlaps when there’s more volatility.
  • Avoid Trading Before Big News: Major announcements can mess up your setup. Always check the economic calendar before jumping in.

Free Download High Low and Xmaster Formula Strategy

Read More Rainbow Forex Indicator MT4 Free Download

Final Thoughts

The Custom High Low and Xmaster Formula Strategy is one of those setups that’s flexible and easy to adapt. Whether you’re a scalper or prefer holding trades for longer, you can tweak the indicators to fit your trading style. The best part? It gives you a simple way to approach trades without overcomplicating things.

Try this strategy on your MT5 platform and see how it works. Remember, stick to your plan, manage your risk, and don’t let emotions take over.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/custom-high-low-and-xmaster-formula-mt5-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 156035
MT5 Forex Strategy: Timing with Time Zones and Super Trend Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt5-forex-strategy-and-super-trend-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt5-forex-strategy-and-super-trend-strategy/#respond Fri, 08 Nov 2024 17:54:04 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=155851 If you’re in the forex game, you already know timing is crucial. But just trading when the market is “busy” isn’t always enough to make it profitable. This MT5 Forex strategy is all about combining the Super Trend Indicator with the right time zones, especially on MT5, to help you stay in tune with the market’s rhythm.

What’s the Super Trend Indicator?

The Super Trend Indicator is straightforward and doesn’t overcomplicate things. It draws a line on your chart that shifts based on the market’s trend. Here’s how to read it:

  • Price above the line means an uptrend, so you’re likely looking for a buying opportunity.
  • Price below the line means a downtrend, so you’re probably considering a sell.

It helps cut through a lot of the noise, showing you the main trend without all the choppiness. It’s simple, which is what makes it effective.

Time Zones and Super Trend Forex Trading Strategy mt5

Why Bother with Time Zones?

Forex runs around the clock, but not every hour has the same volume or movement. The biggest moves tend to happen during overlap periods, like when London and New York sessions are both open. During these times, you get more action—traders from major markets are all active, so prices tend to move more.

Putting It All Together: Super Trend + Time Zones

Using the Super Trend and being aware of time zones is a good way to catch trends with some momentum behind them. Here’s how you can set it up on MT5.

Buy Setup (When to Go Long)

  1. Check the Time Zone: Make sure it’s during a high-activity period, like the London-New York overlap. This is when price movements are usually strongest.
  2. Check the Trend: Look at the Super Trend line. If the price is above it, you’re in an uptrend. Now you’re looking for a buy setup.
  3. Enter on the Signal: Place a buy trade when price crosses above the Super Trend line during a busy session. This signal suggests the trend might keep moving up.
  4. Stop-Loss: Set your stop-loss just below the recent low or a bit below the Super Trend line. This way, if things go against you, you’re protected.
  5. Take Profit: Aim for at least twice what you’re risking, or set your target at a level where price might struggle.

Sell Setup (When to Go Short)

  1. Time Zone Check: Same as the buy setup—you want to trade during high-activity times. This usually means better price movement.
  2. Check for a Downtrend: If price is below the Super Trend line, you’re in a downtrend. Good time to think about selling.
  3. Enter on the Signal: Go for a sell trade when price crosses below the Super Trend line during a busy session. This often shows the downtrend has momentum.
  4. Stop-Loss: Place it above the recent high or just over the Super Trend line.
  5. Take Profit: Look for at least double your risk, or set your target at a level where price might bounce.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Why This MT5 Forex Strategy Works

This setup works because it combines trend direction with timing. The Super Trend line keeps you on the right side of the trend, and focusing on active trading hours means there’s more chance for the trade to go somewhere.

Some Tips

  1. Adjust for Volatility: Some pairs are more volatile than others, so you might need to tweak the Super Trend settings.
  2. Stick to Active Sessions: This method works best when there’s a lot of trading going on. If you trade during quiet times, it can lead to choppy or weak moves.
  3. Watch the News: Big news can mess up even the best setups. Check what’s on the calendar and avoid jumping in before major announcements.

Free Download Super Trend MT5 Forex Strategy

Read More Fibot Fibonacci EA FREE Download

Final Thoughts

Combining the Super Trend Indicator with high-activity times on MT5 Forex Strategy can give you a solid approach to trading forex. You’re sticking with the trend, and you’re only trading when there’s enough volume to back it up. Try it out and see how it works with your style—just keep managing your risk, and don’t expect every trade to be a winner.

Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/mt5-forex-strategy-and-super-trend-strategy/feed/ 0 155851
Super Signals and SSL Channel Chart MT5 Forex Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/super-signals-and-ssl-channel-chart-mt5-forex-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/super-signals-and-ssl-channel-chart-mt5-forex-scalping-strategy/#respond Tue, 05 Nov 2024 18:22:42 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=155229 The Super Signals and SSL Channel Chart MT5 Forex Scalping Strategy is a high probability approach designed for quick entries and exits. This strategy combines the Super Signals Indicator with the SSL Channel Chart on the MT5 platform, providing a straightforward way to catch short-term trends and capitalize on market movements. This setup is ideal for Forex traders who prefer scalping and trend based strategies, especially during high volume trading sessions like the London or New York sessions.

How the MT5 Strategy Works

The strategy uses the Super Signals Indicator to generate buy and sell alerts based on price movements. These indicator signals simplify entry points, making it easy for Forex traders to react without excessive analysis. The SSL Channel Chart indicator complements this by showing market trend direction and volatility through an upper and lower channel. Together, they help confirm whether the trend is strong or if a reversal might occur. This combination of indicators on MT5 allows traders to approach scalping with confidence and precision.

MT5 Indicator Setup

Required MT5 Indicators:

  • Super Signals Indicator: Marks buy and sell signals based on significant price movements.
  • SSL Channel Chart: Defines a range around price action to help identify trend strength and potential reversals.

Best Timeframe:

  • 15-minute timeframe for optimal signal accuracy in scalping.

Best Currency Pairs:

  • Major pairs like EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY, due to their high liquidity and tighter spreads are essential for effective scalping.
Super Signals and SSL Channel Chart MT5 Forex Scalping Strategy

Entry and Exit Rules for MT5 Strategy

Buy Entry

  1. Super Signals Indicator: Wait for a buy signal to appear on the chart.
  2. SSL Channel Chart: Confirm that the price is trading within or above the SSL Channel, signaling a bullish trend.
  3. Trade Entry: Enter a buy trade when both the Super Signals Indicator and SSL Channel Chart show a strong bullish setup.
  4. Stop-Loss: Place the stop-loss just below the recent swing low or at the lower boundary of the SSL Channel to control potential risk.
  5. Take-Profit: Set the take-profit at a significant resistance level or use a 1:2 risk-reward ratio.

Sell Entry

  1. Super Signals Indicator: Look for a sell signal on the chart.
  2. SSL Channel Chart: Verify that the price is trading within or below the SSL Channel, confirming a bearish trend.
  3. Trade Entry: Enter a sell trade when both indicators align in a bearish setup.
  4. Stop-Loss: Set the stop-loss above the recent swing high or at the upper boundary of the SSL Channel to limit losses.
  5. Take-Profit: Aim for a significant support level as your take-profit or apply a 1:2 risk-reward ratio.

Example of a Trade Using the MT5 Strategy

Assume it’s the New York session on a GBP/USD 15-minute chart:

  1. A blue arrow appears from the Super Signals Indicator, indicating a buy.
  2. The price is trading near the upper SSL Channel, suggesting a bullish trend.
  3. Enter a buy trade at this point, set a stop-loss below the lower boundary of the SSL Channel, and aim for a take-profit at a recent resistance.

This setup ensures a high-probability trade entry based on both trend strength and timing.

Why This MT5 Strategy Works

The Super Signals Indicator offers simple buy and sell alerts. The SSL Channel Chart provides the broader trend perspective, helping to verify the validity of these signals. This combination is particularly effective on MT5, where advanced charting and high-speed order execution aid in maximizing trade efficiency.

Pro Tips for MT5 Scalping Success

  1. Stick to High-Volume Sessions: Use this strategy during high-liquidity periods, such as the London or New York sessions, when there’s more price movement.
  2. Strictly Follow the Signals: Avoid entering trades when the indicators aren’t aligned to minimize false signals.
  3. Apply Consistent Risk Management: Set firm stop-losses and take-profits and ensure that trades align with the strategy’s risk reward goals.

Free Download Super Signals and SSL Channel Chart MT5 Forex Scalping Strategy

Read More Wolf Waves Scanner Forex Indicator MT4 Free Download

Conclusion

The Super Signals and SSL Channel Chart MT5 Forex Scalping Strategy is very good for scalpers aiming for precision and simplicity. Using MT5’s advanced tools, the forex strategy leverages clear buy-sell signals from the Super Signals mt5 Indicator and confirms trends with the SSL Channel Chart indicator, providing an optimal setup for short-term trading. This strategy not only improves entry accuracy but also enables traders to confidently trade during high-volume sessions, making it highly valuable for scalping on the MT5 platform.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/super-signals-and-ssl-channel-chart-mt5-forex-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 155229
Super Signal Channel Forex Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/super-signal-channel-forex-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/super-signal-channel-forex-scalping-strategy/#respond Fri, 01 Nov 2024 17:40:03 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=155074 The Super Signal Channel Forex Scalping Strategy is used with 15-minute timeframe, mainly for major currency pairs. It uses multiple indicators to find entry and exit points in the Forex market, relying on momentum and trend signals. This scalp trading strategy uses repainting forex indicators to provide scalping trade entries within short market moves, aiming for quick, small profits.

Strategy Overview and Indicators

The Scalp strategy uses the following indicators for identifying entry and exit points:

  1. Super Signals Channel Indicator: The primary trend identifier. It provides blue arrows for buy signals and red arrows for sell signals.
  2. ArZZx2 Indicator: works as a trend confirmation tool, displaying green arrows for support in uptrends and red arrows for resistance in downtrends.
  3. Awesome Oscillator: Used to gauge market momentum, with blue bars indicating bullish momentum and red bars indicating bearish momentum.
  4. Parabolic SAR (0.03, 0.2): Assesses trend direction. A position below the price signals an uptrend, while a position above the price indicates a downtrend.
  5. Goldminer 2 Indicator: Confirms the overall trend, with blue bars for bullish conditions and red bars for bearish conditions.
Super Signal Channel Forex Scalping Strategy

Trade Setup and Rules

Long Entry (Buy) Setup

  1. Super Signals Channel Indicator shows a blue arrow, indicating a buy signal.
  2. ArZZx2 Indicator displays a green arrow, signaling support.
  3. Parabolic SAR is positioned below the price, indicating an upward trend.
  4. Awesome Oscillator is showing blue bars, which supports bullish momentum.
  5. Goldminer 2 Indicator displays blue bars, confirming the trend direction.

Once these conditions are met, enter a buy position, as this setup confirms a bullish trend with momentum in the upward direction.

Short Entry (Sell) Setup

  1. Super Signals Channel Indicator shows a red arrow, indicating a sell signal.
  2. ArZZx2 Indicator displays a red arrow, signaling resistance.
  3. Parabolic SAR is positioned above the price, indicating a downtrend.
  4. Awesome Oscillator is showing red bars, supporting bearish momentum.
  5. Goldminer 2 Indicator displays red bars, confirming the trend direction.

Once these conditions match, open a sell trade, as this setup indicates a bearish trend with momentum in the downward direction.

Exit Strategy

  • Parabolic SAR Change: Exit the open trade when the indicator changes direction, signaling a trend reversal.
  • Take Profit Option: Consider taking profits quickly when reaching a modest pip target for scalping.
  • Stop Loss: Set the stop loss 3 pips above the upper channel line (for a sell) or 3 pips below the lower channel line (for a buy) to limit downside risk.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Example of a Buy Trade with the Super Signal Channel Forex Scalping Strategy

Consider a EUR/USD 15-minute chart where:

  1. The Super Signals Channel Indicator displays a blue arrow.
  2. The ArZZx2 Indicator confirms the support with a green arrow.
  3. The Parabolic SAR is below the price.
  4. The Awesome Oscillator has blue bars.
  5. The Goldminer 2 Indicator shows blue bars.

With these confirmations, you can open a buy trade, with the stop loss set at 3 pips below the channel.

Example of a Sell Trade with the Super Signal Channel Forex Scalping Strategy

Using a GBP/USD 15-minute chart where:

  1. The Super Signals Channel Indicator displays a red arrow.
  2. The ArZZx2 Indicator confirms resistance with a red arrow.
  3. The Parabolic SAR is above the price.
  4. The Awesome Oscillator has red bars.
  5. The Goldminer 2 Indicator shows red bars.

With these Conditions You can Open a buy trade, with SL placed 3 pips above the channel.

Free Download Super Signal Channel Forex Scalping Strategy

Read More Trend Squeezer Forex System MT4 FREE Download

Strategy Conclusion

The Super Signal Channel Forex Scalping Strategy is profitable for traders looking fast entries and exits based on trend and momentum indicators. While the repainting nature of some indicators used in this strategy may lead to some difficulties, it remains a powerful tool for scalping during periods of high market liquidity. This strategy works best when used during the active hours of the major trading sessions, making it very good for traders aiming to capture short bursts of price movement within a short timeframe.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/super-signal-channel-forex-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 155074
The New York Session Forex Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-new-york-session-forex-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-new-york-session-forex-scalping-strategy/#respond Thu, 31 Oct 2024 07:17:37 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=154989 The New York Session Forex Scalping Strategy is a momentum-based scalping method focused on capturing short bursts of price movement during the high liquidity of the New York trading session. We use This forex scalping strategy for the EUR/USD and GBP/USD forex currency pairs in a 5-minute timeframe. We incorporate a mix of exponential moving averages (EMAs) and forex momentum indicators to confirm trend direction and entry points.

Strategy Overview and Indicators

During the New York session, this Forex scalping strategy leverages many indicators to find trends, momentum, and market direction, making it easy for forex traders to make precise entry and exit decisions. Here’s a full detail of the indicators and their roles:

  • Heiken Ashi: Helps visualize price trends and eliminates small price fluctuations, making it easier to identify clear trends.
  • 5-Period EMA: A fast-moving average for short-term trend direction.
  • 10-Period EMA: Used with the 5-period EMA to confirm crossover signals.
  • EMA Crossover Signal (4, 8): Provides a visual alert when short-term EMAs cross over, indicating potential trend shifts.
  • MACD (9, 26, 9): A classic momentum indicator to confirm trend strength.
  • Stochastic Oscillator (10, 3, 3): Identifies overbought and oversold levels for potential reversals.
  • Relative Strength Index (RSI, 9): Measures overall market strength to validate buy or sell conditions.
The New York Session Forex Scalping Strategy

Trade Setup and Rules

Long Entry (Buy) Setup

  1. Trend Confirmation with Heiken Ashi: The Heiken Ashi candles must be green, indicating bullish momentum.
  2. Stochastic Oscillator: Look for an upward crossover in the Stochastic Oscillator, showing oversold conditions and a market uptrend.
  3. Relative Strength Index (RSI): The RSI should be above 50, showing overall market strength.

Once these conditions match, enter a buy trade, indicating that the price momentum favors an upward move during the New York session.

Short Entry (Sell) Setup

  1. Trend Confirmation with Heiken Ashi: The Heiken Ashi candles must be red, suggesting bearish momentum.
  2. Stochastic Oscillator: Look for a downward crossover within the forex Stochastic Oscillator, showing an overbought condition and a downtrend.
  3. Relative Strength Index (RSI): The RSI should be below 50, confirming market weakness.

When these conditions align, enter a sell order, positioning the trade for a short-term decline.

Exit Strategy

  • Take Profit and Stop Loss: Set the stop loss just below the previous swing low (for long entries) or above the previous swing high (for short entries) to manage risk.
  • Exit Signal: Close the trade at the appearance of an opposite arrow or upon reaching a quick take-profit target.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Example of a Buy Trade Using the New York Session Strategy

Consider a EUR/USD 5-minute chart during the New York session:

  1. Heiken Ashi candles turn green, showing a bullish move.
  2. The stochastic Oscillator crosses upward, showing an oversold condition.
  3. The RSI rises above 50, indicating market strength.

With these signals, a buy trade is executed, and the stop loss is placed just below the recent swing low. The trade is exited when a quick take-profit target is reached or if a sell signal appears.

Example of a Sell Trade Using the New York Session Strategy

Using a GBP/USD 5-minute chart during the New York session:

  1. Heiken Ashi candles turn red, indicating a bearish trend.
  2. The stochastic Oscillator crosses downward, showing overbought conditions.
  3. The RSI drops below 50, signaling market weakness.

A sell trade is taken, with the stop loss positioned above the previous swing high. The trade is exited once the profit target is hit or a buy signal appears.

Free Download New York Session Forex Scalping Strategy

Read More Trend Squeezer Forex System MT4 FREE Download

Conclusion

The New York Session Forex Scalping Strategy is designed for quick entries and exits during periods of high liquidity. Mixing multiple momentum indicators and trend filters enhances precision in determining trade entries, especially during the volatile New York trading session. This strategy offers a balanced approach to scalping for both beginner and intermediate traders looking to capitalize on short-term price movements in the forex market.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-new-york-session-forex-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 154989
The King Forex MT4 Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-king-forex-mt4-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-king-forex-mt4-scalping-strategy/#respond Sun, 27 Oct 2024 18:41:29 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=154899 The King Forex MT4 Scalping Strategy is a trend breakout trading system designed for intraday forex scalping. It combines several indicators to identify trend direction, breakout levels, and precise entry and exit points. This system is optimized for trading on a 15-minute timeframe and is best applied to specific currency pairs, including GBP/USD (GU), GBP/JPY (GJ), EUR/USD (EU), AUD/USD (AU), and USD/CHF (UCHF).

Key Components of the Strategy

This strategy utilizes a combination of indicators to confirm trade setups:

  1. Heiken Ashi Candles: These are used to smooth out market noise and identify trend direction.
  2. 2 MA Crossover: Identifies short-term momentum and trend shifts.
  3. King Trend Signal: An indicator that provides buy/sell arrows when a trend shift is detected.
  4. 5 Moving Average Smoothed High/Low (SMA): This forms a channel known as the SMA 5 Tunnel, which indicates the current trend’s direction.
  5. King’s Cage Indicator: The primary indicator used to identify breakout zones.
  6. QQE Alert: Provides an alert based on the crossovers of values to confirm momentum.
  7. King’s Trend Detector: Detects the primary trend direction.
  8. RCS Fibo Indicator: Identifies Fibonacci levels for profit targets.
The King Forex Scalping Strategy mt4

How to Set Up the Indicators For Scalping Strategy

  • Heiken Ashi: Add this to the chart to smooth out candlestick patterns and easily identify uptrends (green) and downtrends (red).
  • 2 MA Crossover: Add the 2 MA crossover to identify buy/sell arrows based on short-term momentum changes.
  • King Trend Signal: Look for the arrows that signal a potential buy or sell.
  • SMA 5 Tunnel: Plot two smoothed moving averages to create the channel for trend direction.
  • King’s Cage Indicator: This serves as the main filter for breakouts and should be configured to detect price breakouts.
  • QQE Alert: Set this to alert when the values cross to confirm momentum.
  • King’s Trend Detector: Helps verify whether the overall market is trending up or down.
  • RCS Fibo Indicator: Used to set profit targets based on Fibonacci levels.

Long Entry Setup (Buy)

  1. Breakout Confirmation: Ensure the price breaks upward through the breakout filter zone established by the King’s Cage Indicator.
  2. Trend Direction: The King’s Trend Detector must confirm an uptrend.
  3. Entry Arrow: Wait for a buy arrow (generated by the 2 MA Crossover or King’s Trend Signal).
  4. Heiken Ashi Confirmation: The Heiken Ashi bar must turn green and close above the SMA 5 Tunnel.
  5. SMA Tunnel Direction: The SMA 5 Tunnel should be trending up.
  6. QQE Alert: QQE alert value 1 should cross QQE alert value 3 from below, confirming upward momentum.

Once all conditions are met, place a buy order.

Short Entry Setup (Sell)

  1. Breakout Confirmation: Ensure the price breaks downward through the breakout filter zone established by the King’s Cage Indicator.
  2. Trend Direction: The King’s Trend Detector must confirm a downtrend.
  3. Entry Arrow: Wait for a sell arrow (generated by the 2 MA Crossover or King’s Trend Signal).
  4. Heiken Ashi Confirmation: The Heiken Ashi bar must turn red and close below the SMA 5 Tunnel.
  5. SMA Tunnel Direction: The SMA 5 Tunnel should be trending down.
  6. QQE Alert: QQE alert value 1 should cross QQE alert value 3 from above, confirming downward momentum.

Once all conditions are met, place a sell order.

Exit Strategy Of Scalping Strategy

  1. Stop Loss: Place an initial stop loss of 15-20 pips.
  2. Take Profit: Set the take profit at an RCS Fibo Level or aim for a target of 12-15 pips to maintain a 1:1 risk-to-reward ratio.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Example of a Long Trade Setup

Let’s consider the GBP/USD on a 15-minute chart. The price breaks above the King’s Cage breakout filter zone, signaling a potential bullish breakout. The King’s Trend Detector confirms the uptrend, and a buy arrow appears. The Heiken Ashi bar turns green and closes above the SMA 5 Tunnel, also trending up. The QQE alert shows a cross from below, confirming the bullish momentum. All conditions are met, so you place a buy trade with a 15-pip stop loss and a 15-pip take profit target.

Example of a Short Trade Setup

Now, consider the USD/CHF on the 15-minute chart. The price breaks below the King’s Cage breakout filter zone, signaling a potential bearish breakout. The King’s Trend Detector confirms the downtrend, and a sell arrow appears. The Heiken Ashi bar turns red and closes below the SMA 5 Tunnel, trending down. The QQE alert shows a cross from above, confirming the bearish momentum. All conditions are met, so you place a sell trade with a 20-pip stop loss and a 15-pip take profit target.

Free Download King Forex MT4 Scalping Strategy

Read More Rainbow Forex Indicator MT4 Free Download

Conclusion

The King Forex MT4 Scalping Strategy is an effective trend breakout scalping system that combines multiple indicators for accurate entry and exit signals. It’s optimized for intraday trading on a 15-minute timeframe and is suitable for pairs like GBP/USD, GBP/JPY, EUR/USD, AUD/USD, and USD/CHF. With clear buy and sell conditions, this MT4 scalping strategy is ideal for traders looking to capitalize on short-term market movements.

By following the rules strictly and maintaining proper risk management, you can effectively utilize this strategy to achieve consistent profits. Always test the MT4 Scalping strategy on a demo account before using it on a live account, and adjust settings based on market conditions for optimal performance.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-king-forex-mt4-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 154899
Elliott Wave Oscillator Trend Reversal MT5 Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/elliott-wave-oscillator-trend-reversal-mt5-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/elliott-wave-oscillator-trend-reversal-mt5-strategy-free-download/#respond Sat, 26 Oct 2024 16:18:01 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=153433 This Trend Reversal Strategy is a powerful approach for identifying market reversals. This MT5 strategy is designed to help traders spot potential trend shifts using the Elliott Wave Oscillator (EWO) and the Highest High – Lowest Low SR indicators. While seasoned traders often rely on price action and patterns to detect reversals, these technical indicators offer a more objective way to confirm market movements, making it an ideal strategy for both novice and experienced traders.

By combining these two indicators, the strategy aligns with the fundamental principles of price action, offering a systematic and reliable method for identifying trend reversals in real time.

Indicators Used in This MT5 Strategy

Elliott Wave Oscillator (EWO)

The Elliott Wave Oscillator is a momentum indicator developed from the Elliott Wave Theory. The EWO tracks price movements using two moving averages: the 5-period and the 34-period Simple Moving Averages (SMA). The difference between these two averages is displayed as a histogram. When the 5-period SMA moves above the 34-period SMA, the EWO plots positive values, and when it falls below, the EWO plots negative values.

The EWO also highlights the strength of trends. Lime bars indicate increasing bullish momentum, while green bars show weakening bullish momentum. Red bars suggest growing bearish strength, and maroon bars signal a weakening bearish trend. A dashed line, based on the moving average of the EWO bars, acts as a signal line for trend confirmation.

Highest High – Lowest Low SR Indicator

The Highest High – Lowest Low SR Indicator assists in identifying support and resistance levels based on recent price extremes. It analyzes the highs and lows over a specified period to determine the highest highs and lowest lows, plotting these as dotted lines on the chart. Additionally, the indicator shades areas between these levels to indicate potential trend direction:

  • Bullish Trend: Areas shaded in yellow and green when the price breaks above a resistance level.
  • Bearish Trend: Areas shaded in violet and pink when the price drops below a support level.
MT5 Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

This MT5 Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

This Elliott Wave Oscillator Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Trend Reversal Strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for this Trend Reversal Strategy

When using this trend reversal strategy, remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High-Impact News Releases or avoid trading for at least 15 minutes before and after these events.

As always, proper money management is key to achieving good results. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

The Elliott Wave Oscillator MT5 strategy combines both indicators to detect and confirm trend reversals:

  • The Highest High – Lowest Low SR indicator first identifies the reversal point by tracking breakouts above resistance or breakdowns below support.
  • The EWO then confirms the reversal by assessing momentum and trend strength.

Buy Conditions

  • A bullish momentum candle must close above a significant resistance level identified by the Highest High – Lowest Low SR indicator.
  • The Elliott Wave Oscillator should plot a lime bar, indicating bullish momentum, with the bar positioned above its signal line.

Sell Conditions

  • A bearish momentum candle should close below a major support level identified by the Highest High – Lowest Low SR indicator.
  • The Elliott Wave Oscillator must plot a red bar, indicating bearish momentum, below its signal line.

Exiting Conditions

For both buy and sell trades:

  • Set the stop loss just above or below the resistance or support level identified by the Highest High – Lowest Low SR indicator.
  • Use a trailing stop loss, moving it one or two support/resistance levels behind price action, locking in profits as the trend develops.

Forum(Mirror Download)

Conclusion

This Trend Reversal Strategy offers a systematic approach to identifying and trading market reversals by combining momentum analysis with support and resistance levels. By using the Elliott Wave Oscillator for momentum confirmation and the Highest High – Lowest Low SR Indicator for key price levels, traders can make more informed decisions that align with fundamental price action concepts. As with any trading MT5 strategy, practicing proper risk management and perhaps testing the approach on a demo account before applying it to live markets is essential.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/elliott-wave-oscillator-trend-reversal-mt5-strategy-free-download/feed/ 0 153433
Future Prediction Forex Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/future-prediction-forex-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/future-prediction-forex-scalping-strategy/#respond Thu, 24 Oct 2024 17:47:23 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=153608 The Future Prediction Forex Scalping Strategy is designed to help traders make quick profits by leveraging short-term price movements in the forex market. This strategy uses the Forex Prediction Indicator for trade confirmation and trend direction, making it practical for scalping. The system works best on the 5-minute and 15-minute timeframes and can be applied to any currency pair, ensuring flexibility and adaptability across different markets.

Key Components of the Strategy

This strategy combines the following indicators to identify and confirm entries in the direction of the trend:

  1. Exponential Moving Averages (EMAs):
    • 10 EMA (open)
    • 30 EMA (open)
    • 50 EMA (open)
  2. BrianTrend 2sig: This indicator helps identify the potential buy or sell signals using arrows that signify a possible trend reversal or continuation.
  3. Forex Prediction Indicator: This is the core of the Prediction Forex Scalping strategy. The Forex Prediction Indicator acts as a probability meter, confirming the market trend and the likelihood of a successful trade. It analyzes past price action and predicts future price direction based on moving averages.
Future Prediction Forex Scalping Strategy

Timeframes and Currency Pairs

  • Timeframes: 5-minute and 15-minute charts.
  • Currency Pairs: This strategy is versatile and can be applied to any currency pair. For the best results, choose pairs that are liquid and have tight spreads.

How to Set Up the Indicators

  1. Exponential Moving Averages (EMAs):
    • Add the 10 EMA, 30 EMA, and 50 EMA to your chart.
    • These EMAs help determine the current market trend. The 10 EMA represents short-term price action, while the 30 EMA and 50 EMA represent medium- and long-term price trends.
  2. BrianTrend 2sig:
    • Add this indicator to your chart. It will display arrows (buy or sell) to help you identify potential market entry points.
  3. Forex Prediction Indicator:
    • This will provide a probability reading for market direction. Use this as a confirmation tool for the overall trend before entering trades.

Buy Entry Setup

  1. Brian Trend Arrow: Look for a buy arrow from the BrianTrend 2sig indicator.
  2. EMA Confirmation: Ensure that the 10 EMA is above both the 30 EMA and the 50 EMA, confirming a bullish trend.
  3. Forex Prediction: The Forex Prediction Indicator should confirm the uptrend by showing the likelihood of further upward movement.

Once all these conditions are met, place a buy trade.

Sell Entry Setup

  1. Brian Trend Arrow: Look for a sell arrow from the BrianTrend 2sig indicator.
  2. EMA Confirmation: Ensure that the 10 EMA is below both the 30 EMA and the 50 EMA, confirming a bearish trend.
  3. Forex Prediction: The Forex Prediction Indicator should confirm the downtrend by showing the probability of further downward movement.

Once all these conditions are met, place a sell trade.

Exit Strategy

There are two methods to exit trades:

  1. Pivot Daily Levels: Exit the trade at a key pivot level, which acts as a natural support or resistance level.
  2. Profit Target: Predetermine your take-profit level based on the market’s volatility or a fixed number of pips.

Stop Loss

  • Place the initial stop loss at 15-25 pips away from your entry point to manage risk.
  • Alternatively, use recent swing lows (for buys) or swing highs (for sells) as the stop loss.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Example of a Buy Trade Setup

In the EUR/USD 15-minute chart, if the BrianTrend 2sig indicator shows a buy arrow, it signals a potential long entry. The 10 EMA has crossed above both the 30 EMA and the 50 EMA, confirming an uptrend. The Forex Prediction Indicator also confirms the uptrend, suggesting further price movement in your favor. Enter the buy trade and place the stop loss 15 pips below the recent low. Exit at the next pivot level or predetermined profit target.

Example of a Sell Trade Setup

In the EUR/USD 15-minute chart, if the BrianTrend 2sig indicator shows a sell arrow, it signals a potential short entry. The 10 EMA has crossed below the 30 EMA and the 50 EMA, confirming a downtrend. The Forex Prediction Indicator also confirms the downtrend. Enter the sell trade and place the stop loss 20 pips above the recent high. Exit at the next pivot level or predetermined profit target.

Free Download Future Prediction Forex Scalping Strategy

Read More Hedge MT4 Scalper EA FREE Download

Conclusion

The Future Prediction Forex Scalping Strategy provides a structured way to trade short-term price movements in Forex using a combination of moving averages, trend arrows, and the Forex Prediction Indicator. By confirming the trend direction with multiple indicators, this Forex Scalping strategy minimizes false signals and increases the chances of success. It’s a simple yet powerful strategy for traders looking to scalp the markets for quick, small profits.

Remember always to use proper risk management and adjust your trade size according to your capital.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/future-prediction-forex-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 153608
Simple Pin Bar Forex Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-pin-bar-forex-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-pin-bar-forex-scalping-strategy/#respond Mon, 21 Oct 2024 17:42:15 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=153447 Scalping is a fast-paced, highly rewarding trading style that involves capitalizing on tiny price movements throughout the day. However, it requires a sharp focus, quick decision-making, and strict discipline. The Simple Pin Bar Forex Scalping Strategy is designed to take advantage of these small fluctuations by using one of the most reliable reversal patterns in trading—the Pin Bar.

In this article, we’ll explain how the Pin Bar pattern works, how to trade it in a short timeframe, and how to use this Forex Scalping strategy to scalp the Forex markets effectively.

What is a Pin Bar?

A Pin Bar is a candlestick pattern with a long wick and a small body. The long wick indicates a rejection of price in one direction, while the small body shows minimal price movement from open to close. The Pin Bar is a strong signal of potential trend reversals because it shows the market’s sharp rejection of prices.

Pin Bar Forex Scalping Strategy

Pin Bars provide a great opportunity for quick trades by identifying potential reversal points for scalping. Here’s what a typical Pin Bar looks like:

  • Bullish Pin Bar: A small body near the top of the candle with a long lower wick, indicating that sellers pushed the price down, but buyers quickly regained control.
  • Bearish Pin Bar: A small body near the bottom of the candle with a long upper wick, indicating that buyers pushed the price up, but sellers regained control.

Read More Pinbar Detector Forex Indicator Free Download

Time Frame

Since we are scalping, we will focus on the 5-minute timeframe. This timeframe provides enough volatility and trading opportunities without being too fast, which is crucial for those not using algorithmic trading systems.

Entry Rules

To trade the Pin Bar effectively, follow these simple rules:

  1. Look for Pin Bars at Trend Reversal Points: They signal a potential reversal, so look for them at the end of trends or in consolidation phases.
  2. Strict Pin Bar Identification: Only trade pin bars with wicks that are at least twice their body size. The body should be near the edge of the candle to qualify as a Pin Bar.
  3. Direction of the Pin Bar: Enter a buy trade if a bullish Pin Bar forms at the bottom of a downtrend. Enter a sell trade if a bearish Pin Bar forms at the top of an uptrend.

Stop Loss

Place your stop loss a few pips below the wick of the Pin Bar in a bullish trade or a few pips above the wick in a bearish trade. This ensures that your risk is minimized if the market moves against you.

Take Profit and Exit Strategy

Use recent fractals, higher highs, or lower lows as natural support and resistance levels for your Take Profit targets. If the market structure allows, you can also use multiple take-profit levels.

If you spot a reversal candle or other significant price action, you may close the trade to manually secure profits early.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Example of a Pin Bar Scalping Trade

Buy Trade Example

Simple Pin Bar Forex Scalping Strategy

On the EUR/USD chart, we spot a bullish Pin Bar at the bottom of a downtrend. The long lower wick suggests strong buyer rejection of lower prices, and the small body at the top confirms a potential reversal. We enter the trade at the close of the Pin Bar, setting the stop loss below the wick and targeting the next significant resistance level as the Take Profit.

Sell Trade Example

mt4 Simple Pin Bar Forex Scalping Strategy

Later, on the same chart, we identify a bearish Pin Bar at the top of an uptrend. The long upper wick indicates seller rejection of higher prices, and the small body near the bottom confirms a potential downward reversal. We enter a sell trade, placing the stop loss just above the wick of the Pin Bar and targeting the next support level as the take-profit.

Advantages of Pin Bar Forex Scalping Strategy

  1. Quick, High-Probability Entries: The Pin Bar is a strong reversal signal, allowing you to enter trades at the right time for quick profits.
  2. Small Stop Loss: With Pin Bar setups, you can use a very tight stop loss, allowing for higher position sizes and better risk-to-reward ratios.
  3. Multiple Trading Opportunities: Pin Bars appear frequently throughout the day, especially in volatile markets. This provides ample trading opportunities for scalpers.
  4. Simplicity: Pin Bar trading is relatively simple compared to more complex strategies, making it ideal for beginners and seasoned traders.

Conclusion

The Simple Pin Bar Forex Scalping Strategy offers traders a quick and effective way to profit from short-term price fluctuations. Pin Bars, with their easy-to-identify structure, are reliable reversal signals that work exceptionally well in the fast-paced world of scalping. When combined with proper risk management, a disciplined approach, and a sharp eye for reversal setups, this Forex Scalping strategy can help traders make consistent gains.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-pin-bar-forex-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 153447
TDI Bounce Forex Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-ea/tdi-bounce-forex-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-ea/tdi-bounce-forex-scalping-strategy/#respond Fri, 18 Oct 2024 17:47:55 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=153281 The TDI Bounce Forex Scalping Strategy leverages the Trader’s Dynamic Index (TDI), an all-in-one indicator that combines multiple technical tools, including the Bollinger Bands, RSI, and moving averages. The TDI Bounce strategy focuses on trading market reversals by observing how the RSI interacts with the moving average in the TDI window. This strategy helps traders capitalize on short-term price bounces, making it ideal for scalping.

Understanding the TDI Indicator Components

The TDI Indicator has several components:

  • Bollinger Bands (Blue and Yellow lines): Indicate market volatility and overbought/oversold conditions.
  • RSI (Green Line): Mimics price movement and helps identify potential market reversals.
  • Moving Average (Red Line): Represents the overall trend direction.

In the TDI Bounce Forex Scalping strategy, instead of waiting for all signals to align as in the traditional TDI strategy, we focus on the RSI line bouncing off the moving average, which indicates a continuation of the current trend after a minor pullback.

tdi scalping strategy

Trading Concept: RSI Bounce off the Moving Average

The RSI line often reflects price action movements and the moving average acts as a dynamic support or resistance level. Instead of waiting for a crossover between the RSI and the moving average, this strategy capitalizes on RSI bouncing off the moving average. The idea is to enter a trade after the RSI bounces back, confirming the direction of the trend.

tdi scalping strategy download

Buy Setup: Entry, Stop Loss, Exit

Entry:

  1. The RSI line (Green) must be above the moving average line (Red).
  2. After the RSI curls down, please wait for it to bounce back up without crossing the red line.
  3. Enter a buy trade as soon as the RSI points upwards again at the close of the candle.

Stop Loss:

  • Set the stop loss a few pips below the most recent minor swing low.

Exit:

  • Close the trade as soon as the RSI curls down again at the close of the candle.

Example Buy Trade

In the example shown, the RSI line crossed above the moving average, signaling a potential uptrend. After a brief downward curl, the RSI bounced back up, confirming the upward movement. The stop loss was set below the minor swing low, risking ten pips. The price rallied, and the trade was closed for a 61-pip profit, resulting in a 1:6 risk-reward ratio.

tdi forex scalping

Sell Setup: Entry, Stop Loss, Exit

Entry:

  1. The RSI line (Green) must be below the moving average line (Red).
  2. After curling up, wait for the RSI to bounce back down without crossing above the red line.
  3. Enter a sell trade when the RSI starts pointing downwards again at the close of the candle.

Stop Loss:

  • Place the stop loss a few pips above the most recent minor swing high.

Exit:

  • Close the trade when the RSI curls back up at the close of the candle.

Example Sell Trade

In this scenario, the RSI line stayed below the moving average, confirming a bearish trend. After briefly curling upward, it resumed its downward movement, confirming the sell signal. The stop loss was placed just above the previous swing high, risking 15 pips. The trade was exited at a 45-pip profit, achieving a 1:3 risk-reward ratio.

TDI Bounce Forex Scalping Strategy mt4

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Advantages of the TDI Bounce Forex Scalping Strategy

  • Early Trade Entries: The bounce setup allows for early trade entries without waiting for full crossovers, enabling traders to catch minor pullbacks within a trend.
  • Low Risk: This strategy minimizes risk by placing stop-loss orders near recent swing highs or lows, often with a high reward-to-risk ratio.
  • Responsive to Price Movements: The TDI’s RSI closely mirrors price action, helping traders respond quickly to shifts in market momentum.
  • Scalping Potential: This strategy is perfect for short-term scalping, allowing traders to profit from slight fluctuations in trending markets.

Limitations of the Strategy

  • Ineffective in Ranging Markets: This strategy works best in trending markets where price bounces off the moving average. The price might fluctuate too much in a ranging or sideways market, causing false signals.
  • Requires Discipline: Scalping strategies demand strict adherence to entry and exit points. Traders must monitor the market closely and be ready to act quickly.

Free Download TDI Bounce Scalping Forex Trading Strategy

Read More Best Scalping Forex Indicator MT4 Free Download

Conclusion

The TDI Bounce Forex Scalping Strategy is a powerful tool for traders looking to capitalize on minor retracements in trending markets. By focusing on the RSI’s bounce off the moving average, this strategy offers early entries into trades with minimal risk. It is best suited for scalping in high-volatility conditions. However, traders should be cautious when applying this strategy in sideways or ranging markets, as it may lead to false signals. This strategy is an excellent addition to any scalper’s toolkit, especially when combined with proper risk management.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-ea/tdi-bounce-forex-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 153281
20 Pips a Day Forex Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/20-pips-a-day-forex-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/20-pips-a-day-forex-scalping-strategy/#respond Tue, 15 Oct 2024 17:56:10 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=153036 Scalping in forex is often challenging, requiring precise timing and a reliable strategy. However, some simple strategies, when executed consistently, can yield impressive results. One such strategy is the 20 Pips a Day Forex Scalping Strategy, which focuses on major currency pairs like EUR/USD, GBP/USD, and USD/JPY. This strategy leverages the volatility of the London and New York sessions, aiming to make small, quick profits with a simple moving average crossover system.

The goal is to target 20 pips per trade, using a combination of a fast-moving average and a slow-moving average to signal trades. This Forex Scalping strategy’s beauty lies in its simplicity and mechanical nature—perfect for traders looking for a straightforward, repeatable system.

Trading Sessions and Pairs

  • Currency Pairs: EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY (due to their tight spreads and volatility)
  • Best Trading Sessions: London and New York sessions (avoid the Asian session, as it tends to have lower volatility)

Strategy Setup: Moving Average Crossover

This strategy relies on two moving averages:

  1. 5 Smoothed Moving Average (SMA)Orange Line: This fast-moving average represents short-term momentum in the market.
  2. 144 Weighted Moving Average (WMA)Magenta Line: This slow-moving average represents the broader market trend.

Buy Setup:

  • Entry Signal: When the 5 SMA (Orange) crosses above the 144 WMA (Magenta), it indicates a bullish momentum shift. Enter a buy trade as soon as the crossover occurs.
  • Stop Loss: Set the stop loss 15 pips below the entry price to protect against sudden market reversals.
  • Take Profit: Aim for 20 pips to take profit. When the trade reaches five pips in profit, move the stop loss to breakeven to eliminate risk.

Sell Setup:

  • Entry Signal: When the 5 SMA (Orange) crosses below the 144 WMA (Magenta), it signals a bearish trend. Enter a sell trade at the crossover point.
  • Stop Loss: Set the stop loss 15 pips above the entry price.
  • Take Profit: Target 20 pips to take profit and trail the stop loss to break even once the trade moves five pips in profit.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Example Trade Setups

Buy Example:

  1. The 5 SMA crosses above the 144 WMA, signaling a bullish trend.
  2. Place a buy order immediately after the crossover.
  3. Set the stop loss 15 pips below the entry point.
  4. Target 20 pips for the take profit.
  5. If the trade moves five pips in your favor, move the stop loss to breakeven to secure the position.
20 pip day forex strategy buy

Sell Example:

  1. The 5 SMA crosses below the 144 WMA, indicating a bearish market condition.
  2. Enter a sell trade following the crossover.
  3. Set the stop loss 15 pips above the entry price.
  4. Aim for a 20 pips take profit.
  5. Move the stop loss to breakeven once the trade reaches five pips in profit.
20 pips a day forex strategy sell

Risk Management and Profitability

This strategy relies on a 4:3 reward-to-risk ratio. With a 20-pipe take profit and a 15-pipe stop loss, traders lock in a favorable risk profile. The key to this strategy’s success is trailing the stop loss to breakeven as soon as the trade reaches five pips in profit, reducing the potential for losses and improving the win-loss ratio.

Although 20 pips may seem small, it’s achievable given the high volatility during the London and New York sessions. Moving the stop loss to breakeven early in the trade minimizes downside risk, even in less favorable conditions.

Free Download 20 Pips a Day Forex Scalping Strategy MT4 Template

Read More Forex Hedge Fund Strategy for FREE

Conclusion

The 20 Pips a Day Forex Scalping Strategy is effective for traders who prefer a mechanical and repeatable system. Unlike many other crossover strategies, this one emphasizes quick profits and limits risk with predefined stop loss and take profit levels. Targeting just 20 pips per trade provides an achievable daily goal, mainly when trading during the high-volatility London and New York sessions.

Additionally, the key to success lies in trailing the stop loss to breakeven once the trade moves five pips in profit, locking in the safety of the position while allowing for potential gains. While this strategy is simple, it can be tweaked based on personal preferences, such as adjusting the stop loss or taking profit levels to suit different market conditions.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/20-pips-a-day-forex-scalping-strategy/feed/ 0 153036
Profitable London Open Scalping Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/profitable-london-open-scalping-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/profitable-london-open-scalping-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Sat, 12 Oct 2024 18:48:57 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=152827 Scalping is known to be a challenging yet rewarding trading strategy. Some traders might say that scalping isn’t profitable due to its high costs, but it can yield quick and consistent profits with the right setup. The London Open Scalping Forex Trading Strategy is highly effective, capitalizing on the volatility and volume spike at the beginning of the London market session.

Scalping involves quick trades and short market movements, typically targeting just a few pips. One of the main challenges with scalping is overcoming the costs, such as broker spreads and commissions, which can significantly impact profits. Before attempting scalping, choosing a broker that offers low spreads and commissions is crucial, as this can make or break your profitability.

Read More Choosing the Best Forex Broker for Beginners

Key Elements of the Strategy

  1. Pin Bar Candlestick Pattern
    • The pin bar is one of the most reliable and effective candlestick patterns in forex trading. The pin bar is characterized by a long wick, a small body, and a very small wick on the opposite side. It often signals a potential market reversal.
    • When a pin bar forms, the market sentiment has quickly shifted. For example, if the market has been in an uptrend and suddenly a bearish pin bar appears, sellers have entered the market and reversed the gains, which could continue into the following candles.
  2. Stochastic Oscillator
    • The Stochastic Oscillator is a popular momentum indicator for identifying overbought and oversold market conditions. It prints two lines: a faster %K line and a slower %D line. When these lines cross, they signal potential buying or selling opportunities.
    • The stochastic oscillator also provides overbought (above 80) and oversold (below 20) levels, which are crucial for identifying market reversal points.

Read More

Stochastic X8 MT4 Indicator Free Download

Full Stochastic Forex Indicator MT4 Free Download – A Detailed Guide

Pin Bar Forex Trading Strategy

London Open Scalping Trading Strategy Concept

This mean reversion scalping strategy is best used during the first two hours of the London market opening when market volume and volatility surge. The Stochastic Oscillator filters trades based on overbought and oversold levels, while the Pin Bar Indicator helps identify precise entry points.

Indicators:

Buy (Long) Trade Setup

  1. Entry Criteria:
    • Both lines of the Stochastic Oscillator should be in the oversold area (below 20).
    • A bullish pin bar pattern should appear, signaling a reversal.
    • Enter a buy trade as soon as the bullish pin bar closes.
  2. Stop Loss:
    • Place the stop loss just below the pin bar candle.
  3. Exit Strategy:
    • Exit the trade when the stochastic oscillator reaches the opposite overbought zone or the market shows signs of reversal.
london open scalping strategy

Sell (Short) Trade Setup

  1. Entry Criteria:
    • Both lines of the Stochastic Oscillator should be in the overbought area (above 80).
    • A bearish pin bar pattern should appear, signaling a potential downward move.
    • Enter a sell trade as soon as the bearish pin bar closes.
  2. Stop Loss:
    • Place the stop loss just above the pin bar candle.
  3. Exit Strategy:
    • Close the trade when the stochastic oscillator reaches the opposite oversold zone or signs of a reversal occur.
london open strategy

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

London Open Scalping Strategy Example of Trade Setup

The image above shows a EUR/USD M1 chart where the stochastic oscillator enters the oversold zone, and a bullish pin bar appears. This setup signals a long trade with a stop loss below the pin bar. The trade can be exited when the stochastic reaches the overbought level or when the price shows signs of reversal.

Similarly, on a GBP/USD chart, if the stochastic is in the overbought zone and a bearish pin bar appears, it signals a short trade, with a stop loss above the pin bar and an exit when the stochastic reaches the oversold area.

Conclusion

The London Open Scalping Forex Trading Strategy is highly effective for traders looking to scalp the markets during the London session. The key to success with this strategy lies in identifying overbought and oversold conditions using the Stochastic Oscillator and confirming trade entries with the Pin Bar Indicator.

This strategy works well in the first two hours of the London Open when volatility is at its peak. It can also be adapted to the New York Open, though results may vary depending on market conditions. While it is primarily designed for the 1-minute chart, it can also be applied intraday if volatility remains high.

Scalping can be a profitable trading approach if executed with precision and discipline. This strategy provides a solid foundation for traders to capitalize on early market movements.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/profitable-london-open-scalping-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 152827
Thunder Force MT4 Forex System FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/thunder-force-mt4-forex-system-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/thunder-force-mt4-forex-system-free-download/#comments Fri, 11 Oct 2024 15:06:21 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=152795 The Thunder Force System is a trend-based trading tool developed to assist traders in identifying potential buying and selling opportunities in the foreign exchange market. With its intuitive, color-coded signals, it simplifies market analysis, making it suitable for both beginners and experienced traders alike.

Overview of this MT4 Forex System

This MT4 Forex System operates on a straightforward visual approach, using indicators that make it easy for traders to spot market trends. The main feature of the Thunder Force Forex system is its use of candlesticks as signal indicators. These candlesticks reflect the market’s primary trend, allowing traders to react accordingly.

The system consists of three key indicators:

  1. ThunderMain – This is the core signal indicator. It combines several technical tools, such as Moving Averages, RSI, and Support and Resistance levels, to provide an accurate analysis of market conditions and pinpoint buying and selling signals.
  2. Flash Volt – This auxiliary filter indicator enhances the system’s visual appeal by highlighting trends. While optional, it offers a cleaner, more attractive interface. The inclusion of the Heiken Ashi feature can sometimes be confusing, but it helps confirm trends visually.
  3. Metal Candles – Positioned as a lower multi-timeframe trend indicator, Metal Candles help traders by showing the direction of the trend on both current and higher timeframes. This provides a useful filter to confirm the market’s strength and potential direction before entering trades.

One of the standout features of the Thunder Force System is its accessibility. Due to its clear signals and uncomplicated interface, even those with no prior trading experience can easily understand and use this system. The system’s indicators are designed to be intuitive, making it suitable for short and medium term trading.

MT4 Forex System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Thunder Force System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set the Thunder Force System to send you a signal alert via email, Mobile Notification, or platform pop-ups. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

MT4 Forex System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts. But it works best on lower time frames.

Thunder Force Forex System offers a straightforward approach to Forex trading. Once you’ve set up the system on your Metatrader 4 chart, it will display the buy/sell signals in real-time, guiding you to make informed decisions.

The system provides three different signals:

  1. Signal BUY – This signal instructs you to buy the Forex pair now. It indicates that the system’s predictive algorithm has determined a likely increase in its value.
  2. Signal SELL – You should sell the Forex pair now upon receiving this signal. The algorithm has predicted a possible decrease in its value.
  3. Signal WAIT – The Wait signal indicates holding off any action and waiting for the next available signal. It essentially informs you that the system hasn’t detected a clear trading opportunity.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for Thunder Force System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High-Impact News Releases using this Thunder Force System or avoid trading for at least 15 minutes before and after these events.

As always, proper money management is key to achieving good results. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions, such as low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spreads, etc.

Buy

  • A green up arrow appears from the ThunderMain indicator, indicating a buy opportunity.
  • The Metal Candles confirm an uptrend across all four timeframes, displaying four green squares.

Sell

  • A red down arrow appears from the ThunderMain indicator, indicating a sell opportunity.
  • The Metal Candles confirm a downtrend across all four timeframes, showing four red squares.

Exit Strategy

For exits, it is recommended that you set your Stop Loss at the most recent price minimum or maximum. A general guideline is to place the Take Profit three times the size of the Stop Loss, though this can be adjusted depending on the timeframe and individual trading strategy.

Forum(Mirror Download)

Conclusion

The Thunder Force System has solid trading potential, particularly for those who prefer trend-based strategies. Its signals are well-timed and balanced, making it useful for various market conditions. The MT4 forex system can accommodate both beginners who appreciate its simplicity and more experienced traders who benefit from the comprehensive market analysis provided by its indicators.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/thunder-force-mt4-forex-system-free-download/feed/ 1 152795
Multi TimeFrame RSI Contrarian Strategy: Beginner’s Guide to Profitable Forex Trading https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/multi-time-frame-rsi-contrarian-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/multi-time-frame-rsi-contrarian-strategy/#respond Tue, 08 Oct 2024 18:01:24 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=152174 The foreign exchange (Forex) market is the largest and most liquid financial market globally, with a daily trading volume exceeding $6 trillion. Traders are constantly seeking strategies to gain an edge in this competitive environment. One such approach is the Multi-Time Frame RSI Contrarian Strategy. This strategy combines the RSI indicator across multiple time frames to identify potential reversals against the prevailing trend, offering contrarian traders a systematic method to capitalize on market inefficiencies.

Understanding the RSI Indicator

What is RSI?

Developed by J. Welles Wilder Jr., the Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a momentum oscillator that measures the speed and change of price movements. It oscillates between 0 and 100 and is primarily used to identify overbought and oversold conditions in the market.

  • Overbought: An RSI value above 70 suggests that the asset may be overbought.
  • Oversold: An RSI value below 30 indicates that the asset may be oversold.

Why Use RSI?

The RSI helps traders:

  • Identify Potential Reversals: Spotting overbought or oversold conditions can signal potential market reversals.
  • Confirm Trends: RSI can confirm the strength of a trend when it stays in overbought or oversold territories for extended periods.
  • Divergence Analysis: Discrepancies between price movements and RSI values can hint at weakening trends.

The Concept of Contrarian Trading

Contrarian trading involves going against prevailing market trends or sentiments. Contrarian traders believe that markets often overreact to news and that the majority can be wrong, especially at market extremes. By identifying these extremes, contrarian traders aim to enter positions just as the trend is about to reverse.

Understanding Multi-Time Frame Analysis

Multi-time frame analysis involves examining a currency pair across different time frames to gain a comprehensive understanding of its market behavior. This approach helps traders align short-term price movements with longer-term trends, providing better entry and exit opportunities. It also enhances the accuracy of trading signals by confirming market conditions across multiple time perspectives.

Why Use Multiple Time Frames?

Analyzing multiple time frames provides a broader perspective of the market:

  • Higher Time Frames: Offer a macro view, identifying major support and resistance levels and overarching trends.
  • Lower Time Frames: Provide detailed entry and exit points, capturing short-term price movements.

Benefits

  • Enhanced Accuracy: Confirms signals across different time frames, reducing false signals.
  • Better Timing: Aligns entries with both short-term and long-term market dynamics.
  • Risk Management: Identifies potential risks that may not be visible on a single time frame.

The Multi-Time Frame RSI Contrarian Strategy

Before we dive into the step-by-step implementation of the strategy, let’s first understand how it works. The best way to explain this is by sharing how I applied the strategy during my own experience. So, let’s get started!

Strategy Overview

This strategy works better on certain currency pairs than others, and it’s most effective during the main forex sessions like the US and EU sessions. Personally, I applied it during the US session and stopped trading for the day after midday, which means from 8 AM ET to 12 PM ET.

RSI overbought situation
forexcracked.com

I mainly used the EURUSD pair and worked with two timeframes: the 15-minute chart to spot overbought or oversold conditions and the 3-minute chart for entering and exiting positions. I also adjusted the RSI settings from the default, setting the oversold level to 35 (instead of 30) and the overbought level to 65 (instead of 70). When the RSI on the 15-minute chart reaches an overbought or oversold condition, I then look for a reversal signal on the 3-minute chart. Usually, the 3-minute RSI aligns with the 15-minute chart, but if not, you need to wait for the price to reach that level.

round number and resistance
forexcracked.com

I also paid close attention to price action, focusing on support and resistance levels, as well as candlestick patterns that signal reversals. Most reversals tend to happen around these key support and resistance areas.

Trading Signal, EURUSD RSI Trading Stratergy
forexcracked.com

I limited myself to just 2 trades per day, and often, one trade was all I needed. If you predict the market correctly, the price will usually move in your favor, and by the time your take-profit (TP) is hit, it’s often near the end of the trading session, close to 12 PM. However, sometimes the first setup might go against you and hit your stop loss, but the second trade typically recovers that loss and generates additional profit. This is why having positive expectancy is crucial. Occasionally, both trades for the day might go against you, and in that case, it’s important to stop trading for the day.

You can easily recover from such situations because the risk-to-reward ratio is usually 1:2 or higher. One good trade can make a significant difference. The key is to have a good batting average, meaning more winning trades than losing ones. It all comes down to mathematics and finding a balance where you can make consistent profits. This is where your effort comes in—you need to backtest, experiment, and find what works best for you. I can’t tell you exactly which method will work, as it’s all about testing and refining your approach.

One important point to mention is that when I tested this strategy, it performed well on days without high-volatility news & macroeconomic events, such as FOMC meetings, unemployment rate releases, monetary policy reports, and speeches from key officials. I made it a point to avoid trading on those days.

Step-by-Step Implementation

Now that you have a basic understanding of what this strategy is about, let’s dive into the step-by-step implementation of it.

First things first, you need to decide whether or not to trade on the day. To do this, check your favorite economic calendar and look for any potential news events that could impact your currency pair. If there are no high-impact events, you’re good to go and can proceed with trading for the day.

Entry Signal

entry signal RSI Trading Stratergy
forexcracked.com
3min chart position
forexcracked.com

After than you start for looking into entry signals, to do that after 8.00 AM, wait for the 15M RSI to reach either overbought or oversold condition, if its already in that zone, then move onto 3M chart and make sure its RSI also saying the same information, then look for a proper reversal candle stick signals, if you see one then enter a position.

Stop-Loss Signal

stop loss signal
forexcracked.com

I usually set my stop loss at around 15 pips. This is something you get better at with experience—you need to place your stop loss where it won’t be triggered by normal market volatility but will be activated if the market genuinely moves against you. It’s important to leave enough room for that. In my case, 15 pips worked best. If the stop loss goes above this range, the trade usually ends up being wrong, so I avoid that setup and wait for the next opportunity.

Once you’ve placed your stop loss, you need to quickly adjust your position size according to your risk tolerance. If you’re unsure how to size your trades properly, you can refer to helpful resources on position sizing.

Position sizing is the key reason why this strategy works, so you absolutely cannot ignore it. Properly adjusting your position size based on your risk tolerance ensures that you can manage losses effectively and maximize gains. It’s essential to stick to this principle, as it allows you to maintain consistency and protect your capital over time.

Take Profit Signal

Take profit signal
forexcracked.com

For take profit, I aim for a range of 20 to 30 pips, which usually aligns with the second support or resistance level along the way. I set a simple limit order to lock in profits. If the trade is still running after 12 PM and hasn’t hit either the stop loss or take profit, I manually close the trade—whether it’s in profit or not. This is crucial because sticking to my plan is more important than letting the trade run, as leaving it open beyond my set time has historically resulted in more losses than gains.

Trading Plan Implementation

This is your template for a trading plan. Adjust it according to your preferences, write it down, and make sure to follow it every time you trade:

STRATEGYMULTI TIME RSI CONTRARIAN
TRADING STYLEDAY TRADING
STRATEGY TYPEMEAN REVERSION
HOLDING PERIODFEW HOURS TO CURRENT SESSION END
ASSET SELECTIONLIQUID FX PAIRS
TIME FRAME15M / 1H / 4H / D
ENTRY SIGNALREVERSALS
ENTRY STYLESINGLE MARKET ENTRY
TAKE PROFIT SIGNALPRICE REACHING TARGET SUPPORT OR RESISTANCE LEVELS
TAKE PROFIT STYLESINGLE LIMIT ORDER
POSITION SIZINGSINGLE ENTRY 2% RISK
STOP LOSS2% RISK, NEAR SUPPORT/RESISTANCE
BAIL OUT INDICATORSSTONG FUNDAMENTAL NEWS

A trading strategy and a trading plan are different. A trading strategy covers the reasoning and details behind why a trade idea should work. On the other hand, a trading plan is a step-by-step guide that helps you decide what actions to take when applying the strategy.

Advantages of the Strategy

  • Higher Probability Trades: Combining RSI signals across multiple time frames filters out false signals.
  • Contrarian Edge: Capitalizes on market overreactions and inefficiencies.
  • Risk Management: Clear entry and exit points aid in effective risk management.

Potential Pitfalls and Considerations

  • False Signals: RSI can remain in overbought or oversold territories for extended periods in strong trends.
  • Lagging Indicator: RSI is based on historical data and may lag current price action.
  • Market Volatility: Sudden news events can disrupt technical signals.

Risk Mitigation

  • Stay Informed: Be aware of economic calendars and news events that may heavily impact the market, and avoid trading on those days.
  • Proper Position Sizing: Never risk more than a small percentage of your trading capital on a single trade. proper position sizing is a must for risk management.

Conclusion

The Multi-Time Frame RSI Contrarian Trading Strategy offers a structured approach to identifying potential market reversals in the Forex market. By analyzing RSI across different time frames and adopting a contrarian stance, traders can exploit overbought or oversold conditions more effectively. However, like all trading strategies, it requires discipline, proper risk management, and continuous practice to master.

Disclaimer

Trading Forex involves significant risk and may not be suitable for all investors. The information provided in this article is for educational purposes only and should not be considered financial advice. Always conduct your own research and consult with a licensed financial advisor before making any trading decisions.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/multi-time-frame-rsi-contrarian-strategy/feed/ 0 152174
Trend Reversal Binary Options Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/trend-reversal-binary-options-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/trend-reversal-binary-options-strategy-free-download/#comments Sat, 05 Oct 2024 18:14:31 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=152463 This Binary Options Strategy is a trend reversal strategy designed for Binary Options trading, but it can also be adapted for forex trading. This strategy is primarily based on price action and utilizes various forms of support and resistance to confirm trades.

The approach combines dynamic support and resistance levels, static support and resistance lines, and algorithmic confirmation to help traders make more informed decisions. While all three confirmations can be used simultaneously, the strategy generally recommends focusing on both dynamic and static support and resistance.

Key Components of this Binary Options Strategy

  1. Price Action Arrows – Arrows appear on the chart to indicate potential trading signals. The yellow arrow is the primary signal for entering a position.
  2. Support and Resistance Levels
    • Dynamic Support and Resistance These levels adjust based on price movement.
    • Static Support and Resistance – Pre-defined, fixed levels that do not change frequently.
  3. Algorithmic Confirmation – Adds an additional layer of validation to the trade setup, though it may be optional depending on the trader’s preference.

This Binary Options Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This Trend Reversal Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Binary Options Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set this Strategy to send you a signal alert. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This Binary Options Strategy can be used on any currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts. Works best on 1M TimeFrame.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for this Trend Reversal Strategy

When using the trend reversal strategy, remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High-Impact News Releases or avoid trading for at least 15 minutes before and after these events.

As always, proper money management is key to achieving good results. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

For binary options, the strategy works best on a 1-minute chart, with an expiration time of 5 candles. This means that after entering a position, traders should expect the trade to last approximately five minutes.

Call or Buy Signal

  • Yellow Arrow – A yellow arrow should appear on the chart, indicating a potential buy opportunity.
  • Candle Price Position – The price of the candle should be lower than the first band of the dynamic support and resistance.
  • Support Level – The price should rest on a support level, providing a confirmation to enter the trade. (green lines)

Put or Sell Signal

  • Yellow Arrow – A yellow arrow should appear, signaling a potential sell opportunity.
  • Candle Price Position – The price of the candle should be above the first band of the dynamic support and resistance.
  • Support Level – The price should also be near or on a support level. (red lines)

Exit Strategy

  • Stop Loss – The stop loss should be placed below the previous swing low for a buy trade or above the previous swing high for a sell trade.
  • Profit Target – A minimum risk-reward ratio of 1:1 is recommended. Alternatively, traders can aim to exit at the nearest support or resistance levels.

Forum(Mirror Download)

Conclusion

This Binary Options Strategy provides a structured approach for traders who want to capitalize on trend reversals in the binary options market. Traders can identify potential entry points by combining dynamic and static support and resistance with price action signals. While the strategy is suitable for binary options, certain elements, such as the directional indicators, might be more applicable to forex trading. Overall, this trend reversal strategy offers a clear framework for managing risk and setting up trades based on technical confirmations.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/trend-reversal-binary-options-strategy-free-download/feed/ 2 152463
Fibonacci Retracement Forex Strategy for Beginners https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/fibonacci-retracement-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/fibonacci-retracement-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Mon, 02 Sep 2024 14:07:35 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=145178 Forex traders widely use the Fibonacci retracement trading strategy to capitalize on market corrections within a trend. This strategy leverages the natural mathematical ratios found in the Fibonacci sequence to predict potential reversal levels, allowing traders to enter trades at optimal points during a trend’s retracement phase. Below is a detailed guide on how to apply a Fibonacci retracement-based trading strategy.

Understanding Fibonacci Retracement

Fibonacci Retracement
forexcracked.com

Fibonacci retracement is based on key levels derived from the Fibonacci sequence, which are plotted on a price chart to identify potential support and resistance levels. The most common retracement levels used in forex trading are 23.6%, 38.2%, 50%, 61.8%, and 100%. These levels represent the percentage of a price move that is expected to be retraced before the price continues in the original direction.

Drawing Fibonacci Levels

Drawing Fibonacci levels on a price chart is a straightforward process, but it requires careful identification of key points in the price movement, namely the swing highs and swing lows. Here’s a step-by-step guide on how to draw Fibonacci retracement levels:

Step 1: Identify the Trend

Before you draw Fibonacci levels, you need to determine the overall trend in the market. This can be done by analyzing the price action and using trend indicators such as moving averages or trend lines. The trend could be:

  • Uptrend: When the price is generally moving higher.
  • Downtrend: When the price is generally moving lower.

Step 2: Locate the Swing High and Swing Low

In an Uptrend:
Locate the Swing High and Swing Low uptrend
forexcracked.com
  • Swing Low: Identify the most recent significant low point where the price made a noticeable bottom before starting to move upward.
  • Swing High: Identify the most recent significant high point where the price peaked before starting to retrace or pull back.
In a Downtrend:
Locate the Swing High and Swing Low downtrend
forexcracked.com
  • Swing High: Identify the most recent significant high point where the price made a noticeable top before starting to move downward.
  • Swing Low: Identify the most recent significant low point where the price bottomed before starting to retrace or pull back.

Step 3: Select the Fibonacci Tool

Most trading platforms, including MetaTrader, TradingView, and others, have a built-in Fibonacci retracement tool. To access it:

  1. Open Your Chart: Ensure the chart is open for the asset you want to analyze.
  2. Choose the Fibonacci Tool: Look for the Fibonacci retracement tool in the toolbar. It might be under a section dedicated to drawing tools.

Step 4: Draw the Fibonacci Levels

For an Uptrend:
drawing fibonacci levels
forexcracked.com
  • Click on the Swing Low: Start by clicking on the swing low point where the price starts moving upward.
  • Drag to the Swing High: Drag the tool from the swing low to the swing high, where the price reached before starting to retrace.
  • Release to Draw Levels: Once you reach the swing high, release the mouse button. The Fibonacci retracement levels (23.6%, 38.2%, 50%, 61.8%, 78.6%) will automatically appear on your chart.
For a Downtrend:
drawing fibonacci levels
forexcracked.com
  • Click on the Swing High: Start by clicking on the swing high point where the price started the downward move.
  • Drag to the Swing Low: Drag the tool from the swing high to the swing low where the price reaches before starting to retrace.
  • Release to Draw Levels: Once you reach the swing low, release the mouse button. The Fibonacci retracement levels (23.6%, 38.2%, 50%, 61.8%, 78.6%) will automatically appear on your chart.

Step 5: Analyze the Fibonacci Levels

The drawn Fibonacci levels represent potential areas where the price might retrace before continuing in the direction of the trend. These levels can be used to identify potential entry points, stop-loss placements, and take-profit targets.

  • 23.6% Level: A shallow retracement, often indicating a very strong trend.
  • 38.2% Level: A moderate retracement level, commonly respected in strong trends.
  • 50% Level: Not an official Fibonacci level, but widely used. It indicates the halfway point of the retracement.
  • 61.8% Level: A deep retracement level, often seen as a last line of defense for the trend.
  • 78.6% Level: A very deep retracement, after which the trend is less likely to resume.

Tips for Effective Use

  • Use Multiple Time Frames: Check Fibonacci levels on multiple time frames to get a broader perspective on the potential retracement levels.
  • Practice: Practice drawing Fibonacci levels on historical price data to become proficient in identifying the correct swing highs and lows.

By following these steps, you can effectively draw and utilize Fibonacci retracement levels in your forex trading strategy, helping you identify key areas where the market might reverse or continue its trend.

Idea Behind Fibonacci Retracement Strategy

The core idea of the Fibonacci retracement strategy is to identify potential areas where the price might retrace before continuing in the direction of the underlying trend.

price trend
forexcracked.com
price pull backs and fibonacci retracement
forexcracked.com

Let me explain. When you look at the daily chart, you can see the current trend. If it’s trending up or down—not sideways—you can switch to smaller time frames like 1-hour, 15-minute, or even 3-minute charts. These show short-term price action behavior. A healthy trend needs pullbacks to continue, so if the overall trend is bullish and you see a reversal on the 15-minute chart, you can aim to profit from these movements.

How to Execute This Strategy?

How to Execute This Strategy? Entry level, Stop loss, take profit
forexcracked.com

Entry Signal:

To execute this strategy, we focus on taking advantage of pullbacks. When something is trending up, and you see the price starting to reverse on lower timeframes (like the 1-hour, 15-minute, or even 3-minute charts), you look for candlestick patterns at key price levels. These levels could be round numbers, previous support, or resistance areas. Once you identify these, draw the Fibonacci levels on the chart and enter a short position. You then wait for the price to retrace to these Fibonacci levels. A really strong trend will often retrace around the 0.236 level. If that level is broken, the price might rise to 0.382, 0.5, 0.618, and 0.786.

Stop Loss:

Once you enter the position, set your stop loss just above the last high where the price hasn’t reached before. This protects your trade in case the trend reverses against your position.

Take Profit:

You can use different strategies to take profit, but here’s how I do it: I take partial profits at each Fibonacci level. The retracement really depends on the trend and the asset. Some trends may remain strong for a while and then weaken, while others stay strong for a long time. I take small profits at each level instead of aiming for big wins to manage this. For each trade, I risk 2% of my capital. At the 0.236 Fibonacci level, I close 20% of the position. When the price reaches 0.382, I close another 20%, meaning 40% of the position is closed by this point. I continue this process with 60% at 0.5, 80% at 0.618, and finally 100% at 0.786.

Adjusting Stop Loss:

As the price breaks each level, I tighten the stop loss. For example, when the price reaches 0.236, I set the stop loss at the 0 Fibonacci level. If the price moves to the 0.5 Fibonacci level, I adjust the stop loss to 0.236. When the price reaches 0.618, I set the stop loss at 0.382. If it breaks below 0.618, I move the stop loss to the 0.5 Fibonacci level.

Same Approach for Downtrends:

This strategy applies the same principles in a downtrend, but instead of entering a short position, you take a long position. You follow the same process of identifying entry signals, setting stop losses, and taking profits based on Fibonacci retracement levels.

Trading Plan Implementation

STRATEGYFIBONACCI
TRADING STYLEDAY-TRADING
STRATEGY TYPEMEAN-REVERSION
HOLDING PERIODFEW HOURS(VARIES DEPENDS ON THE TRADER)
ASSET SELECTIONLIQUID FX PAIRS
TIME FRAME3M / 15M / 1H /
ENTRY SIGNALREVERSAL AROUND KEY LEVELS
ENTRY STYLESINGLE MARKET ENTRY
TAKE PROFIT SIGNALPRICE REACHING FIBONACCI LEVELS
TAKE PROFIT STYLEMULTIPLE LIMIT ORDER 20% EACH
POSITION SIZINGSINGLE ENTRY 2% RISK
STOP LOSS2% RISK, JUST ABOVE/BELOW THE REVERSAL
BAIL OUT INDICATORSSTONG FUNDAMENTAL NEWS

If you are unfamiliar with a trading plan and don’t know how to implement it correctly, consider reading that article.

Once you find the best setup for your strategy and plan, please write it down like shown above and follow it every time you trade. This is very important for your trading mindset.

Advantages of Fibonacci Retracement Strategy

  • Versatility: Fibonacci retracement can be applied to any time frame and any currency pair, making it a versatile tool for traders.
  • Improved Accuracy: By combining Fibonacci retracement with other technical analysis tools, traders can improve the accuracy of their trades and increase their chances of success.
  • Enhanced Risk Management: Fibonacci levels provide clear areas for setting stop losses and take profit levels, which helps manage risk effectively.
  • Identification of Key Levels: Fibonacci retracement levels highlight key areas of support and resistance, which are critical for making informed trading decisions.

Disadvantages Fibonacci Retracement Strategy

  • Subjectivity: The effectiveness of Fibonacci retracement depends on correctly identifying swing highs and lows, which can be subjective and vary between traders.
  • Lagging Indicator: Since Fibonacci retracement is based on historical price data, it is a lagging indicator and may not always accurately predict future price movements.
  • False Signals: Fibonacci retracement, like any technical analysis tool, can produce false signals, especially in volatile or choppy markets.

Conclusion

The Fibonacci retracement trading strategy is powerful for identifying potential reversal points in trending markets. By following the steps outlined above, traders can enter trades with a higher probability of success and manage risk more effectively. However, as with any trading strategy, combining Fibonacci retracement sound risk management practices is essential to achieve the best results.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/fibonacci-retracement-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 145178
JackPot Elite Strategy MT4 FREE Download [Update] https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/jackpot-elite-strategy-mt4-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/jackpot-elite-strategy-mt4-free-download/#comments Sun, 25 Aug 2024 18:04:35 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=92194 JackPot Elite Strategy is a Scalping Strategy MT4 that is free to download. When it comes to trading, many strategies employ a combination of multiple indicators to provide the trader with a clear picture of market conditions. One such strategy is the JackPot Elite Strategy. This unique approach uses an amalgamation of indicators, culminating in a non-repaint buy-sell arrow indicator that ensures a trader makes decisions based on solid technical grounds.

The most distinguishing feature of the JackPot Strategy is its non-repaint buy-sell arrow indicator. This ensures that once a trading signal is provided, it remains fixed and doesn’t change after the fact, giving traders confidence in their decisions.

Indicators Used in JackPot Elite

Bollinger Bands

Bollinger Bands provides information about price volatility. With a longer period setting, such as 200, the bands can offer insight into longer-term price movements and potential points of price reversals. When prices touch the upper band, it might signal overbought conditions, while touching the lower band might indicate oversold conditions.

Ichimoku Kinko Hyo

Commonly referred to as the Ichimoku Cloud, this indicator provides an all-in-one glance at support and resistance levels, momentum, and market direction. The various components of the Ichimoku can help traders identify potential breakout or breakdown scenarios.

Color Changing EMA 50 and 100

The Exponential Moving Average (EMA) is a popular tool for determining the general trend direction over a certain number of periods. The JPS Elite uses two EMAs: 50 and 100. The color change function adds an intuitive layer, allowing traders to quickly discern bullish from bearish conditions.

Market Open Price Indicator

This additional tool provides information on the market open price for various time frames: daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly. Understanding these opening prices clearly can help traders gauge momentum and set trade benchmarks.

This JackPot Elite Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

JPS Elite MT4 FREE Download ForexCracked.com

This JackPot Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

You can set the JackPot Elite Indicator to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification or platform pop-ups. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Strategy MT4 can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, But it works best lower TimeFrame.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for this Strategy MT4

While the Jackpot Elite Strategy is primarily technical, it’s wise to be aware of fundamental news events. High-impact news can significantly affect the market.

As always, proper money management is key to achieving good results. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy (Long) Trades

  • The arrow should be green, indicating a buy signal.
  • Price should touch or be near the bottom Bollinger band, hinting at potential upward movement.
  • The color-changing EMA 50 and EMA 100 should turn green, indicating bullish momentum. (Crossing of two EMAs is also a plus.)

Sell (Short) Rules

  • The arrow should be red, indicating a sell signal.
  • Price should touch or be near the top Bollinger band, hinting at potential downward movement.
  • The color-changing EMA 50 and EMA 100 should turn red, indicating bearish momentum. (Crossing of two EMAs is also a plus.)

Take Profit (TP) and Stop Loss (SL)

  • Take Profit: Depending on the trader’s risk-to-reward ratio, the TP can be set at a significant resistance (for buy trades) or support (for sell trades) level or at a specific number of pips for JPS Elite.
  • Stop Loss: Set the SL at the most recent swing low (for buy trades) or swing high (for sell trades). Another strategy is to use the Bollinger Bands as a reference point.

Exit Rules

  • An opposite arrow appears, signaling a potential change in trend or pullback.
  • Other technical indicators show signs of the opposite market sentiment (bearish/bullish)

Additional Notes

  • Always check higher timeframes for trend confirmation. It provides a broader trend context.
  • Never risk more than 1-2% of your trading capital on a single trade. It ensures longevity in the trading world.
  • Only trade when all your criteria are met. Patience is vital.

Updated on 2024/08/25

Forum(Mirror Download)

Conclusion

The JackPot Elite Strategy MT4 is a manual scalping method utilizing multiple indicators, including a consistent non-repaint buy-sell arrow. It combines tools like Bollinger Bands and the Ichimoku Cloud to provide clear trading signals. While versatile across assets and timeframes, its best performance is on lower timeframes. Traders are advised to consider market news, manage risk wisely, and remain disciplined for optimal outcomes.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/jackpot-elite-strategy-mt4-free-download/feed/ 16 92194 Forex strategies Archives - ForexCracked nonadult
Price Action Trend Following Swing Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/price-action-trend-following-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/price-action-trend-following-strategy/#respond Sun, 04 Aug 2024 19:27:17 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=143069 Swing trading in the Forex market revolves around capturing gains in a currency pair over a few days to several weeks. Trend following, one of the most popular swing trading strategies, involves identifying and following the prevailing market direction. This strategy capitalizes on the momentum of a trend until it shows signs of reversal.

Understanding Trend Following

trend following
forexcracked.com

Trend following is based on the principle that markets often move in trends. A trend is a consistent movement in a single direction—either upward (bullish) or downward (bearish). Trend followers aim to identify these trends early and ride them until there are indications of a reversal.

Idea Behind Forex Trend Following Strategy

The idea behind the trend-following strategy is simple: prices move in trends, and these trends last for a certain period. Our goal is to capitalize on these movements. There are three main types of trends: uptrend, downtrend, and sideways trend (also known as a ranging market). This strategy focuses on using both uptrends and downtrends.

support and resistance levels
forexcracked.com

Price changes direction at major support and resistance levels. Our job is to identify these levels and determine which trend the market is currently experiencing. If the price makes higher highs and higher lows, the market is in an uptrend. If the price makes lower lows and lower highs, the market is in a downtrend.

Understanding Breakout

breakout signal
forexcracked.com

A breakout indicates that the price will continue in the direction of that breakout. For example, if the price breaks above a resistance level, we can expect it to move to the next resistance level. Conversely, if the price breaks below a support level, we can expect it to move to the next support level.

Understanding Trend Length

trend lengths
forexcracked.com

There are three types of trends: long-term, medium-term within the long-term, and short-term within the medium-term. Our goal is to enter a position when all three trends are moving in the same direction. If all three show an uptrend, we can be more confident that the price will keep going up and is less likely to hit the stop loss.

Understanding Reversals

reversal signals
forexcracked.com

Reversals are usually seen through candlestick patterns around major support and resistance levels. When you see a reversal at these levels, and the price starts moving in that direction, it is more likely to continue. If the price breaks the previous support or resistance level in the same direction, we can confirm that the price is indeed moving in that direction. The more breakouts we have, the stronger the trend becomes.

Executing the Trading Strategy

reversal and breakout signals for trend following
forexcracked.com

Now that you know our entry signals are breakouts and reversals, you enter a position right after a proper breakout or reversal. Be cautious of false breakouts and reversals; sometimes, they are easy to spot, but other times, what looks like a proper signal can go against you. This is normal with the strategy. Your goal is to be right more often than wrong on average.

True vs False Breakouts

true breakout signal
forexcracked.com

For a true breakout, you want the breakout candle to be full or big and close below or above the broken support or resistance level. The next candle should move in the same breakout direction; for example, after an upward breakout, you want the next candle to be green, not red, or show indecision like a doji.

True vs False Reversals

true reversal signal
forexcracked.com
true reversal signal
forexcracked.com

For a reversal, you need proper price action behavior. After a doji candle, look for a candle that clearly shows a reversal signal. You don’t want another doji or a candle showing lot of opposite pressure. Understanding price action takes experience, and it’s something you learn over time. Our market analysis articles can guide you in understanding price action. With time and practice, you’ll start to recognize proper reversals and breakouts.

Incorporating Multi-Time Frame Analysis

multi time frame analysis
forexcracked.com
multi time frame analysis
forexcracked.com

You can also use multi-time frame analysis for this strategy. For example, look for the trend on a 4-hour or daily chart, and execute the trade on a 1-hour chart. Personally, I find the best combination is using the daily and 1-hour charts, which is why I focus on these two timeframes in my market analysis articles.

Entry Signal:

entry signals for trend following strategy
forexcracked.com

As we discussed above, our entry signal will be a breakout or reversal. You have to act quickly because this is price action. Only one single entry.

Take Profit Signal:

take profit signal
forexcracked.com

This depends on the trader’s approach. For example, I like to take my profit when the trade is going well and has made enough returns, broken a few levels, and I feel the price might exhaust. I don’t wait for the trend to change; I take profits just before it does. This is usually just below major resistance levels or just above major support levels. You can try different variations and see what works best for you.

Stop Loss Signal:

stop loss signal
forexcracked.com

For the stop loss, if you are entering a long trade after a breakout, place the stop loss just below the resistance level, where the price is unlikely to reach due to market noise. Leave enough space for fluctuations, but if the price breaks that level, it means the trend is changing, and you should exit the position. Place the stop loss just above the support level for a short trade.

Trading Plan Implementation

STRATEGYTREND FOLLOWING
TRADING STYLESWING-TRADING
STRATEGY TYPEMOMENTUM
HOLDING PERIODFEW HOURS TO DAYS(VARIES DEPENDS ON THE TRADER)
ASSET SELECTIONLIQUID FX PAIRS
TIME FRAME15M / 1H / 4H / D
ENTRY SIGNALBREAKOUTS & REVERSALS
ENTRY STYLESINGLE MARKET ENTRY
TAKE PROFIT SIGNALPRICE REACHING MAJOR SUPPORT OR RESISTANCE LEVELS
TAKE PROFIT STYLESINGLE LIMIT ORDER
POSITION SIZINGSINGLE ENTRY 2% RISK
STOP LOSS2% RISK, NEAR SUPPORT/RESISTANCE
BAIL OUT INDICATORSSTONG FUNDAMENTAL NEWS

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

If you are unfamiliar with a trading plan and don’t know how to implement it correctly, consider reading that article.

Once you find the best setup for your strategy and plan, write it down like shown above and follow it every time you trade. This is very important for your trading mindset.

Advantages of Trend Following Swing Trading

  • Simplicity – Trend following is a simple and easy-to-understand strategy that relies on widely known price action. This method involves analyzing price movements to identify trends, making it accessible for many traders.
  • Profit Potential – By capturing the majority of a trend, traders have the potential to achieve significant profits. This approach allows them to take advantage of the larger price movements within the trend.
  • Reduced Stress – Swing trading requires less monitoring compared to day trading, reducing stress and time commitment.

Disadvantages of Trend Following Swing Trading

  • False Signals –Trend following can give false signals in choppy or sideways markets. To understand the current market trend, you can follow our market analysis series. We provide insights into the trends of major forex pairs right now.
  • Late Entries – Waiting for confirmation can lead to late entries and missing part of the move. If you miss an opportunity, don’t chase it. Instead, wait for the next proper entry.
  • Market Conditions – This strategy works best in trending markets but may not do well in ranging markets. To counter this, you can use another strategy designed to cater to varying market conditions.

Conclusion

Trend following swing trading is a powerful strategy for capturing significant price movements in the Forex market. Traders can achieve consistent success by identifying, confirming, and riding trends while employing robust risk management. However, to maximize the effectiveness of this strategy, it’s essential to stay disciplined and adapt to changing market conditions.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/price-action-trend-following-strategy/feed/ 0 143069
The RSI Strength Binary Options Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-rsi-strength-binary-options-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-rsi-strength-binary-options-strategy/#respond Fri, 02 Aug 2024 17:49:42 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=143995 In the competitive world of binary options trading, having a reliable strategy can be the key to success. The RSI Strength Binary Options Strategy offers traders a sophisticated way to harness the Relative Strength Index (RSI) to identify potential entry points with high profitability while maintaining effective risk management. This article delves into how the RSI Strength Strategy can be implemented to optimize trading outcomes in binary options.

Introduction to the RSI Strength Binary Options Strategy

rsi binary options strategy

The RSI Strength Strategy uses the RSI indicator, a popular tool in technical analysis that measures the speed and change of price movements. By setting specific RSI levels, traders can identify significant market breakouts, providing clear signals for binary options trading.

Setup and Configuration

Timeframe: 1 minute or higher, adaptable based on the trader’s preference and style.Expiry Time: 1 to 5 candlesticks, allowing for quick decisions and short-term trading benefits.Indicators:

  • RSI (Relative Strength Index): This indicator is configured to a 13-period close, with levels set at 55 for potential buy signals and 45 for sell signals.
  • Moving Average: A 50-period close moving average helps determine the overall market trend to align the RSI signals.

Trading Rules

For Call Options:

  • Trigger: Initiate a buy or call option when the RSI breaks above the 55 level.
  • Confirmation: Look for an acceleration in the candlestick pattern or increased volume to confirm the bullish intent.
  • Execution: Enter a call option with an expiry time of 1 to 5 minutes, depending on the market dynamics.
rsi strentgh binary win

For Put Options:

  • Trigger: Place a sell or put option when the RSI drops below 45.
  • Confirmation: Confirm the bearish move with a surge in volume or a quickening pace in bearish candlesticks.
  • Execution: Execute a put option with an expiry of 1 to 5 minutes.

Risk Management

  • Limit the investment per trade to 5% of the total capital to manage risk effectively.
  • Avoid the common pitfall of doubling down on investments after an unsuccessful trade.
  • Choose only reputable and regulated brokers to ensure security and fair trading conditions.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Practical Trading Examples

Call Option (Buy Signal):

  • When the RSI crosses above the 55 levels, and there is a noticeable bullish activity in the candlesticks, it signals to buy. Implement the trade with a short expiry to capitalize on the quick market move.

Put Option (Sell Signal):

  • If the RSI falls below 45 and there’s a corresponding bearish candlestick pattern, it indicates a strong sell signal. Setting a put option with a brief expiry can maximize returns from this movement.
binary strategy rsi

Important Considerations

  • The RSI’s responsiveness to price momentum shifts makes it an invaluable tool. Still, validating these signals with additional indicators or thorough price analysis is crucial to minimize the risk of false signals.
  • Practice this strategy on a demo account to fully understand its nuances before implementing it in live trading scenarios.

Features of the RSI Strength Binary Options Strategy

  • Platform: MetaTrader 4
  • Ability to Change Settings: Yes
  • Timeframe: Suitable for any, from 1 Minute to Daily
  • Currency Pairs: Works with any currency pair

This strategic approach, built around the robust RSI framework and supplemented by smart risk management, positions traders well for success in the fast-paced world of binary options trading.

Read More 300 Pips Weekly: A Simple Forex Strategy with Price Action

Conclusion

The RSI Strength Binary Options Strategy provides a systematic approach to exploit market movements effectively through precise entry signals generated by the RSI. Adhering to the outlined rules and maintaining disciplined risk management can significantly enhance their trading accuracy and profitability in binary options. This strategy, although potent, requires understanding and experience in market analysis to be fully effective. Traders should consult financial experts and thoroughly test any strategy in a simulated environment before live application.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-rsi-strength-binary-options-strategy/feed/ 0 143995
Support and Resistance Forex Strategy for Beginners https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/support-and-resistance-forex-strategy-for-beginners/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/support-and-resistance-forex-strategy-for-beginners/#comments Tue, 16 Jul 2024 18:17:35 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=141918 Support and resistance levels are fundamental concepts in forex trading, providing a foundation for price action analysis. These levels represent psychological price points where buying and selling pressures will likely emerge. Understanding and effectively utilizing support and resistance can enhance trading strategies, improve entry and exit points, and boost profitability. This forex strategy for beginners is designed to help new traders grasp the essential principles of support and resistance, laying the groundwork for more advanced trading techniques.

Understanding Support and Resistance

What is Support?

support level
forexcracked.com

Support is a price level where a currency pair tends to find buying interest as it declines. At this level, demand is strong enough to prevent the price from falling further. Traders look for support levels to identify potential buying opportunities.

What is Resistance?

resistance level
forexcracked.com

Resistance is a price level where a currency pair encounters selling pressure as it rises. At this level, supply is strong enough to prevent the price from increasing further. Traders look for resistance levels to identify potential selling opportunities.

Identifying Support and Resistance Levels

Historical Price Levels:

historical price resistance level
forexcracked.com

Examine past price action to identify levels where the price has reversed direction multiple times. These historical levels are crucial in determining future support and resistance.

Round Numbers:

round number resistance
forexcracked.com

Psychological price levels, often ending in 00 (e.g., 1.2000), act as support or resistance due to their significance to traders.

Moving Averages:

moving average support
forexcracked.com

Commonly used moving averages (e.g., 50-day, 200-day) often act as dynamic support or resistance levels.

Trend Lines:

diagonal support line
forexcracked.com

Drawing trend lines connecting significant highs or lows can help identify diagonal support or resistance levels.

Fibonacci Retracement Levels:

Fibonacci Retracement Levels support
forexcracked.com

These levels, derived from the Fibonacci sequence, are used to identify potential reversal levels based on mathematical ratios.

Support and Resistance Trading Strategies

There are many ways to use support and resistance in your trading. We’ll look at three methods shortly. However, it’s important to understand that not all of them will work every time or for every currency pair. You need to test them to see which works best for you. You can try all three methods together, use just one, or combine two. Experiment to find what suits you best. Later, I will share my favorite method of trading support and resistance using just price action. Ultimately, you need a strategy that gives you positive expectancy.

Bounce Trading Strategy:

Bounce trading
forexcracked.com
  • Entry Point: Identify a currency pair approaching a support or resistance level. Wait for confirmation of the bounce, such as a bullish reversal candlestick pattern (e.g., hammer) at support or a bearish reversal pattern (e.g., shooting star) at resistance.
  • Stop Loss: Place a stop loss slightly below the support level for a long position or above the resistance level for a short position.
  • Take Profit: Set a take profit level based on the distance between the entry point and the next support or resistance level.

Breakout Trading Strategy:

Breakout trading
forexcracked.com
  • Entry Point: Identify a currency pair consolidating near a support or resistance level. Wait for a breakout with increased volume above the resistance level or below the support level.
  • Stop Loss: Place a stop loss slightly below the breakout level for a long position or above the breakout level for a short position.
  • Take Profit: Use a trailing stop or predefined price targets based on the breakout distance or previous swing highs and lows.

Range Trading Strategy:

range trading
forexcracked.com
  • Entry Point: Identify a currency pair trading within a well-defined range between support and resistance levels. Buy near the support level and sell near the resistance level.
  • Stop Loss: Place a stop loss slightly below the support level for long positions or above the resistance level for short positions.
  • Take Profit: Set take profit levels near the opposite end of the range.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Price Action Support and Resistance Strategy & Trading Plan Implementation

Price action support and resistance strategy
forexcracked.com

We use the three methods mentioned earlier in price action trading, but only with price and volume—no indicators. Your eyes become the indicators in price action trading. Here’s how it works: if you see a breakout, follow the breakout direction; if you see a reversal signal, follow the reversal; if you see a chance for range or mean reversion trading, take it.

Unlike most indicators that lag behind the price, what sets price action apart is its need for instant response. Price action uses live data, making it real-time. However, mastering price action takes time. You need to follow the same asset for months to get familiar with its movements. Practice makes perfect, just like anything else. If you want to learn more about price action, follow our market analysis series, which focuses on pure price action trading.

STRATEGYSUPPORT AND RESISTANCE TRADING
TRADING STYLEDAY-TRADING
STRATEGY TYPEMEAN-REVERSION
HOLDING PERIODFEW MINS TO CURRENT SESSION END
ASSET SELECTIONMAJOR FX PAIRS
TIME FRAME15M / 30M / 1H
ENTRY SIGNALDEPENDS ON THE STYLE OF TRADING
ENTRY STYLESINGLE MARKET ENTRY
TAKE PROFIT SIGNALPRICE REACHING NEXT SUPPORT OR RESISTANCE LEVEL
TAKE PROFIT STYLESINGLE LIMIT ORDER
POSITION SIZINGSINGLE ENTRY 2% RISK
STOP LOSS2% RISK, NEAR SUPPORT/RESISTANCE, OVER 15 PIPS
BAIL OUT INDICATORSSTONG FUNDAMENTAL NEWS

If you are unfamiliar with a trading plan and don’t know how to implement it correctly, consider reading that article.

Once you find the best setup for your strategy and plan, write it down like shown above and follow it every time you trade. This is very important for your trading mindset.

Practical Tips for Effective Trading

  • Multiple Time Frame Analysis: Confirm support and resistance levels across different time frames to enhance the reliability of these levels.
  • Volume Analysis: Pay attention to volume spikes at support and resistance levels to gauge the strength of these levels and the likelihood of reversals or breakouts.
  • Combining Indicators: Use additional technical indicators, such as RSI or MACD, to confirm potential entry and exit points.
  • Patience and Discipline: Wait for clear confirmation before entering trades. Avoid jumping into trades based on assumptions or incomplete signals.
  • Risk Management: Always use stop losses and manage your risk-to-reward ratio to protect your capital and enhance long-term profitability.

Advantages of Support and Resistance Forex Strategy for Beginners

Simplicity and Clarity:

Support and resistance levels provide a clear framework for making trading decisions. These levels are easily identifiable on price charts, making it simple for traders of all experience levels to incorporate them into their strategies.

Versatility:

Support and resistance forex strategy for beginners can be applied to various time frames and market conditions, whether trending, ranging, or consolidating. This versatility allows traders to adapt their strategies to different market environments.

Enhanced Entry and Exit Points:

Identifying key support and resistance levels can improve the timing of trade entries and exits. This can lead to better risk management and potentially higher profitability by capturing significant price movements.

Risk Management:

Using support and resistance levels helps traders set precise stop-loss and take-profit orders. This reduces the risk of large losses and allows for more effective risk management.

Psychological Insight:

Support and resistance levels reflect market psychology and the collective actions of traders. Understanding these psychological barriers can provide valuable insights into market sentiment and potential price reversals.

Disadvantages of Support and Resistance Trading

False Breakouts:

One of the main challenges of support and resistance trading is the occurrence of false breakouts. Prices may temporarily break through a level only to reverse shortly after, leading to potential losses if not managed properly.

Subjectivity:

Identifying support and resistance levels can be subjective, as different traders may draw these levels differently. This subjectivity can lead to inconsistencies in trading decisions and outcomes.

Limited Predictive Power:

While support and resistance levels can indicate potential price movements, they do not guarantee future market behavior. Prices can move unpredictably due to various factors, including news events and market sentiment shifts.

Dependence on Historical Data:

Support and resistance levels are primarily based on historical price action. While historical data can provide valuable insights, it may not always accurately predict future price movements, especially in rapidly changing market conditions.

Over-Reliance:

Traders who rely too heavily on support and resistance levels may overlook other important factors and indicators. This over-reliance can lead to missed opportunities and an incomplete understanding of the market.

Conclusion

Support and resistance levels are vital tools for forex traders, providing insight into potential price movements and market sentiment. By mastering these concepts and incorporating them into a well-structured forex strategy for beginners, traders can improve their decision-making process and achieve better trading outcomes. Remember, successful trading requires continuous learning, discipline, and adaptation to changing market conditions.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/support-and-resistance-forex-strategy-for-beginners/feed/ 1 141918
Day Trading Simple Breakout Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/day-trading-simple-breakout-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/day-trading-simple-breakout-strategy-free-download/#respond Sat, 13 Jul 2024 17:39:50 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=142147 The Day Trading Simple Breakout Strategy is designed to help traders capitalize on market movements within a single trading day. This strategy leverages the power of channel breakouts and Bollinger Bands Width to filter trades, making it a robust choice for day traders. Additionally, it is suitable for multi-position trading and can be effectively utilized in a martingale approach. The strategy is particularly effective during the London and New York trading sessions, when market volatility tends to be higher.

Simple Breakout Strategy Overview

  • Channel Breakout: This indicator identifies potential breakout points in the market, allowing traders to enter trades when the price moves beyond a certain threshold.
  • Bollinger Bands Width: This serves as a filter, ensuring that trades are only taken when there is sufficient market volatility. The width of the Bollinger Bands indicates the degree of price volatility.
  • Scalper Indicator: This indicator helps confirm trade entries and exits based on its color changes.

This Simple Breakout Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This Day Trading Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

You can set Simple Breakout Strategy to send you a signal alert. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This Day Trading Strategy can be used on any currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts. Works best on 15M TimeFrame.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for this Day Trading Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using the Day Trading Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy Signal

  • The Bollinger Bands Width is above the filter level, indicating increased volatility.
  • The Scalper indicator displays a blue line.
  • The Channel Breakout indicator shows a grey dot below the price, signaling a potential upward breakout.

Sell Signal

  • The Bollinger Bands Width is above the filter level, confirming adequate market volatility.
  • The Scalper indicator displays a yellow line.
  • The Channel Breakout indicator shows a grey dot above the price, indicating a potential downward breakout.

Exit Strategy

  • Exit the trade when the Scalper indicator changes color, which suggests a potential reversal or end of the current trend.
  • Alternatively, exit at a predetermined profit target to lock in gains.
  • An initial stop loss should be set between 12 to 18 pips, depending on the currency pairs being traded. This helps manage risk and protect capital in case the market moves against the trade.

Forum(Mirror Download)

Conclusion

The Day Trading Simple Breakout Strategy offers a systematic approach to day trading, combining the strengths of channel breakouts and Bollinger Bands Width. By following the clear trading rules and utilizing the recommended indicators, traders can enhance their chances of success in the market. Whether you are a novice or an experienced trader, this strategy provides a reliable framework for capturing market movements within a single trading day.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/day-trading-simple-breakout-strategy-free-download/feed/ 0 142147
Moving Average Crossover Strategy for Forex https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/moving-average-crossover-strategy-for-forex/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/moving-average-crossover-strategy-for-forex/#respond Thu, 04 Jul 2024 17:29:33 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=140131 The Moving Average Crossover strategy is one of the most popular and effective techniques used by forex traders. It is simple to understand and apply, making it a favorite among both novice and experienced traders. This strategy revolves around using two moving averages (MAs) of different periods to identify potential buy and sell signals in the forex market. In this article, we’ll delve into the details of the Moving Average Crossover strategy, its components, how to implement it, and tips for optimizing its use.

What is a Moving Average?

A Moving Average (MA) is a statistical calculation that helps smooth out price data by creating a constantly updated average price.

The two most common types of moving averages are:

Simple Moving Average
forexcracked.com

Simple Moving Average (SMA): This is calculated by taking the arithmetic mean of a given set of prices over a specific number of periods. For example, a 10-day SMA adds the closing prices of the last 10 days and divides by 10.

Exponential Moving Average
forexcracked.com

Exponential Moving Average (EMA): This gives more weight to recent prices, making it more responsive to new information. It is calculated using a more complex formula that emphasizes the latest price data.

The Moving Average Crossover Strategy

moving average crossover strategy
forexcracked.com

Moving Average Crossover Strategy involves using two moving averages—a short-term and a long-term moving average. The basic idea is to use the crossover of these two moving averages to signal potential entry and exit points for trades.

Choosing the Moving Averages:

  • Short-term MA: Commonly, a 10-day or 20-day MA is used.
  • Long-term MA: Typically, a 50-day or 200-day MA is preferred.

Types of Crossovers:

golden cross
forexcracked.com
  • Golden Cross: This occurs when the short-term MA crosses above the long-term MA. It is a bullish signal, indicating a potential buy opportunity.
death cross
forexcracked.com
  • Death Cross: This happens when the short-term MA crosses below the long-term MA. It is a bearish signal, suggesting a potential sell opportunity.

Implementing the Strategy

Setup:

  • Choose the currency pair you want to trade.
  • Apply the selected short-term and long-term MAs to the price chart.

Identifying Signals:

  • Buy Signal: When the short-term MA crosses above the long-term MA, enter a long position.
  • Sell Signal: When the short-term MA crosses below the long-term MA, enter a short position.

Confirming Signals:

  • While the crossover itself is a strong signal, it’s advisable to use additional indicators or price action analysis to confirm the signal. Common indicators include the Relative Strength Index (RSI) or the Moving Average Convergence Divergence (MACD).

Setting Stop-Loss and Take-Profit Levels:

  • Stop-Loss: Place it just below the most recent swing low for a buy signal or just above the most recent swing high for a sell signal.
  • Take-Profit: It can be set based on a fixed reward-to-risk ratio or using support and resistance levels.

Trading Plan for Strategy

STRATEGYMOVING AVERAGE CROSSOVER
TRADING STYLESWING TRADING
STRATEGY TYPEMOMENTUM
HOLDING PERIODVARIES (DEPENDENT ON SIGNAL)
ASSET SELECTIONMAJOR FX PAIRS
TIME FRAME1H / 4H / DAILY
ENTRY SIGNALShort-term MA crossing above/below long-term MA
ENTRY STYLESINGLE MARKET ENTRY
TAKE PROFIT SIGNALPrice moving significantly in the direction of the trend
TAKE PROFIT STYLESINGLE LIMIT ORDER
POSITION SIZINGSINGLE ENTRY 2% RISK
STOP LOSS2% RISK, NEAR SUPPORT/RESISTANCE LEVELS
BAIL OUT INDICATORSSTONG FUNDAMENTAL NEWS

If you are unfamiliar with a trading plan and don’t know how to implement it correctly, consider reading those articles.

When I tested Moving Average Crossover Strategy, these parameters worked for me, but the market has changed and will keep changing. You aim to try different settings or methods for these parameters and backtest your strategy to see what works for you. Keep testing until you find a trading plan that gives you positive results.

Once you find the best setup for your strategy and plan, write it down like shown above and follow it every time you trade. This is very important for your trading mindset.

Advantages of the Moving Average Crossover Strategy

  • Simplicity: Easy to understand and implement, making it accessible to traders of all experience levels.
  • Trend Identification: Helps identify the direction of the trend and potential reversals.
  • Objective Signals: Reduces emotional trading by providing clear buy and sell signals.

Limitations and Considerations

  • Lagging Indicator: Moving averages are based on past price data, which can lead to delayed signals.
  • Whipsaws: In a ranging or choppy market, crossovers can result in false signals, leading to losses.
  • Optimization Required: The effectiveness of the strategy depends on the selected MA periods, which may require adjustment based on the currency pair and market conditions.

Tips for Optimizing the Strategy

  • Backtesting: Test the strategy on historical data to find the most effective MA periods for your chosen currency pair.
  • Combining Indicators: Use other technical indicators to filter out false signals and improve accuracy.
  • Market Conditions: Adapt the strategy based on market conditions. For example, shorter MAs might be more effective in volatile markets, while longer MAs might work better in trending markets.

Disclaimer

The information provided in this article is for educational purposes only and should not be considered financial advice. Trading forex involves significant risk and may not be suitable for all investors. Past performance is not indicative of future results. Always conduct your own research and consider your financial situation before making any trading decisions. Seek advice from a licensed financial advisor if needed.

Conclusion

The Moving Average Crossover strategy is a straightforward yet powerful tool for forex traders. By understanding the principles behind moving averages and how to effectively apply them, traders can enhance their ability to identify profitable trading opportunities. As with any trading strategy, it’s crucial to practice sound risk management and continually refine your approach based on market dynamics and personal trading experience. Happy trading, and may the eternal sun guide us!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/moving-average-crossover-strategy-for-forex/feed/ 0 140131
Noble Impulse V4 Indicator And Strategies For FREE Download [Update] https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/noble-impulse-indicator-and-strategies-for-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/noble-impulse-indicator-and-strategies-for-free-download/#comments Fri, 21 Jun 2024 17:40:09 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=8324 Noble Impulse is a Non-Repaint trading system usually being sold for 149$. It’s a Forex Technical Analysis Indicator used to forecast price changes in the currency market. By using this Indicator, traders can make decisions about market entry and exit. Its accuracy is above 84%, which means there are wrong signals, but the rate of winning signals is higher than the wrong ones in the long term.

You can set this free forex Indicator to send you a signal alert via email, SMS, or platform pop-ups. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Impulse V4 Indicator can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, But it works best on M5, M15, and M30.

Noble Impulse Indicator system can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

What’s new with Noble Impulse V4

  • Adjustable Support and Resistance with three different sensitivity settings
  • Adjustable TP & SL based on volatility
  • Ichimoku Cloud Filter
  • Noble Impulse V4 Smart dashboard to see all signals on multiple timeframes
  • Market state indicator on the dashboard (Trending and Ranging)

Noble Impulse V4

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Included Noble Impulse Strategies

  • The Basics – Noble Impulse Strategy
  • Advanced Noble Strategy Ichimoku Cloud System
  • Intermediate Impulse Strategy Moving Average

Updated 2024/06/21

Forum(Mirror Download)

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/noble-impulse-indicator-and-strategies-for-free-download/feed/ 28 8324
Bollinger Bands and RSI Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/bollinger-bands-and-rsi-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/bollinger-bands-and-rsi-trading-strategy/#comments Sat, 08 Jun 2024 18:20:51 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=139892 Bollinger Bands and the Relative Strength Index (RSI) are two widely respected technical indicators that, when combined, offer traders a robust method for analyzing market conditions and identifying trading opportunities.

In this article, we will delve into the Bollinger Bands and RSI trading strategy, providing a comprehensive guide to help traders make informed decisions and enhance their trading performance.

Understanding Bollinger Bands

Bollinger Bands Indicator
forexcracked.com

Bollinger Bands, developed by John Bollinger in the 1980s, are a type of statistical chart characterizing the prices and volatility over time of a financial instrument. They consist of three lines:

  1. Middle Band: A simple moving average (SMA), typically set to 20 periods.
  2. Upper Band: Plotted two standard deviations above the middle band.
  3. Lower Band: Plotted two standard deviations below the middle band.

The distance between the upper and lower bands expands and contracts based on market volatility. During periods of high volatility, the bands widen, and during periods of low volatility, they contract.

Understanding RSI

RSI Indicator
forexcracked.com

The Relative Strength Index (RSI), developed by J. Welles Wilder, is a momentum oscillator that measures the speed and change of price movements. The RSI oscillates between 0 and 100 and is typically used to identify overbought or oversold conditions in a market.

The RSI is calculated using the following formula:

RSI Formula
forexcracked.com

Where RS (Relative Strength) is the average of ‘n’ days’ up closes divided by the average of ‘n’ days’ down closes. A common setting for RSI is 14 periods.

Key RSI Levels

  • 70 and above: The asset is considered overbought, indicating a potential sell opportunity.
  • 30 and below: The asset is considered oversold, indicating a potential buy opportunity.

Bollinger Bands and RSI Trading Strategy

Bollinger Bands and RSI Forex Trading Strategy Entry Signal
forexcracked.com

This RSI trading strategy uses two simple tools: Bollinger Bands and the Relative Strength Index (RSI). The goal is to take advantage of price changes when the market is active. Normally, an RSI level of 70 means the price is high (overbought), and an RSI level of 30 means the price is low (oversold). We buy when the RSI moves up from the oversold level and the price is at or below the lower Bollinger Band, and we sell when the price reaches the middle Bollinger Band.

Bollinger Bands and RSI Forex Trading Strategy Entry Signal
forexcracked.com

On the other hand, we sell when the RSI moves down from the overbought level, and the price is at or above the upper Bollinger Band, taking profit when the price reaches the middle band. We only take positions when the RSI is between 70 and 30 because prices can stay high or low for a long time, and we don’t want to get caught in a trend. This is an improved version of the Simple RSI Trading Strategy we discussed before.

You can use this Bollinger Bands and RSI trading strategy in any time frame, but it works best in 15-minute, 30-minute, and 1-hour charts. Not all currency pairs will work well with this strategy. EURUSD worked pretty well during my testing, but you can try different pairs to see which ones work best for you.

For the stop loss, it depends on the time frame you’re using. If you’re using a 15-minute chart, a stop loss of around 20 pips is good. For a 1-hour chart, 60 pips is considered safe. However, you should test this because it can change over time. Also, try to place the stop loss above resistance levels and below support levels, where the price is less likely to hit the stop loss due to volatility. Make sure to leave enough space for this.

Trading Plan for Strategy

STRATEGYBOLL & RSI
TRADING STYLEDAY-TRADING
STRATEGY TYPEMEAN-REVERSION
HOLDING PERIODFEW MINS TO CURRENT SESSION END
ASSET SELECTIONMAJOR FX PAIRS
TIME FRAME15M / 30M / 1H
ENTRY SIGNALRSI Between 70 to 30 and Price Touching Upper or Lower Bollinger Bands
ENTRY STYLESINGLE MARKET ENTRY
TAKE PROFIT SIGNALPrice Reaching Middle Bollinger Band
TAKE PROFIT STYLESINGLE LIMIT ORDER
POSITION SIZINGSINGLE ENTRY 2% RISK
STOP LOSS2% RISK, NEAR SUPPORT/RESISTANCE, OVER 15 PIPS
BAIL OUT INDICATORSSTONG FUNDAMENTAL NEWS

If you are unfamiliar with a trading plan and don’t know how to implement it correctly, consider reading those articles.

When I tested this strategy, these parameters worked for me, but the market has changed and will keep changing. You aim to try different settings or methods for these parameters and backtest your Bollinger Bands and RSI trading strategy to see what works for you. Keep testing until you find a trading plan that gives you positive results.

For example, you can use 3 standard deviations for high-probability trades. You can adjust the oversold and overbought levels to your preference. You can take profit just before the middle band or wait until it reaches the upper or lower bands. Try different variations to find what works best and gives you positive expectancy.

Once you find the best setup for your Bollinger Bands and RSI trading strategy and plan, write it down like shown above and follow it every time you trade. This is very important for your trading mindset.

Advantages of this Trading Strategy

  • Ease of Use: The RSI Trading strategy is simple, making it accessible for new and experienced traders.
  • Versatility: RSI & Bollinger Bands can be applied to various time frames and currency pairs, allowing traders to adapt the strategy to their preferences.
  • Standard Deviation: You can adjust the Bollinger Bands’ standard deviation based on your risk tolerance to get more accurate signals.
  • Effectiveness in Trending and Range-Bound Markets: While particularly useful in range-bound markets, sometimes this can also be applied to trending markets.

Limitations and Considerations

  • False Signals: RSI can generate false signals, especially during strong trending markets where the price continues to rise or fall despite overbought or oversold conditions.
  • Lagging Indicator: As a momentum oscillator, RSI can lag behind price movements, potentially causing delays in entry or exit points.
  • Volatile Markets: This RSI trading strategy doesn’t work well during sudden market movements, so avoid trading on days with volatile news.
  • Standard Deviation: If you use a higher standard deviation for Bollinger Bands, you might miss out on some good trading opportunities.

Disclaimer

The information provided in this article is for educational purposes only and should not be considered financial advice. Trading forex involves significant risk and may not be suitable for all investors. Past performance is not indicative of future results. Always conduct your own research and consider your financial situation before making any trading decisions. Seek advice from a licensed financial advisor if needed.

Conclusion

The Bollinger Bands and RSI trading strategy is a powerful tool for traders seeking to capitalize on market volatility and momentum. By combining these two indicators, traders can identify potential entry and exit points with higher accuracy. However, like all trading strategies, it’s essential to incorporate proper risk management techniques and to backtest the strategy under various market conditions before deploying it in a live trading environment. By doing so, traders can enhance their chances of success in Forex trading.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/forex-strategies/bollinger-bands-and-rsi-trading-strategy/feed/ 1 139892
Effective, Simple RSI Trading Strategy for Beginners https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-rsi-trading-strategy-for-beginners/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-rsi-trading-strategy-for-beginners/#comments Fri, 24 May 2024 18:54:08 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=138375 The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a popular technical indicator used in forex trading to assess the strength and momentum of price movements. Developed by J. Welles Wilder in 1978, RSI measures the speed and change of price movements, providing traders with valuable insights into potential overbought or oversold conditions. In this article, we will explore a simple yet effective RSI trading strategy designed to help traders make informed decisions and optimize their trading performance.

Understanding RSI

Relative strength index (rsi) indicator
forexcracked.com

The RSI is a momentum oscillator that ranges from 0 to 100. Traditionally, an RSI reading above 70 is considered overbought, indicating that the asset may be overvalued and due for a correction. Conversely, an RSI reading below 30 is considered oversold, suggesting that the asset may be undervalued and due for a rebound. The standard period for calculating RSI is 14 periods, but traders can adjust this based on their trading style and time frame.

RSI Forex Trading Strategy

Simple RSI Forex Trading Strategy
forexcracked.com

The idea behind this strategy is not to take a position when RSI reaches oversold or overbought levels but to take advantage of RSI returning to normal from these levels.

For example, if the RSI is at 75, which is an overbought level, and it starts dropping to 69, you enter a short position. If the RSI is at 20, which is an oversold level, and it starts rising to 31, you enter a long position.

This is because we don’t want to get stuck in a position while the market stays oversold or overbought for a long time because it does happen all the time. Instead, we wait for confirmation that the price is reversing, and then we take that opportunity to make a profit from this momentum.

To take profit, if you have a long position, aim to take profit around the 65 level. If you have a short position, aim for around 35. You can adjust these levels to see what works best for you. For example, you might take profit at a middle level like 50. Experiment and find what works best.

For stop loss, depending on the timeframe you’re trading, this strategy works best on 15-minute and 1-hour charts. When you enter a position, make sure your stop loss isn’t triggered by market noise. Leave enough space for market fluctuations, which depends on the market conditions and the pair you’re trading. For example, set your stop loss to at least 15-20 pips for 15-minute charts and over 40 pips for 1-hour charts. Again, try different options to see what works best for you.

Trading Plan for RSI Trading Strategy

STRATEGYSIMPLE RSI TRADING STRATEGY
TRADING STYLEDAY-TRADING
STRATEGY TYPEMEAN-REVERSION
HOLDING PERIODFEW MINS TO CURRENT SESSION END
ASSET SELECTIONEURUSD
TIME FRAME15M
ENTRY SIGNALRSI REACHING 31 OR 69
ENTRY STYLESINGLE MARKET ENTRY
TAKE PROFIT SIGNALRSI REACHING 65 OR 35
TAKE PROFIT STYLESINGLE LIMIT ORDER
POSITION SIZINGSINGLE ENTRY 2% RISK
STOP LOSS2% RISK, NEAR SUPPORT/RESISTANCE, OVER 15 PIPS
BAIL OUT INDICATORSSTONG FUNDAMENTAL NEWS

If you are not familiar with a Trading Plan and don’t know How to implement a Trading Plan correctly consider reading those articles.

These parameters worked for me when I used this strategy, but the market has changed and will keep changing. Your goal is to try different settings or methods for these parameters and backtest your trading strategy to see what works for you. Keep testing until you find a trading plan that gives you positive results.

For example, you can change the holding time for your position, and you can try to increase your profit even before reaching 65 or 35. you can try different pairs. You can try different RSI levels. Different time frames. Incorporate multiple time frame analyses. You can push this strategy as much as you want.

Once you find the best setup for your trading strategy and plan, write it down like shown above and follow it every time you trade. This is very important for your trading mindset.

Advantages of the RSI Trading Strategy

  • Ease of Use: The strategy is straightforward, making it accessible for novice and experienced traders.
  • Versatility: RSI can be applied to various time frames and currency pairs, allowing traders to adapt the strategy to their preferences.
  • Effectiveness in Trending and Range-Bound Markets: While particularly useful in range-bound markets, RSI can also provide valuable insights when combined with price action during trending conditions.

Limitations and Considerations

  • False Signals: RSI can generate false signals, especially during strong trending markets where the price continues to rise or fall despite overbought or oversold conditions.
  • Lagging Indicator: As a momentum oscillator, RSI can lag behind price movements, potentially causing delays in entry or exit points.
  • Need for Confirmation: To improve accuracy, combining RSI signals with other technical analysis tools or indicators is essential.

Disclaimer

The information provided in this article is for educational purposes only and should not be considered financial advice. Trading forex involves significant risk and may not be suitable for all investors. Past performance is not indicative of future results. Always conduct your own research and consider your financial situation before making any trading decisions. Seek advice from a licensed financial advisor if needed.

Conclusion

The simple RSI trading strategy is a powerful tool for traders seeking to capitalize on overbought and oversold conditions in the forex market. By understanding the principles behind RSI and implementing a disciplined approach to entry and exit points, traders can enhance their decision-making process and improve their trading outcomes. Remember, no strategy is foolproof, so practicing proper risk management is crucial and continually refining your approach based on market conditions is crucial.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/simple-rsi-trading-strategy-for-beginners/feed/ 2 138375
Trend Focus Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-focus-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-focus-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Wed, 15 May 2024 17:35:27 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=138288 Forex trading can often be overwhelming due to the wide range of strategies available. However, the Trend Focus Forex trading strategy minimizes the notorious false signals typical of trend trading systems. This article will explore how this strategy combines moving averages, critical support, and resistance levels to secure profitable trades.

Strategy Overview

Platform: MetaTrader 4

Currency Pairs: Any

Timeframe: M15 and higher

Trading Time: Any

Risk Management: Limit risk to 2-5% of your deposit per trade.

Forex Trend Trading Strategy

Key Indicators Used

  1. Pivot Points Levels: Marks important support and resistance levels.
  2. Round Numbers: These act as psychological price levels that often become barriers in trading.
  3. Supply and Demand Zones: Identify areas of buying and selling pressure.
  4. Fractals: Helps to spot potential reversal points.
  5. Moving Averages: Uses 50 and 34 periods, close settings.
  6. Fan of Moving Averages: Provides a broader view of the trend.
  7. Woodie CCI: Confirms trend strength and momentum.

Installation of Indicators and Template

  1. Unpack the archive containing templates and indicators.
  2. Transfer the indicators to the MQL4/Indicators folder.
  3. Move the templates into the templates folder.
  4. Restart the MetaTrader 4 terminal to ensure changes take effect.
  5. Open the chart of the desired currency pair and apply the “Trend Focus” template.

Trading Signals

For a BUY Position:

  • The price should rebound from the support zone.
  • Ensure the price closes above the moving average fan.
  • Both the 34 and 50-period moving averages should turn green.
  • The Woodie CCI should be above zero with a green square on the histogram.
Forex Trend Trading

For a SELL Position:

  • The price should be rejected from the resistance zone.
  • Check that the price closes below the fan of moving averages.
  • Both the 34 and 50-period moving averages should turn red.
  • The Woodie CCI should be below zero with a red square on the histogram.
sell trade Forex Trend Trading Strategy

Managing Trades

Stop Loss and Take Profit:

  • Stop Loss: Set above or below the resistance or support zone relative to the last local high or low.
  • Take Profit: Position near the next Pivot level or before the next major support or resistance zone.

Recommendations Before Going Live

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

First, it is highly advised that the Trend Focus Forex trading strategy be tested on a demo account. This practice will help you familiarize yourself with the signals and the overall trading dynamics without risking real money.

Free Download Trend Focus Forex Trading Strategy

Read More Binary Options Trading Strategy with the Hama Scalping System

Conclusion

The Trend Focus Forex trading strategy is a well-rounded system designed for traders who seek to capitalize on clear, defined market trends while effectively managing their risk. By adhering to the strategy’s guidelines and practicing diligent risk management, traders can enhance their trading performance and potentially increase their profitability in the forex market.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-focus-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 138288
Trend Reversal Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-reversal-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-reversal-strategy-free-download/#comments Tue, 14 May 2024 20:35:30 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=138256 The Trend Reversal Strategy is a trading strategy designed to capitalize on market reversals by utilizing two key indicators: the Diamond indicator and a histogram indicator. This strategy provides traders with buy and sell signals, enhancing the accuracy of trades and optimizing entry and exit points. Let’s delve into the components and trading rules of this trend strategy.

The Diamond Indicator

The Diamond indicator is the primary tool in this strategy. It is a multi-time-frame indicator based on reversal and trend trading principles. Notably, the Diamond indicator does not repaint, back paint, or delay its signals, ensuring traders receive timely and reliable alerts. The indicator offers two signal modes, which can be configured via the “use best entry as diamonds” input.

  1. Diamond Mode: When the “use best entry as diamonds” input is set to true, the indicator filters normal mode signals and provides the best possible signals as diamond signals. In this mode, traders cannot tweak the diamond signals, ensuring they receive only the most robust entries.
  2. Normal Mode: When the “use best entry as diamonds” input is set to false, the indicator activates band settings and operates as a Bollinger Band strategy. This mode allows for more flexibility in signal generation, adapting to various market conditions.

The Histogram Indicator

The histogram indicator serves as a trend filter, providing uptrend and downtrend signals. It acts as a visual histogram and, like the Diamond indicator, does not repaint, back paint, or delay its signals. The histogram indicator is crucial in confirming the strength and direction of the trend, ensuring trades are made in alignment with market momentum.

This Trend Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This Reversal Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

You can set the Trend Reversal System to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification or platform pop-ups. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This Trend Strategy can be used on any currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for this Reversal Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using Reversal Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy

  • Diamond Indicator: A purple diamond appears, signaling a potential buy opportunity.
  • Histogram Indicator: The histogram crosses above the 0.065 level, confirming an uptrend.

Sell

  • Diamond Indicator: A yellow diamond appears, indicating a potential sell opportunity.
  • Histogram Indicator: The histogram crosses below the -0.065 level, confirming a downtrend.

Exit

  • Stop Loss (SL): Set the stop loss at the previous low (for buy trades) or the previous high (for sell trades).
  • Take Profit (TP): Aim for a minimum risk-reward ratio (RRR) of 1:1. Alternatively, exit the trade when the histogram reaches the 0.70 (for buy trades) or -0.70 (for sell trades) levels.

Forum(Mirror Download)

Conclusion for Trend Strategy

The Trend Strategy, leveraging the Diamond and histogram indicators, provides traders with a robust framework for identifying and capitalizing on market reversals. By following the clear buy, sell, and exit rules, traders can enhance their trading accuracy. Whether operating in diamond mode for the best possible signals or normal mode for flexibility, this strategy equips traders with the tools needed to navigate the complexities of the financial markets effectively.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-reversal-strategy-free-download/feed/ 1 138256
300 Pips Weekly: A Simple Forex Strategy with Price Action https://www.forexcracked.com/education/300-pips-weekly-a-simple-forex-strategy-with-price-action/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/300-pips-weekly-a-simple-forex-strategy-with-price-action/#respond Sun, 05 May 2024 18:09:37 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=137745 The 300 Pips a Week with Price Action trading forex strategy is designed to generate consistent gains by leveraging the power of support and resistance zones. This system aims to capture substantial weekly profits by carefully filtering entry signals.

Strategy Parameters

  • Currency Pairs: Any
  • Timeframe: M15 and higher
  • Trading Time: Any
  • Platform: MetaTrader 4
  • Risk Management: Keep trade risk between 2-5% of the total deposit per trade.
A Simple Forex Strategy with Price Action

Indicators Used

  • Highest Lowest and Reentry Point: Identifies key price points.
  • Magnified Price: Displays market prices more clearly.
  • Supply and Demand: Marks support and resistance zones.
  • RatisCy Filter: Confirms trend direction.
  • Symbol Changer Profit Display: Facilitates quick currency pair selection.

Installing Indicators and Templates

  1. Unpack the zip file containing templates and indicators.
  2. Copy the indicators into the MQL4/Indicators folder.
  3. Place the template files into the templates folder.
  4. Restart the MetaTrader 4 terminal to apply the changes.
  5. Open the chart of the desired currency pair.
  6. Apply the template named “300 pips a week.tpl.”

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Signals

Buy Signal:

  • The “Buy trend” signal appears.
  • The price touches the support zone or rebounds upwards from it.
  • The histogram bars turn blue.

Sell Signal:

  • The “Sell trend” signal appears.
  • The price reaches the resistance zone or falls from it.
  • The histogram bars are white.
00 Pips Weekly A Simple Forex Strategy with Price Action

Stop Loss and Take Profit

  • Stop Loss: Position the stop loss above or below the previous local high or low.
  • Take Profit: Set a 1.3:1 ratio to stop loss or aim for the opposite support or resistance zone.

Practice on a Demo Account

Practicing on a demo account before using this strategy in live trading is essential. This will help refine the approach and get comfortable with the signals.

Free Download Price Action Forex Strategy Files

Read More Silver Trend Following Scalping Strategy for MT5 FREE Download

Conclusion

The 300 Pips a Week with Price Action strategy provides a structured and disciplined framework for profitable forex trading. By understanding support and resistance zones and managing risk, traders can aim for substantial weekly profits while avoiding unnecessary risks.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/300-pips-weekly-a-simple-forex-strategy-with-price-action/feed/ 0 137745
90% Win Trend Trading Forex Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/90-win-trend-trading-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/90-win-trend-trading-forex-strategy/#comments Thu, 02 May 2024 17:13:01 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=137651 The 90% Win trend trading forex strategy is a simple yet highly effective trend-following system designed for forex traders. It offers conservative and aggressive entry points into the market, making it adaptable to different trading styles and risk appetites. This strategy can be applied to any currency pair and is suitable for timeframes of M15 and higher.

90% Win Trend Trading Forex Strategy

Setting Up the 90% Win Trend Trading Strategy

Strategy Parameters:

  • Currency Pairs: Any
  • Timeframe: M15 and higher
  • Trading Time: Any
  • Risk Management: Ensure the risk per trade is no more than 2-5% of the total deposit.

Indicators Used:

  • Tess candles
  • ZZ semafor
  • ASCtrend
  • Regression channel (100)
  • Scalping Indicator (default setting)
  • Trend filter (periods 5)
  • Symbol changer
Trend Trading Forex Strategy

Installing Indicators and System Template

  1. Installation:
    • Unpack the zip file containing templates and indicators.
    • Copy the indicators into the MQL4/Indicators folder.
    • Transfer the template file to the templates folder.
    • Restart the MT4 terminal to apply changes.
  2. Activating the Strategy:
    • Open the chart of the desired currency pair.
    • Load the template named “90% Win.”

After installation, the chart should display various technical indicators that work in concert to signal potential entry points.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Signals

Buy Signals:

  • Look for a green upward arrow from the ZZ semafor indicator.
  • Confirm with green bars on the Trend filter and Scalping Indicator.
    • Conservative Entry: Both filter indicators show green.
    • Aggressive Entry: At least one of the filter indicators shows green.

Sell Signals:

  • Identify a red downward arrow.
  • Confirm with red bars on both the Trend filter and Scalping Indicator.
    • Conservative Entry: Both indicators show red.
    • Aggressive Entry: At least one shows red.
Trend Trading Forex Strategy

Setting Stop Loss and Take Profit

  • Stop Loss: Set above or below the previous local high or low to protect against sudden market reversals.
  • Take Profit: Aim for at least a 1:1 ratio relative to the stop loss to balance risk and reward effectively.

Recommendations Before Live Trading

Practicing the 90% Win trend trading strategy on a demo account is highly recommended before transitioning to a live trading environment. This allows traders to familiarize themselves with the strategy’s nuances and refine their execution skills without financial risk.

Free Download 90% Win Trend Trading Forex Strategy

Read More Forex SMC Indicator for MT4 FREE Download

Conclusion

The 90% Win trend trading strategy is notable for its simplicity and effectiveness in following market trends. By adhering to the outlined signals and maintaining strict risk management, traders can achieve high success rates. Continuous learning and adaptation to market conditions are crucial for successful forex trading.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/90-win-trend-trading-forex-strategy/feed/ 2 137651
Trend Plus Breakout Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-plus-breakout-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-plus-breakout-strategy-free-download/#comments Wed, 01 May 2024 19:12:00 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=137567 The Trend Plus Breakout strategy is a robust trading system that builds on the principles of the London Breakout strategy, similar to the Hans Breakout method but with modifications aimed at enhancing the box size from which trading signals are derived. This guide will explore the mechanics of the Trend Plus Breakout strategy, which is ideal for traders who focus on the Forex market and seek to capitalize on the specific movements during the early London session.

The strategy operates on a 15-minute timeframe, focusing on the period from 6 to 9 AM GMT, corresponding to early trading hours in Berlin. During these hours, the strategy identifies a ‘box’—a range that encapsulates the high and low price movements. The goal is to determine breakout points as the market moves beyond this established range.

This London Breakout Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This Breakout Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Components of this Breakout Strategy

Trend Plus Breakout Strategy incorporates several trend-momentum indicators that aid in deciphering the direction and strength of the breakout. These components ensure that trades are executed not just based on price movement but are supported by underlying trends. Here’s how these components come together:

  • Box Formation: The box is formed between 6 AM and 9 AM GMT Berlin Time. Make sure the box time matches according to your broker time, so adjust it using the indicator settings.
  • Trend-Momentum Indicators: The strategy uses specific indicators such as the Trend Plus NR bar (which appears in green for buy signals and red for sell signals) and the Trend Plus bar (color-coordinated in the same way), which help confirm the direction of the market trend.

This London Breakout Strategy can be used on any currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for this London Breakout Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using London Breakout Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy Signal

  • Candle Close: A candle must close above the upper line of the box.
  • Price Position: The price should be above the trend medium and high.
  • Indicator Confirmation: Both the Trend Plus NR bar and the Trend Plus bar should show green, indicating a bullish momentum.

Sell Signal

  • Candle Close: A candle must close below the lower line of the box.
  • Price Position: The price should be below the trend medium and low.
  • Indicator Confirmation: Both the Trend Plus NR bar and the Trend Plus bar should show red, indicating a bearish momentum.

Exit Strategy

  • Stop Loss: A stop loss should be placed between 18 and 25 pips from the entry point, depending on the volatility and characteristics of the currency pair.
  • Profit Target: The minimum profit target should aim for a 1.4 ratio to the stop loss. This risk/reward ratio helps in maintaining a profitable trading edge even if not all trades succeed.

Forum(Mirror Download)

Conclusion

The Trend Plus Breakout strategy is an effective approach for traders looking to exploit the momentum and trends, specifically during the early hours of the London trading session. By combining price breakouts with trend-momentum indicators, this strategy provides a structured way to make informed trading decisions. As with any trading strategy, testing it on a demo account before applying it to live trades is vital to ensure it fits one’s trading style and risk tolerance. With careful management and adherence to the rules, the Trend Plus Breakout strategy can be a valuable addition to a trader’s arsenal.

Credit to forexstrategiesresources

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-plus-breakout-strategy-free-download/feed/ 3 137567
Silver Trend Following Scalping Strategy for MT5 FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/silver-trend-following-scalping-strategy-for-mt5-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/silver-trend-following-scalping-strategy-for-mt5-free-download/#respond Fri, 12 Apr 2024 17:48:08 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=133865 Silver Trend Following Strategy is an MT5 Scalping Strategy that relies on two NON-Repainting indicators. It’s a strategy known for its fast trade execution and short holding periods, two precise indicators and a clear set of rules. This is where the Silver Trend Following Scalping Strategy shines, offering traders a systematic approach to making quick, trend-based trades with a high potential for profitability.

The strategy is built upon two main indicators that are key for identifying trading opportunities: the Silver Trend and a Star indicator. The Silver Trend indicator is configured to move very slowly, ensuring that it accurately captures the essence of the market trend without being swayed by minor fluctuations. This deliberate pacing allows traders to confirm the presence of a solid trend before making their move.

On the other hand, the Star indicator is set to react quickly, enabling traders to enter and exit trades at the most opportune moments. This combination of a slow-moving trend indicator with a fast timing indicator is what makes the Silver Trend Following Scalping Strategy uniquely effective.

This MT5 Trend Following Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Silver Trend Strategy for MT5 FREE Download ForexCracked.com

This MT5 Forex Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Silver Trend Strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for this Scalping Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this MT5 Scalping Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

The strategy’s rules are straightforward, emphasizing quick entries and exits in line with the prevailing market trend. Here’s a breakdown of the key rules:

Buy Conditions

  • Silver Trend Indicator: Shows a green line, indicating an upward trend.
  • Pink Star Position: Appears below the candle, signaling an optimal entry point for a long position.

Sell Conditions

  • Silver Trend Indicator: Displays a red line, indicating a downward trend.
  • Pink Star Position: Appears above the candle, signaling an optimal entry point for a short position.

Exiting Positions

The strategy also includes clear guidelines for exiting positions, which is crucial for effectively locking in profits and managing risks. Traders are advised to place their initial stop loss just below or above the Silver Trend line, depending on the direction of their trade, or at the previous swing high/low. Positions should be exited when the Pink star changes direction or when the Silver Trend changes direction. However, to capitalize on fast profits, a stop-loss ratio ranging from 1.1 to 1:1.4 is recommended, varying with the market’s volatility.

Forum(Mirror Download)

Conclusion of Trend Following Strategy

The Silver Trend Following Scalping Strategy offers a compelling approach for traders aiming to thrive in the fast-paced environment of day trading. By combining the steady, reliable insights of the Silver Trend indicator with the quick reflexes of a Star indicator, this strategy allows traders to make swift, informed decisions. As with any trading strategy, success comes with practice, discipline, and a keen understanding of the market’s movements. Whether applied in its pure form or adapted to fit individual trading styles, the Trend Following Strategy is a valuable tool for those looking to harness the power of market trends.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/silver-trend-following-scalping-strategy-for-mt5-free-download/feed/ 0 133865
Fibonacci Box Breakout Forex Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/fibonacci-box-breakout-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/fibonacci-box-breakout-forex-strategy/#respond Wed, 10 Apr 2024 17:57:06 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=133993 The Fibonacci Box Breakout Forex strategy harnesses the power of intraday trading, focusing on breakouts occurring within a specified time frame. By utilizing Fibonacci levels, traders can effectively identify entry and exit points, maximizing profit potential while minimizing risk.

Key Components:

  • Time Frame: 15 minutes
  • Market: Major minor currency pairs, indices, and commodities

Indicators Used:

  • Fibo Box V.2.01: Identifies the Fibonacci breakout box and associated levels
Fibonacci Box Breakout Forex Strategy

Trading Rules Of Fibonacci Box Breakout

Buy Setup:

  1. Place a pending order two pips above the top edge of the Fibonacci box.
  2. Set initial stop-loss at the lower box level or based on currency-specific parameters (e.g., EUR/USD – 15 pips, GBP/USD – 20 pips).
  3. Take profits at predetermined levels associated with the box or exit aggressively at the first level.
  4. Optional: If the price breaches levels two or three downwards, consider placing a pending buy reversal order at level 2 with profit at level 1 and the bottom margin of the box.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Sell Setup:

  1. Place a pending order two pips below the bottom edge of the Fibonacci box.
  2. Set initial stop-loss either at the upper box level or based on currency-specific parameters (e.g., EUR/USD – 15 pips, GBP/USD – 20 pips).
  3. Take profits at predetermined levels associated with the box or exit aggressively at the first level.
  4. Optional: If the price breaches levels two or three upwards, consider placing a pending sell reversal order at level 2 with profit at level 1 and the box’s top margin.

Additional Notes:

  • Avoid opening more positions on a currency pair after two consecutive spins, although this is optional.

Free Download Fibonacci Box Breakout Forex Strategy

Read More Trend Dominator Free Forex Strategy Download

Conclusion:

The Fibonacci Box Breakout Forex strategy offers traders a systematic approach to capitalize on intraday breakouts, leveraging Fibonacci levels for precise entry and exit points. Adhering to the outlined rules and incorporating optional reversal strategies can enhance their trading efficiency and profitability in the dynamic forex market.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/fibonacci-box-breakout-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 133993
Best Intraday Breakout Forex strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-intraday-breakout-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-intraday-breakout-forex-strategy/#respond Sun, 07 Apr 2024 18:42:13 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=133898 Intraday trading demands precision and a keen understanding of market direction. The Best Intraday Breakout Forex strategy offers a reliable method to decipher the day’s price movement, ensuring traders are positioned for success.

Key Components:

  • Time Frame: 15 minutes
  • Financial Markets: Forex, Indices
Intraday Breakout Forex strategy

Indicators Used:

  1. MA Parabolic st 2.1 (MA 14, Parabolic 0.1): Defines trend direction
  2. Price Action Channel (EMA 3 High – EMA 3 Low): Identifies price range
  3. T&C Wonders: Enhances trend analysis
  4. Breakout Box (Start 03:00 – End 18:00): Sets breakout parameters
  5. Breakout Daily Targets: Guides exit points
  6. ITM Signal (14, Cycle 5): Signals bullish or bearish momentum
  7. Flat Indicator: Indicates market conditions

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Execution:

  • Buy: Enter when the price breaks above the box within the price action channel. Confirm with a green ITM Signal, green Flat indicator, and price above the MA Parabolic.
  • Sell: Initiate a sell position as the price breaches below the box and stays within the price action channel. Confirm with a red ITM Signal, red Flat indicator, and price below the MA Parabolic.
  • Re-Entry: Optional, based on the same conditions as the initial entry.
  • Exit: Take profits at the daily targets. Set stop-loss orders at the previous swing high/low and adjust to breakeven with a 15-pip gain.
Best Intraday Breakout Forex strategy

Tips for Success:

  • Avoid entering trades after reaching the last daily target.
  • Focus on currency pairs exhibiting clear trends and trade aligning with the primary trend direction.

Mastering the Best Intraday Breakout strategy empowers traders to navigate intraday fluctuations confidently, positioning them for profitable trades in the dynamic forex market.

Free Download Best Intraday Breakout Forex strategy

Read More Ultra Blue Forex Trading Strategy Collection FREE Download

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/best-intraday-breakout-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 133898
Magic Breakout Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/education/magic-breakout-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/magic-breakout-forex-trading-strategy/#comments Thu, 04 Apr 2024 18:32:29 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=133810 Magic Breakout Forex Trading Strategy offers traders a unique opportunity to enter the market before the crowd, predicting breakouts precisely and confidently. This conservative yet profitable trading strategy is mechanical, providing traders with a systematic approach to capitalize on market momentum. In this article, we delve into the setup, entry rules, and practical implementation of Magic Breakout for optimal results in forex trading.

Why Magic Breakout Forex Trading Strategy?

  • Enter Before the Crowd: Predict breakouts before momentum traders arrive, giving you a competitive edge in the market.
  • Conservative Strategy: Minimize risk by adhering to simple rules and risking a small amount of capital on each trade.
  • Mechanical Approach: Trade mechanically by following predefined rules, eliminating guesswork and emotional biases.
  • Easy Implementation: Convince yourself that trading is easy by following the straightforward rules of Magic Breakout.
  • Profitability: Stick to the rules, and after a series of losing trades, you will eventually become profitable.
  • Scalability: Magic Breakout has become a cornerstone for top traders, offering scalability and the potential for significant returns.
Magic Breakout Forex Trading Strategy

Setup Strategy:

  • Time Frame: Suitable for time frames of 5 minutes or higher.
  • Currency Pairs: These can be applied to any currency pair.
  • Binary Options Expiry Time: Recommended expiry time of 3-5 candles.
  • Indicators: Utilize CCI 20 (Commodity Channel Index, Period 20, Typical Price) and The Wave (EMA34 High, Close, and Low).All These are Available for Free on MT4.

Entry Rules:

  1. Confirm Market Trend: Ensure the market is trending, using The Wave to determine trend direction.
  2. Price Positioning: Price should be above The Wave for a sustained period (for long entry) or below The Wave (for short entry).
  3. CCI Confirmation: CCI should cross above the +100 line for long entry or below the -100 line for short entry.
  4. Five Bars Check: Confirm that CCI was below the +100 line (for long) or above the -100 line (for short) for at least five bars before the cross.
  5. Execute Entry: If all the above conditions are met, execute a buy (for long) or sell (for short) trade as the new candle opens.
Breakout Forex Trading Strategy

Practical Implementation:

  • Follow the entry rules systematically, ensuring adherence to each criterion before trading.
  • Before entering a trade, verify market conditions, trend direction, and swing patterns.
  • Practice on demo accounts to familiarize yourself with the rules and gain confidence in executing trades.
  • Exit trades are made at predetermined targets or based on opposite signals, as per the rules outlined in the Magic Breakout Forex Trading Strategy.

Conclusion:

Magic Breakout Forex Trading Strategy gives traders a disciplined approach to capturing market momentum and identifying profitable trading opportunities. Following this article’s setup strategy, entry rules, and practical implementation guidelines, traders can navigate the forex market with precision and confidence, unlocking their profit potential with Magic Breakout.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/magic-breakout-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 6 133810
Binary Options Strategy: Bollinger Bands Breakout https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/binary-options-strategy-bollinger-bands-breakout/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/binary-options-strategy-bollinger-bands-breakout/#respond Fri, 15 Mar 2024 18:10:55 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=131842 The Bollinger Bands Breakout strategy for binary options is a powerful intraday trading technique centered around identifying breakouts of support and resistance levels. Renowned for its effectiveness and accuracy, this strategy offers traders ample opportunities for profitable trades within a relatively short time frame.

Timeframe and Expiry

  • Timeframe: 30 minutes
  • Expiry Time: 120 minutes

Forex Indicators

  • Bollinger Bands (20-period simple moving average, two standard deviations)
  • Show 1-2-3 indicator
Binary Options Strategy Bollinger Bands Breakout sell

Rules for Binary Options Strategy: Bollinger Bands Breakout

  1. Draw Support and Resistance Lines: Plot two lines—one at the level of the Rh High and another at the Rh Low.
  2. Buy Call:
  • When the price breaks above the Rh High line and closes above the upper Bollinger Band, initiate a buy call position at the opening of the next bar.
  1. Buy Put:
  • When the price breaks below the Rh Low line and closes below the lower Bollinger Band, open a buy put position at the opening of the next bar.
  1. Opening Two Positions:
  • Only consider opening two positions during the same breakout if the price retraces to the 20-period moving average.
Binary Options Strategy Bollinger Bands Breakout

Additional Tips:

  • Market Trend Consideration: Implementing this strategy in trending markets is advisable, particularly in the 4-hour and daily timeframes. This condition is crucial for maximizing profitability.

By adhering to these rules and incorporating market trend analysis, traders can effectively utilize the Bollinger Bands Breakout strategy to capitalize on intraday trading opportunities in the binary options market. Remember to practice risk management and remain disciplined in your trading approach to achieve consistent results.

Binary Options Strategy: Bollinger Bands Breakout Free Download

Read More Raptor MT4 Binary Strategy FREE Download

Credit to forexstrategiesresources

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/binary-options-strategy-bollinger-bands-breakout/feed/ 0 131842
The Asian Breakout Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/the-asian-breakout-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/the-asian-breakout-forex-trading-strategy/#comments Sat, 09 Mar 2024 17:59:19 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=131556 The Asian Breakout Forex Trading Strategy, also known as the Box Breakout Strategy, is a popular approach among traders seeking to capitalize on the price movements during the Asian trading session. In this comprehensive guide, we’ll delve into the intricacies of this strategy, including entry and exit points, risk management techniques, and practical tips for maximizing profits.

Timeframe and Pairs:

The Asian Breakout Forex trading strategy is most effective when applied to the 15-minute timeframe, making it ideal for intraday traders. It is suitable for trading major currency pairs exhibiting sufficient liquidity and volatility during the Asian session.

Indicators:

The primary indicator used in the Asian Breakout forex trading strategy is the Breakout Box Asian indicator. This indicator helps traders identify key price levels within the Asian session range, facilitating precise entry and exit points for trades.

Long Entry:

For long entry signals, traders should place a pending buy order approximately three pips above the top of the breakout box. The stop loss is set at 30 pips, while the take profit target is set at 60 pips. Once the trade is 20 pips in profit, adjusting the stop loss to breakeven is advisable to mitigate risk.

The Asian Breakout Forex Trading Strategy

Short Entry:

Conversely, traders should place a pending sell order around three pips below the bottom of the breakout box for short entry signals. The stop loss and take profit levels remain the same as in the long entry scenario. Adjusting the stop loss to breakeven once the trade is 20 pips in profit helps safeguard potential gains.

Free download The Asian Breakout Forex Trading Strategy System

Risk Management:

Effective risk management is essential when implementing the Asian Breakout strategy. Traders should adhere to strict stop loss and take profit levels to limit potential losses and lock in profits. Adjusting the stop loss to breakeven once the trade is profitable can help protect against unexpected reversals.

Practical Considerations:

To enhance the effectiveness of the Asian Breakout strategy, traders should consider the following practical tips:

  • Monitor economic news and events that may impact market volatility during the Asian session.
  • Avoid trading during low liquidity periods, such as market holidays or overlapping sessions.
  • Regularly review and adjust the breakout box parameters to adapt to changing market conditions.

Free download The Asian Breakout Forex Trading Strategy System

Read More Simple Breakout Forex Indicator MT4 Free Download

Conclusion:

The Asian Breakout Forex Trading Strategy offers traders a systematic approach to capitalizing on price movements during the Asian trading session. By employing precise entry and exit points and effective risk management techniques, traders can enhance their profitability and achieve consistent results in the forex market.

Credit to forexstrategiesresources

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/the-asian-breakout-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 3 131556
Super Trend – Forex Profit System FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/super-trend-forex-profit-system-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/super-trend-forex-profit-system-free-download/#comments Fri, 08 Mar 2024 17:53:54 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=131432 The Forex Profit system aims to harness the power of trends. This innovative trading tool is not just another indicator; the super trend system is a comprehensive system designed to predict price movements in advance, allowing traders to make informed decisions in the fast-paced trading environment.

The core of the Super Trend system lies in its unique approach to trend prediction. It utilizes custom trend indicators built on a special system that anticipates price movement, providing traders with a significant advantage. The system enhances its accuracy and reliability by incorporating an additional filter indicator. This filter is instrumental in refining the trading signals based on the direction formed by two key indicators: the daily open and weekly open levels. This dual-layered approach ensures that traders are only presented with the highest probability of trading opportunities.

This Forex Profit system is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This Super Trend strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Super Trend - Forex Profit System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set Forex Profit System to send you a signal alert. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This Super Trend System can be used on any currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts. But the system is made for time frames like 30M or H1.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for Forex Profit System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Forex Profit System.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • Trade Direction: Always trade in the direction of the overall trend as indicated by the daily and weekly trend indicators to maximize profits. Avoid trading against the trend.

Buy

  • Signal: Initiate a buy order when the price is above both the daily and weekly indicators.
  • Confirmation: The Super Trend Profit line turns Blue, displaying a “buy” text signal, confirming a shift in trend direction.

Sell

  • Signal: Initiate a sell order when the price is below both the daily and weekly indicators.
  • Confirmation: The Super Trend Profit line turns Red, displaying a “sell” text signal, indicating a confirmed change in the trend.

Exit Strategy

  • Trend Reversal: Exit the trade when the Super Trend Profit indicator signals a change in direction, hinting at a potential trend reversal.
  • Profit Targets: Traders may also choose to exit based on achieving predefined profit targets or reaching specific Fibonacci pivot levels, aligning with their risk management strategies.
  • Stop Loss: To manage risk effectively, the initial stop loss should be placed at the level of the previous swing. This safeguard protects against significant losses in volatile market conditions.

Click here if the download button doesn’t work

Conclusion of this Super Trend System

The Super Trend system stands out as a powerful ally for traders aiming to exploit market trends. With its advanced prediction capabilities and strategic trading rules, it offers a structured approach to achieving consistent trading success. Whether you’re a seasoned trader or just starting, integrating this system into your trading arsenal can significantly enhance your ability to navigate the complexities of the financial markets.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/super-trend-forex-profit-system-free-download/feed/ 2 131432
Binary Options Trading Strategy with the Hama Scalping System https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/binary-options-trading-strategy-with-hama/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/binary-options-trading-strategy-with-hama/#respond Sun, 03 Mar 2024 18:33:24 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=131347 Binary options trading offers exciting opportunities for traders to profit from short-term price movements in the financial markets. Binary Options Trading Strategy with The Hama Scalping System presents a dynamic strategy that leverages price action and indicators to execute high-probability trades. This comprehensive guide will explore how to effectively implement the Hama Scalping System for both High/Low and One Touch binary options trading.

Understanding the Hama Scalping System:

The Hama Scalping System is a versatile trading strategy based on the x3 Semafor indicator and FTI Hama system. It operates on timeframes of 5 minutes or 15 minutes, making it suitable for short-term trading. The core indicators used in this system include x3 Semafor, Kijun Tenkan, FTI Hama System, daily open line, simple moving average (11 periods), mini nail, Pivot points, and MACD Histogram.

Key Components of the Binary Options Trading Strategy:

  1. Market Selection: The Hama Scalping System can be applied to various currency pairs and markets, offering flexibility to traders.
  2. Entry Signals: For High/Low binary options, traders enter a Buy trade when the price is above the 200EMA and a Sell trade when the price is below the 200EMA.
  3. Short Entry Criteria: Look for a circle on the top (red or light blue) followed by the PA Tenkan line crossing down the moving average. Confirm the downtrend with the price below the red HAMA System and a red MACD Histogram.
  4. Long Entry Criteria: Identify a circle on the bottom (red or light blue) followed by the PA Tenkan line crossing up the moving average. Confirm the uptrend with the price below the blue HAMA System and a blue MACD Histogram.
Binary Options One Touch

Implementing the Strategy:

  1. Choose an appropriate timeframe (5 minutes or 15 minutes) for executing trades.
  2. Ensure the price is aligned with the 200EMA before initiating trades.
  3. Wait for the respective entry signals based on the short or long entry criteria.
  4. Set clear profit targets, aiming for the next pivot point levels.
  5. Manage risk by implementing stop-loss orders and adhering to proper position sizing.
Binary Options Strategy

Binary Options One Touch Strategy:

For One Touch binary options with a 240-minute expiry, traders can apply the same rules as the previous system. Profit targets can be set at the next pivot point levels to capitalize on price movements.

Binary Options Strategy with Hama Scalping System

Free download of the Binary Options Strategy with Hama Scalping System

Read More Simple Breakout Forex Indicator MT4 Free Download

Conclusion:

The Hama Scalping System offers a systematic approach to binary options trading, combining price action with robust indicators for enhanced decision-making. By following the outlined entry criteria and managing risk effectively, traders can maximize their chances of success in the dynamic world of binary options trading.

Credit to forexstrategiesresources

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/binary-options-trading-strategy-with-hama/feed/ 0 131347
Ultra Blue Forex Trading Strategy Collection FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ultra-blue-forex-trading-strategy-collection-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ultra-blue-forex-trading-strategy-collection-free-download/#comments Sun, 25 Feb 2024 20:07:12 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=130874 Ultra Blue Forex by Russ Horn offers a wide variety of simple but effective Forex Trading Strategy Collection. This article delves into the intricacies of the Ultra Blue systems and their associated strategies, offering insights into how traders can leverage these tools for improved market analysis and decision-making.

Ultra Blue Forex System: A Closer Look

At the heart of the Ultra Blue Forex system is a fusion of simple yet powerful indicators that serve as the foundation for multiple trading strategies. Each indicator within the system is crafted to provide clear, actionable insights, catering to a range of trading styles and preferences.

  • Ultra Blue Donchian Channel: This indicator is pivotal for identifying market volatility and price breakouts. Marking the highest high and the lowest low over a set period helps traders spot potential entry and exit points based on the price escaping these bounds.
  • Ultra Blue Dots: A modern twist on the moving average indicator, Ultra Blue Dots simplify the trading signals with red and green dots representing the moving average’s position relative to the price. This clarity in signaling, coupled with the indicator’s trade management utility, makes it an invaluable tool for traders.
  • Ultra Blue SRT: Automatically drawing support and resistance levels and trend lines, this indicator is a cornerstone for identifying market structure and potential reversal or continuation points.
  • Ultra Blue TRS: Enhancing trade timing, this indicator displays the remaining time for the current candle and the spread, adding a layer of decision-making support for entry and exit timing.
  • Moving Averages, Relative Strength Index (RSI), Moving Average of Oscillator: These classic indicators are the backbone of many strategies within the collection, providing a solid foundation for trend identification, momentum assessment, and market sentiment analysis.

This Trading Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Strategies within this Trading Strategy Collection

The Russ Horn Trading Strategy Collection encompasses a suite of strategies, each designed to cater to different trading objectives and market conditions:

  • Forex Cookbook: Ideal for beginners, this compilation of simple systems uses the basic set of indicators to introduce traders to the world of forex trading, offering a “quick reference guide” to effective trading.
  • Light Blue: Building on fundamental indicators like moving averages and RSI, Light Blue focuses on trend direction, setups, signals, stop-loss, and targets, offering a clear and straightforward approach to trading.
  • Deep Blue: An advanced iteration of Light Blue, Deep Blue introduces additional strategies and filters to enhance trading opportunities, reduce risks, and improve entry and exit timings.
  • Forex Fusion: This strategy integrates the Dots indicator with the original Ultra Blue template, offering two distinct trade types (Fusion Trade and Twisted Fusion) to maximize the quality and quantity of trades.
  • Forex Director: An add-on to the Ultra Blue systems, Forex Director aims to minimize incorrect trades through enhanced market analysis, offering new trading signals and reducing losing trades.
  • and more.

This is more than just a set of tools; it’s a comprehensive guide designed to elevate the trading experience. From the beginner-friendly Forex Cookbook to the advanced strategies of Deep Blue and Forex Fusion, the Ultra Blue Forex collection caters to traders at all levels of expertise. The Ultra Blue system and its associated strategies provide a foundation for sustained trading success in the forex market by emphasizing simplicity, adaptability, and a deep understanding of market dynamics.

Conclusion of Russ Horn System

The Russ Horn Trading Strategy Collection, with its comprehensive Ultra Blue system and associated strategies, stands as a testament to the power of combining simple indicators with strategic thinking. Whether you’re a novice trader seeking to understand the forex market or an experienced trader looking to refine your strategy, the Ultra Blue Forex collection offers a spectrum of tools designed to enhance decision-making, improve trade management, and navigate the forex market with greater agility and accuracy.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ultra-blue-forex-trading-strategy-collection-free-download/feed/ 1 130874
ATR Filter Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/atr-filter-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/atr-filter-strategy-free-download/#comments Sat, 10 Feb 2024 17:40:50 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=130182 This ATR Filter Strategy leverages a customized Average True Range (ATR) indicator designed to measure market volatility. It integrates it with trend-following indicators to filter and enhance trading signals.

The ATR Mastic is the customized indicator mentioned above. It is a specialized indicator that enhances the traditional ATR by incorporating two distinct histograms: the ATR fast and the ATR slow. This dual-histogram approach allows traders to gauge market volatility with greater accuracy. When the ATR fast histogram surpasses the slow histogram, it signals favorable market volatility conditions, making it an opportune time to consider market entry. The versatility of the ATR Mastic extends beyond the ATR Filter Strategy, as it can be effectively integrated into other trend-following strategies or used as a filter alongside various trend indicators.

This ATR Filter Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This ATR Indicator can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

ATR Filtered Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked

You can set ATR Filter System to send you a signal alert. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This ATR Filter Strategy can be used on any currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for ATR Filter Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this ATR Filter Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy

  • Ensure the price is above the Trender H indicator, confirming a bullish trend.
  • Optionally, the price should be above the Begashole trend indicator for added confirmation.
  • Look for the Barbarian buy arrow, indicating a potential upward movement.
  • The ATR Mastic Sc should display a green paint bar, signaling bullish market conditions.
  • The gold histogram of the ATR Mastic A should be greater than the blue histogram, reinforcing the buy signal.

Sell

  • Ensure the price is below the Trender H indicator, confirming a bearish trend.
  • Optionally, the price should be below the Begashole trend indicator for additional verification.
  • Look for Barbarian sell arrow, indicating a potential downward movement.
  • The ATR Mastic Sc should display a red paint bar, signaling bearish market conditions.
  • The gold histogram of the ATR Mastic A should surpass the blue histogram, validating the sell signal.

Exit Strategy

Exiting at the right moment is crucial, and this Free Forex Strategy provides clear guidelines for this:

  • Place the initial stop loss above or below the previous swing high or low, providing a safety net against market reversals.
  • Aim for a profit target with a stop loss ratio of 1:1.18, balancing risk and reward efficiently.
  • Consider securing profits by setting a modest profit target, thereby enhancing the strategy’s profitability through strategic stop loss placement.

Conclusion

By leveraging the ATR Mastic indicator, traders can identify high-probability entry points supported by a clear framework for managing exits and mitigating risk. As with any trading strategy, success requires practice, discipline, and a thorough understanding of market dynamics. The ATR Filter Strategy, with its focus on volatility and trends, presents a compelling option for traders seeking to optimize their trading outcomes in the ever-changing landscape of the financial markets.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/atr-filter-strategy-free-download/feed/ 1 130182
Trend Dominator Free Forex Strategy Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-dominator-free-forex-strategy-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-dominator-free-forex-strategy-download/#comments Sun, 04 Feb 2024 19:20:37 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=129886 Trend Dominator System is a Free Forex Strategy that blends simplicity and power. This trend-following system equips traders to harness daily market opportunities. At its core, the Forex Trend Dominator excels in deciphering market strengths and weaknesses, an attribute pivotal for informed decision-making.

Indicator in this Free Forex Strategy Explained

This Free Forex Strategy is composed of multiple indicators, each serving a unique purpose:

  1. Trend STR Dominator & Trend Filter Dominator: Positioned on the main chart, these indicators are instrumental in signaling trend shifts. The Trend Filter Dominator doubles as a support and resistance marker, guiding traders as candle prices interact with the trend line.
  2. Trend Strength Finder Dominator: This is your go-to indicator for action-taking. It gauges the vitality of the trend, ensuring your moves align with market momentum.
  3. Flat Trend Dominator & Trend MA Cross Dominator: These indicators are critical for entry confirmation. Not only do they validate your trading moves, but they also serve as primary signals for exiting trades.

This Free Forex Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Forex Trend Dominator Indicator can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Free Forex Strategy Download ForexCracked.com

You can set Forex Trend Dominator System to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, platform pop-ups, and Email. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This Free Forex Strategy can be used on any currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for Forex Trend Dominator System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Forex Trend Dominator System.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy

  • Trend Strength Finder Dominator turns Blue.
  • The Flat Trend Dominator draws a Blue bar.
  • Trend MA Cross Dominator draws a Blue bar.
  • Trend STR Dominator main chart line transitions to Blue.
  • Trend Filter Dominator main chart line turns Green.

Sell

  • Trend Strength Finder Dominator turns Red.
  • The Flat Trend Dominator draws a Red bar.
  • Trend MA Cross Dominator draws a Red bar.
  • Trend STR Dominator main chart line switches to Red.
  • Trend Filter Dominator main chart line becomes Maroon.

Exit Strategy

Exiting at the right moment is crucial, and this Free Forex Strategy provides clear guidelines for this:

  • Terminate trades when both the Trend STR Dominator and Flat TrendDominator align by drawing Red bars for buy positions and Blue bars for sell positions.
  • A trailing stop is recommended, though its specifics hinge on the time frame.
  • Place the stop loss at the preceding swing high or low to safeguard your trades.

Conclusion

With Its carefully crafted indicators and straightforward trading rules, Forex Trend Dominator empowers traders, whether novice or seasoned, to identify trends, make informed decisions, and secure their positions. As with any trading strategy, success hinges on understanding, discipline, and consistent application of the system’s principles. With these elements in place, This Free Forex Strategy can be a valuable asset in any trader’s arsenal.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-dominator-free-forex-strategy-download/feed/ 1 129886
Triple Confirmation MT5 Forex Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/triple-confirmation-mt5-forex-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/triple-confirmation-mt5-forex-strategy-free-download/#comments Thu, 25 Jan 2024 19:27:42 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=129454 Triple Confirmation Strategy is an MT5 Forex strategy that relies on price action momentum and multi-layer confirmation. This strategy, designed for the MetaTrader 5 platform, emphasizes the importance of volatility signals, trend momentum indicators, and the crucial role of support and resistance in determining trade entries.

At the heart of the Triple Confirmation strategy is a volatility arrow, which acts as the primary signal for potential trades. However, the uniqueness of this strategy lies in its requirement for three separate confirmations, ensuring that each trade is in harmony with the overall price action and market trend. This approach significantly enhances the reliability of the trading signals, aiming for high profitability, especially in highly volatile markets such as certain forex currency pairs and major cryptocurrencies.

This MT5 Forex Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Main Chart of the Triple Confirmation Strategy

Triple Confirmation Strategy employs a set of specialized MT5 indicators, each contributing to the decision-making process:

  • Color Trend (Paint Bar): Visualizes the prevailing market trend, aiding in immediate recognition of market conditions.
  • Support and Resistance Zone: Identifies key areas where the price may experience significant pushback or breakthrough.
  • Spike Indicator: Provides the primary volatility arrow signal, indicating potential entry points.
  • Accelerator: Measures acceleration or deceleration of the market momentum.
  • Parabolic Sar: Helps in confirming the trend direction and potential reversals.
  • Awesome Oscillator: Evaluates the market momentum and confirms the strength of the trend.
Triple Confirmation Forex Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

This MT5 Forex Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Triple Confirmation Strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for this MT5 Forex Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this MT5 Forex Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy Entry

  • The price should be above the identified support zone.
  • The Spike indicator should display a Blue buy arrow.
  • Three out of the following confirmations must be met:
    • Parabolic Sar is positioned below the candle.
    • Color Trend indicates a Blue paint bar.
    • Awesome Oscillator shows a Green bar.
    • The Accelerator displays a Green bar.

Sell Entry

  • The price should be below the identified support zone.
  • The Spike indicator should display a Red sell arrow.
  • Three out of the following confirmations must be met:
    • Parabolic Sar is positioned above the bar.
    • Color Trend indicates a Red paint bar.
    • Awesome Oscillator shows a Red bar.
    • The Accelerator displays a Red bar.

Trade Exist

Setting an appropriate exit strategy is crucial. The initial stop loss should be placed just below or above the support and resistance zone, depending on the trade’s direction. Profit targets can be set with a minimum ratio stop loss of 1:1 or closed at the appearance of an opposite arrow from the Spike indicator.

For traders inclined towards more aggressive strategies, the combination of the Spike, Parabolic Sar, and one additional confirmation can also be effective, especially in trending markets. However, it’s worth noting that even with faster settings, indicators like the Parabolic Sar might occasionally lag behind the Awesome Oscillator and Accelerator.

Conclusion

The Triple Confirmation Strategy offers a structured and layered approach to trading, significantly enhancing the probability of successful trades. By requiring multiple confirmations and aligning with the overall price action, it provides a disciplined framework for traders aiming to navigate the volatile forex landscapes. As with any MT5 Forex Strategy, it’s crucial for traders to backtest and adapt the approach to their individual risk tolerance and trading style.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/triple-confirmation-mt5-forex-strategy-free-download/feed/ 3 129454
Forex Destructor FREE MT4 Strategy Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-destructor-free-mt4-strategy-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-destructor-free-mt4-strategy-download/#comments Tue, 16 Jan 2024 20:14:08 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=129073 Forex Destructor is a FREE MT4 Strategy with a Trade Management Panel for MT4 that gives NON-Repaint buy/sell signals. This article explores the intricate workings of the Forex Destructor Strategy, highlighting its primary features, benefits, and the innovative Position Size Calculator and MT4 Trade Panel.

At its core, the Forex Destructor Strategy is a manual trading system that primarily focuses on detecting and capitalizing on both major and minor trends in the forex market. The foundation of this strategy lies in its adherence to trend-following principles. What sets it apart is its innovative use of visual aids: color-coded dots and dual bands (red and green) that dynamically align with market prices.

Key Features of Forex Destructor

  1. Color-Coded Entry Points: The strategy utilizes green and red dots to signal potential entry points. A green dot represents a potential long or buy opportunity, whereas a red dot suggests a short or sell signal.
  2. Red and Green Bands: These bands are a distinctive feature of the Forex Destructor Strategy. The red band positioned above the green band signals a bearish market trend, while the inverse positioning (green above red) indicates a bullish trend.
  3. User-Friendly Interface: Designed to cater to traders of varying experience levels, the strategy offers an intuitive and easy-to-navigate interface.
  4. Trade Management Panel: This Position Size Calculator and MT4 Trade Panel tool automatically calculate the lot size based on predefined stop loss, take profit, and money management settings. Allows traders to set their trade specifics like lot size, stop loss, take profit, trailing stop, etc., enabling quicker trade execution with just a single click.

This Forex Destructor System is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This FREE MT4 Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Forex Destructor Indicator Download ForexCracked.com

You can set Forex Destructor Indicator to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, platform pop-ups, and Email. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This FREE MT4 Strategy can be used on any currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts.

Position Size Calculator and MT4 Trade Panel FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Position Size Calculator and MT4 Trade Panel

A standout feature of the Forex Destructor Strategy is its “Position Size Calculator and MT4 Trade Panel.” This tool significantly streamlines the trading process:

  • Auto-Calculate Position Size: It automatically calculates the precise lot size for each trade based on the set stop loss size and account equity. For instance, if you opt to risk 1% per trade, the tool adjusts the lot size to ensure that a hit to the stop loss will not exceed this percentage.
  • Trade Directly from the Chart: It allows traders to preset trade details such as lot size, stop loss, take profit, breakeven point, and trailing stop, enabling faster trade execution with a single click.
  • Efficient Trade Execution: With this tool, trades can be executed up to 10 times faster, significantly increasing trading efficiency.
  • Straddle Pending Orders for Price Breakouts: The tool is capable of creating straddle pending orders, placing both BUY STOP and SELL STOP automatically. This feature is particularly useful for breakout and news traders, as it allows for quick adjustment to sudden market movements.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for this FREE MT4 Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this FREE MT4 Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility conditions, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • Entry Rules: Trades are initiated based on the appearance of the color-coded dots, supported by trend analysis via the red and green bands.
  • Exit Strategy: Any positions with this Indicator can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support, resistance, or high-low levels as a reference point. You may also exit the trade manually if the system conditions reverse (the opposite signal appears). It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL below the entry price using previous support/resistance as a reference point Or on the previous high/low swing. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

Conclusion

The Forex Destructor Strategy, with its innovative approach and advanced trading tools like the Position Size Calculator and MT4 Trade Panel, offers a comprehensive solution for forex traders. This FREE MT4 Strategy not only simplifies trading decisions but also enhances efficiency and accuracy, making it a valuable asset for traders looking to navigate the complexities of the forex market effectively. However, traders must remain vigilant about market risks and maintain sound risk management practices.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-destructor-free-mt4-strategy-download/feed/ 2 129073
Raptor MT4 Binary Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/raptor-mt4-binary-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/raptor-mt4-binary-strategy-free-download/#comments Wed, 10 Jan 2024 19:09:43 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=128807 The Raptor MT4 Binary Strategy is an innovative approach to trading in the binary options and forex markets. This strategy focuses on identifying the best entry points for quick trades and leveraging the dynamic RSI with bands. It is a price action strategy that is trend reversal-based. It’s designed to adapt to the swift movements and trends of the financial markets, making it a versatile tool for traders.

Key Indicators of this MT4 Binary Strategy

  1. Dynamic RSI with Bands: At the core of this MT4 Binary Strategy is the Relative Strength Index (RSI), which is modified to include bands, providing clear indicators for trend reversals.
  2. Smooth Moving Average: This component helps confirm the RSI signal, ensuring that the trade aligns with the overall market trend.
  3. Accelerator Oscillator: The strategy can be supplemented with the B. Williams Accelerator for traders who prefer additional confirmation.
  4. Support and Resistance Indicator: This indicator is crucial for identifying significant price levels where the market might experience turns or pauses, enhancing entry and exit decision accuracy.

Raptor Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward.

MT4 Binary Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

MT4 Binary Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Raptor Strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-hour charts. It works best on M1 or M5 timeframes.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Raptor Strategy Trading rules

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Raptor Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • Time Frame
    • For Forex: Using a timeframe of 5 minutes or higher is recommended, with higher time frames yielding better results.
    • For Binary Options: The optimal timeframe is between 5 to 15 minutes. We recommend Deriv for binary options.
  • Expiry Time
    • Advised to set the expiry time to 5 candles or bars, aligning with the chosen time frame.
  • Buy or Call Strategy
    • The moving average turns green.
    • The RSI displays a green buy arrow.
    • Optionally, confirmation from the Accelerator.
  • Sell or Put Strategy
    • The moving average turns red.
    • The RSI displays a red sell arrow.
    • Optionally, confirmation from the Accelerator.
  • Exit position
    • Predetermined Profit Target and Stop Loss: A minimum ratio of 1:1.15 is recommended to maintain a balanced risk-reward scenario.
    • Support Resistance Line: The profit target is set at the level of the support resistance line.
    • Swing High Low: The stop loss is positioned at the previous swing high or low, with the option to move the stop loss as the market fluctuates.

Conclusion

The Raptor MT4 Binary Strategy is a powerful tool for traders seeking to capitalize on market trends and reversals. Its combination of dynamic RSI with bands, smooth moving average, and optional B. Williams Accelerator makes it a robust strategy. With clear rules for buying, selling, and exiting trades, it’s designed to help traders make informed decisions while managing risks effectively. Whether you’re trading binary options or in the forex market, the Raptor Strategy offers a structured approach to achieving your trading goals.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/raptor-mt4-binary-strategy-free-download/feed/ 6 128807
Forex Holy Grail Indicator – Golden Eagle System FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-holy-grail-indicator-golden-eagle-system-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-holy-grail-indicator-golden-eagle-system-free-download/#comments Sun, 07 Jan 2024 22:08:45 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=128656 The Forex Holy Grail System is a collection of indicators that aim to identify market reversals and trends using various methods, primarily based on volume analysis and W.D. Gann’s mathematical formulas for time and price predictions. This comprehensive suite of tools is designed to aid traders in making informed decisions in the forex market. Golden Eagle System caters to various trading styles, including scalping, day trading, and long-term trading.

Indicators of the Forex Holy Grail Indicator System

  1. Forex Holy Grail Indicator – The Forex Holy Grail indicator is at the core of the system, inspired by W.D. Gann’s methods. It predicts market reversals by identifying time clusters using past market data and mathematical projections. It incorporates support and resistance levels derived from Gann’s theories to enhance its accuracy, aiming to offer precise entry and exit points.
  2. Golden Eagle v4 This tool leverages volume analysis to detect potential market reversals. It highlights significant price movement during specific periods and identifies support and resistance levels based on volume. The indicator signals buying or selling opportunities through green and red arrows. While highly accurate, the golden eagle system acknowledges the unpredictability of market strength, especially during news-driven movements.
  3. Holy Arrows – This indicator focuses on volume analysis and trend direction, providing signals in line with the ongoing trend and the emerging price cycles. It benefits traders looking to align with the market’s direction and is effective for scalping on lower time frames.
  4. Holy Trend – As a trend indicator, Holy Trend is designed to display the prevailing trend in the current timeframe, aiding traders in staying aligned with the overall market direction and optimizing entry points.
  5. Holy Oscillator – This tool functions as a typical oscillator with levels indicating overbought or oversold zones. It’s beneficial for identifying potential reversals and can be used alongside trend strategies to pinpoint optimal entry points with tight stop losses.
  6. Holy Volume – Unlike ordinary volume indicators, Holy Volume aims to predict price reversals by detecting shifts in buying and selling volume. It uses green and red candles to represent buying and selling volume, respectively, with the size indicating the reversal strength. This tool is handy for confirming entries in the direction of the primary price cycle and identifying the end-of-price corrections.

This Forex Holy Grail Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This Golden Eagle System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Golden Eagle System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set the Forex Holy Grail System to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, platform pop-ups, and Email. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Golden Eagle System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for Golden Eagle System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Golden Eagle System.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

The Forex Holy Grail System offers multiple trading methods, each detailed in the system’s manual with examples for clarity. Here are brief overviews of three primary trading setups:

Trading Method A

  • Indicators Used: Golden Eagle v4, Holy Oscillator, and Holy Volume
  • Objective: Detect the formation of a new medium wave and capitalize on the movement until the target profit (TP) is hit or signs of wave change are evident.
  • Strategy: This setup focuses on catching the beginning of a new trend wave and involves two types of Stop Loss for different risk levels. Unlike other setups, it doesn’t rely on the HolyTrend indicator, as it aims to predict the wave’s initiation rather than follow an established trend.

Trading Method B

  • Indicators Used: Holy Arrows (optionally Holy Trend for extra confirmation), Holy Oscillator (for SL and TP calculations)
  • Objective: Ideal for scalping and day trading, particularly in established trends on lower time frames like M5 or M15.
  • Strategy: This method leverages the Holy Arrows for signal generation, possibly incorporating Holy Trend for additional confirmation. The Holy Oscillator is utilized to set Stop Loss and Take Profit levels. The focus is on quick, small trades aligned with the current trend.

Trading Method C

  • Indicators Used: Golden Eagle v4, Holy Arrows, and Holy Volume
  • Objective: Aimed at trading along with the main wave for larger profits and extended moves, not for scalping.
  • Strategy: Traders look to follow the direction indicated by the last Golden Eagle v4 signal, seeking out corresponding Holy Arrows and using Holy Volume for additional confirmation. Stop Loss is set using the previous highs or lows the Holy Oscillator indicates. The position is closed either at the appearance of the first opposite volume bar or an opposite Holy Arrow signal, aiming for substantial price moves.

These trading methods provide structured approaches to utilizing the golden eagle system, catering to different trading styles and objectives. Each method involves a detailed understanding and application of specific indicators to make informed trading decisions. Traders are encouraged to refer to the detailed manual with the system for comprehensive guidelines and examples of each trading strategy.

Conclusion

In conclusion, the Forex Holy Grail System is a comprehensive and versatile trading toolkit, incorporating a variety of indicators and methods inspired by W.D. Gann’s principles and volume analysis. Different setups catering to various trading styles and objectives offer traders the flexibility to navigate the forex market with improved precision and strategy. While it enhances trading potential, users should integrate these tools within a disciplined risk management and trading strategy to effectively navigate the inherent risks of forex trading.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-holy-grail-indicator-golden-eagle-system-free-download/feed/ 1 128656
Ribbon Explosion Trend Momentum Strategy for MT5 FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ribbon-explosion-trend-momentum-strategy-for-mt5-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ribbon-explosion-trend-momentum-strategy-for-mt5-free-download/#comments Tue, 26 Dec 2023 21:05:04 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=128194 Ribbon Explosion Strategy is a Trend Momentum Strategy for MT5 that is free to download. This strategy’s core lies in its filter system, designed to sieve out as many false signals as possible, allowing traders to engage only with strong, trend-confirming trades.

At its heart, the strategy employs a set of indicators that self-filter, combining the elements of trend determination and momentum measurement. These indicators work together to create a visual “ribbon” of moving averages or similar trend lines, which expand during periods of strong trend and contract during market consolidation, hence the term “Ribbon Explosion.” Traders look for moments when this ribbon widens, indicating a strong trend, and then apply momentum indicators to ensure the movement’s strength and direction are reliable.

The purpose of the Ribbon Explosion is straightforward: to keep the trader aligned with the market trend while avoiding the noise and false signals that can lead to losses. By operating only in trend, the strategy aims to increase the probability of successful trades, which translates into a higher ratio of profitable operations.

In the Ribbon Explosion Strategy, the filter system is designed explicitly around trading in the direction of the main trend. The strategy dictates the price above/below the ribbon cloud, indicates an overall bullish/bearish market. A MACD and the PTL further confirm this. These conditions together provide a strong, multi-layered confirmation for entering a trade.

This trend momentum strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Main Chart of the Ribbon Explosion Strategy

The ribbon explosion strategy core involves a set of specific indicators that together form a robust filter system for entry signals:

  1. Ribbon Cloud: This visual represents multiple moving averages forming a cloud/ribbon on the chart. When the price is above this ribbon cloud, it’s considered a bullish signal; when it is below the ribbon cloud, it’s seen as bearish.
  2. MACD: The Moving Average Convergence Divergence (MACD) is a trend-following momentum indicator that shows the relationship between two exponential moving averages (EMAs). It is used in a color-coded format, where a green bar suggests bullish momentum and a red bar indicates bearish momentum. This provides a clear visual cue for the trader regarding the current momentum and trend of the market.
  3. Trix Oscillator: The Triple Exponential Moving Average (TRIX) is a powerful technical analysis tool designed to help traders determine the momentum of a price and identify overbought and oversold conditions in an underlying financial asset. Here, it is used for its signal arrows – a buy arrow to indicate upward momentum and a sell arrow for downward momentum. It acts as a confirmation for the trade direction, ensuring that the trend is in favor and the short-term momentum.
  4. PTL Indicator: The Perfect Trend indicator (PTL) displays points on the chart along with trend lines. These points act as entry and exit points. The dots consist of two colors: Red and Blue. When a Red dot appears, it is a sell signal, while a blue dot indicates a buy signal. Blue indicates bullish momentum, and Red indicates bearish momentum.
Ribbon Explosion Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

The Ribbon Explosion Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This strategy for MT5 can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for this Trend Momentum Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Trend Momentum Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • Trade only in the direction of the main trend: This is determined by the 200-period Exponential Moving Average (EMA). If the price is above the 200 EMA, the overall trend is considered up, and only buy trades are recommended. Conversely, if the price is below the 200 EMA, the trend is down, and traders should look for sell opportunities.

Buy Entry

  • Price above ribbon cloud: Indicates that the immediate trend is also bullish.
  • MACD Color green bar: Suggests that the momentum favors buying.
  • Trix oscillator blue buy arrow: Provides a specific buy signal.
  • PTL blue buy direction below the price: Further confirms the bullish trend.

Sell Entry

  • Price below ribbon cloud: Indicates that the immediate trend is also bearish.
  • MACD Color red bar: Suggests that the momentum favors selling.
  • Trix oscillator red sell arrow: Provides a specific sell signal.
  • PTL red sell direction above the price: Further confirms the bearish trend.

Trade Exist

  • Place initial stop loss below/above the previous swing high/low: This helps protect the trade against sudden market reversals.
  • Make profit at opposite PTL signal: Traders are advised to close the position when the PTL indicates a trend reversal.
  • Make a profit when the price closes below/above the cloud ribbon: This suggests that the immediate trend is weakening and might be a good time to take profits.

Conclusion of this Strategy for MT5

In conclusion, this strategy for MT5 offers a sophisticated yet accessible approach for those looking to trade trends in the forex market. With its focus on trend and momentum indicators and a filter system, it aims to increase the frequency of profitable trades while minimizing exposure to false signals. However, as with all trading strategies, it requires practice, patience, and a good understanding of the market dynamics to be used effectively.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/ribbon-explosion-trend-momentum-strategy-for-mt5-free-download/feed/ 2 128194
Trend Action Binary Option Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-action-binary-option-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-action-binary-option-strategy-free-download/#respond Wed, 06 Dec 2023 19:23:57 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=127289 This Binary option strategy is a trend action strategy that gives NON-Repaint(arrows) buy/sell signals. This setup will suit scalping, day trading, multi-day trading, and binary options. This strategy hinges on the ability to identify and respond to key price levels and trends, using a combination of analytical tools to make informed trading decisions.

Understanding the Trend Action Strategy

The essence of the trend action strategy lies in its focus on trend-following signals, primarily filtered through significant price levels. These levels are not arbitrary but are identified using specific strategy tools that gauge the market’s reaction to them. The strategy employs two critical indicators to pinpoint these price levels:

  1. Support and Resistance Levels: This tool involves marking out price points where the market has historically shown a reaction. These levels are further numbered based on the frequency of the market’s response in the recent past.
  2. Sniper Market Indicator: This second tool identifies levels based on higher buying or selling pressure areas.

Traders have the flexibility to use these tools either in tandem or individually. However, it is observed that signals tend to be more reliable when an area demonstrates multiple verifications coupled with medium or strong buying/selling indications.

This Binary Option Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward.

Trend Action Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Trend Action Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set the binary option strategy to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, platform pop-ups, and Email. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Trend action strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-hour charts. It works best on M1 or M5 timeframes.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Binary Option Strategy Trading rules

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Binary Option Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • Identifying Important Levels
    • The important levels are medium, strong (buyers and sellers), and verified zone.
    • An important price zone is when medium and strong coincide with verified levels.
  • Buy or Call Strategy
    • Wait for the price to rebound from a significant level.
    • Look for a ‘Buy’ arrow above a crucial support level from the Binary code indicator.
    • Enter the trade at the opening of the next candle.
  • Sell or Put Strategy
    • Similarly, wait for a price rebound but from a resistance level.
    • An arrow ‘Sell’ from the Binary code indicator below a significant resistance level signals an entry point.
    • The trade is entered at the opening of the next candle.

Exit position

For Forex traders using this trend action strategy, exit positions are guided by setting an initial stop loss below or above the identified levels. The profit target is typically set using a stop-loss ratio of 1:1.4 or is determined by the next support or resistance level.

For binary traders, set the expiration time to 3-5 candles. We recommend Deriv for binary options.

Conclusion

The Trend Action Strategy offers a structured and analytical approach to trading, particularly appealing to those who favor trend following and price level strategies. By combining support and resistance levels with the Sniper Market indicator, traders can enhance the reliability of their trading signals. As with any binary option strategy, it’s crucial for traders to understand the tools and rules involved thoroughly and to apply them consistently for optimal results.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-action-binary-option-strategy-free-download/feed/ 0 127289
Gold Sniper Master Indicator System FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/gold-sniper-master-indicator-system-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/gold-sniper-master-indicator-system-free-download/#comments Sun, 17 Sep 2023 14:58:20 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=118486 Gold Sniper Master Indicator, primarily designed for trading gold but equally adept for other asset classes and currency pairs like US30 and NASDAQ. In this article, we delve into the nuanced features of this MT4-based trading system and explore why it could be the game-changer you’ve been searching for.

  • Pairs Supported: Primary trading on GOLD and secondary trading on US30 and NASDAQ.
  • Optimal Timeframe: M15
  • Trading Sessions: Differentiated by color-coding: Blue for the European session, Yellow for the US session, and Purple for the overlap between the two.

One of the strongest suits of the Gold Sniper Master Indicator is its capability to adapt to different trading sessions. Understanding that the market is never static and constantly evolving, the indicator uses session-specific strategies to optimize its function.

  • Blue symbolizes the European session
  • Yellow indicates the US session
  • Purple marks the intersection between the European and the US sessions

The Gold Sniper Master Indicator’s golden hour comes into play particularly during the US session, especially when the Purple and Yellow sessions overlap. This is typically between 8 AM and 4 PM NY Time.

This Gold Sniper Master System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Gold Sniper Master Strategy REE Download ForexCracked.com

The Gold Sniper Master Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

The Gold Sniper Master Indicator combines the best aspects of different currency trading strategies into a single, user-friendly interface. Integrated within the MT4 trading system, its performance and efficiency are further boosted, streamlining the trading process.

Gold Sniper Master Trading System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, But it works best on M5, M15, and M30.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for Gold Sniper Master Indicator

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Gold Sniper Master Indicator.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

To maximize the benefits of the Gold Sniper Master Indicator, adhere to the following trading rules:

  • Timing: Limit your trading activities to the European (Blue zone) and American (Yellow zone) sessions.
  • Entry Zones: Make deals only from the Oversold Zone for Buy (dotted Blue line set) and Overbought Zone for Sell (dotted Red line set).
  • Confirmation:
    • SELL when a Purple arrow and Yellow dot confirm
    • BUY when a Blue arrow and Blue dot confirm

Additional Notes:

  1. Open trade only when both an Arrow and Dot sign appear.
  2. Ideal entries are when prices are in the overbought or oversold areas.
  3. Make sure to set Take Profit and Stop Loss.
  4. Optionally, use other indicators for additional confirmation.
  5. For reduced risk, always trade following the trend.

Conclusion

Choosing the Gold Sniper Master Indicator can indeed prove to be a masterstroke for traders looking for a reliable, straightforward, and efficient trading system. Beyond its primary function of gold trading, the indicator adapts seamlessly to other asset classes, making it an indispensable tool in a trader’s arsenal. Whether you are a novice trader or a seasoned veteran, the Gold Sniper Master Indicator promises a lucrative trading journey.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/gold-sniper-master-indicator-system-free-download/feed/ 5 118486
Big Bull MT5 Trend Following Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/big-bull-mt5-trend-following-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/big-bull-mt5-trend-following-strategy-free-download/#comments Wed, 09 Aug 2023 18:40:36 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=91420 Big Bull System is a Trend Following Strategy for MT5 that is free to download. What makes this MT5 Trend Following system special is its combination of trend-following techniques with the supply and demand indicator. In this article, we will delve deep into its mechanics and its suitability for different types of traders.

The Super Big Bull Strategy emphasizes trading in the direction of the trend while simultaneously taking into account critical levels of support and resistance. By integrating these aspects, traders get a more holistic view of the market, which can lead to more informed trading decisions.

Whether you’re just starting out or have years of experience, this strategy is flexible and intuitive enough for traders of all levels.

Indicators Used in this Trend Following Strategy

The system uses several indicators, including the BIGBULL CANDLES, BIGBULL PTL, BIGBULL Ribbons, BIGBULL JMA, BIGBULL BARS, BIGBULL DOT, BIGBULL Histogram, and the supply and demand indicator. These indicators work together to help traders discern the correct market direction near support and resistance zones.

These are the main indicators used in this Trend Following Strategy to determine entries. But the system does come with an additional indicator, so you can experiment with filtering the signals further.

  1. EMA (50 and 200 Exponential Moving Average, Close): A widely used tool to determine the strength and direction of the trend.
  2. BIGBULL CANDLES: This modifies the chart candle colors to resonate with the moving average convergence divergence, providing visual ease to identify potential market trends.
  3. BIGBULL PTL (Perfect Trend Line Indicator): A reflection of the highest high and lowest low over two different periods. Based on these values, a subsequent trend is derived, helping traders identify potential breakout or breakdown scenarios.
  4. BIGBULL Ribbons: This innovative tool uses the “speed” attribute of the EMA variation indicator to construct a ribbon, thus facilitating the identification of potential crossovers without modifying the calculation period.
  5. BIGBULL JMA: A unique aspect of the Jurik Moving Average (JMA) is its adaptive nature, meaning it adjusts according to market volatility. The Super Big Bull Strategy adds another layer of adaptability by incorporating the Average True Range (ATR). This double adaptation, especially during high volatility periods, provides traders with a more responsive tool to market changes.

This Big Bull System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

MT5 Trend Following Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

The Trend Following Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

MT5 Trend Following Trading System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, But it works best on M5, M15, and M30.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for Big Bull System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Big Bull System.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy Entry

  • Support Bounce: Ensure the price is bouncing off a support level. This suggests potential upward momentum as demand exceeds supply at these levels.
  • PLT Signal: Wait for the PLT to display a GREEN buy dot, indicating bullishness.
  • Ribbon Confirmation: Ribbon 1 should be above Ribbon 2. This shows that the short-term momentum is bullish compared to the longer-term momentum.
  • ATR JMA Indicator: Ensure the ATR JMA displays a GREEN line, which signifies bullish market conditions.
  • BIGBULL Bar Confirmation: The BIGBULL Bar value should be greater than 0, confirming the bullish sentiment.

Sell Entry

  • Resistance Bounce: Observe if the price bounces off a resistance level. This indicates potential downward momentum, as supply is exceeding demand at these levels.
  • PLT Signal: The PLT should exhibit a RED sell dot, indicating bearishness.
  • Ribbon Confirmation: Ribbon 1 should be below Ribbon 2. This means the short-term momentum is bearish compared to the longer-term momentum.
  • ATR JMA Indicator: The ATR JMA should have a RED line, signifying bearish market conditions.
  • BIGBULL Bar Confirmation: The BIGBULL Bar value should be less than 0, reaffirming the bearish sentiment.

Trade Exist

Exiting a trade is just as important as entering one. It’s crucial to know when to take profits or cut losses to maintain a profitable trading strategy.

  1. Stop Loss Placement: Initially, place the stop loss just above (for sell trades) or below (for buy trades) the support or resistance zone. This ensures you’re out of the trade if the market goes against your position.
  2. Profit Targets:
    • Opposite Zone: Book profits before the price reaches the opposite zone (i.e., before reaching resistance in a buy trade or support in a sell trade).
    • Risk-to-Reward Ratio: Aim for a profit target that gives you a risk-to-reward ratio of 1:1.7. This ensures that you’re earning more than you’re risking.
    • Ribbon Change: If Ribbon 1 changes its direction, consider it a signal to book profits.

Conclusion of MT5 Trend Following System

This MT5 Trend Following System offers a balanced mix of trend identification, momentum detection, and crucial market levels’ recognition. Its multi-faceted approach, combining various technical indicators, gives traders a comprehensive tool to navigate the markets confidently.

However, like any strategy, it’s essential to back-test, practice, and understand the nuances before committing to real capital. Every trader’s risk appetite and trading style are different, so it’s crucial to adapt the strategy to one’s own trading preferences and not rely solely on any single method. Happy trading!

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/big-bull-mt5-trend-following-strategy-free-download/feed/ 3 91420
King IQ Option Indicator System FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/king-iq-option-indicator-system-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/king-iq-option-indicator-system-free-download/#comments Mon, 03 Jul 2023 19:29:18 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=88882 King IQ Indicator is an IQ Option Indicator System that gives easy-to-use buy/sell signals. According to the developer, this system provides signals for binary options trading with an astounding 90% accuracy.

In the world of trading, a non-repainting indicator is one that, once formed, doesn’t change its values. The King IQ Option Indicator System is a non-repainting indicator. Its predictions, once made, are final, providing traders with reliable data that won’t alter after the fact. This feature significantly increases the system’s reliability and enhances the trader’s confidence in its predictions.

While the IQ Option Indicator was initially designed for binary options trading, its usability extends far beyond. Traders can also effectively use this tool across all financial markets, including forex, indices, and cryptocurrency markets. Its flexibility and accuracy make it a valuable asset for diversifying their portfolios and exploring new trading opportunities.

The system is suitable for 1-minute or higher time frames for binary trading and 15 minutes or higher for forex trading. Expiry time for binary options high/low is a 1-Minute chart is desirable for a 5-minute expiration.

This King IQ Indicator System is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward.

This IQ Option Trading System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Indicators Used in this King IQ Indicator System

  • King IQ SIGNAL
  • King IQ GMT
  • King IQ SET
King IQ Indicator System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set this King IQ Indicator System to send you a signal alert. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

King IQ Trading System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minutes through to the 1-Hour charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

IQ Option Indicator System Trading rules

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this IQ Option Indicator System.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • Don’t trade against the trend.
  • In the European session, trade on – EURUSD/ GBPUSD/ USDCHF/ EURJPY/ GBPJPY
  • In the American session, trade on – USDCAD/ EURJPY/ GBPCHF/ GBPJPY/ USDCHF
  • A 1-Minute chart is desirable for a 5-minute expiration.

Buy or Call signal

  • Upward GREEN Arrow appears.
  • King IQ GMT is GREEN.
  • King IQ SET line turns GREEN after touching or crossing upward level 20.

Sell or Put signal

  • Downward RED Arrow appears.
  • King IQ GMT is RED.
  • King IQ SET line turns RED after touching or crossing downward level 80.
]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/king-iq-option-indicator-system-free-download/feed/ 8 88882
1-2-3 Pattern Day Trading Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/1-2-3-pattern-day-trading-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/1-2-3-pattern-day-trading-strategy-free-download/#comments Tue, 27 Jun 2023 19:54:28 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=88453 1-2-3 Pattern Strategy is a day Trading Strategy that is free to download. The 1-2-3 Pattern Day Trader is an effective trend-following strategy built on the 1-2-3 patterns, day signal ultra, and other significant indicators as filters for identifying the trend. Primarily used in Forex intraday trading, this system identifies pivot lows and highs, allowing traders to take positions that align with the market trend and take advantage of a favorable risk-to-reward ratio.

Indicators Used in this Day Trading Strategy

The system uses several indicators, including the Day Signal Arrow, Day Open Line, Day Signal Ultra, Day Bar, Day Look, Day Explosion, and the 1-2-3 Pattern V6. These indicators work together to help traders discern the correct market direction near support and resistance zones.

These are the main indicators used in this strategy to determine entries. But the system does come with an additional indicator, so you can experiment with filtering the signals further.

1-2-3 Pattern V6

This indicator provides Blue and Orange buy-sell arrow signals and is integral to the strategy as it determines the entry signal. This Day Trading Strategy other indicators help filter out less profitable arrow signals from this indicator.

Day Signal Ultra

Day Signal Ultra serves as a color-changing EMA 190. The color of this ribbon changes to white when the price is above the Day Signal Ultra. Conversely, the ribbon turns Orange when the price falls below the Day Signal Ultra. The slope of the Day Signal Ultra is crucial for identifying the trend’s strength. When the price is above the indicator, and the slope is ascending, traders should consider long trades. On the other hand, short trades are advisable when the price is below the Day Signal Ultra, and the slope of the indicator is descending.

Day Look

Day Look is another trend-following indicator that charts a histogram based on the difference between long-term and short-term moving averages. If the histogram falls below the zero line, it signifies a downtrend in prices, while a histogram above the zero line indicates an upward trend in prices.

Day Explosion

Day Explosion is essentially a renamed Waddah Attar Explosion indicator with an appealing color scheme. It operates on multiple time frames and demonstrates trend strength, explosion power, or momentum. The histogram color changes to white when the trend is upward, while downward trends turn the bars to Orange. The indicator also plots an explosion signal line which functions as a momentum threshold, providing valuable data for any currency pair across all time frames.

This 1-2-3 Pattern Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Day Trading Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

This Day Trading Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

1-2-3 Pattern Trading System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, But it works best on M5, M15, and M30.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for 1-2-3 Pattern Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this 1-2-3 Pattern Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • Trades only in the direction of the trend.
    • Uptrend: price above White dots of Day signal ultra indicator.
    • Downtrend: price below Orange dots of Day signal ultra indicator.

Buy Entry

  • 123 pattern V6 Blue buy arrow.
  • Day signal ultra indicator White dot.
  • Day look indicator White bar.
  • Day explosion White bar above Yellow line.

Sell Entry

  • 123 pattern V6 Orange sell arrow.
  • Day signal ultra indicator Orange dot.
  • Day look indicator Orange bar.
  • Day explosion Orange bar above Yellow line.

Trade Exist

Any positions with this Day Trading Strategy can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support, resistance, or high-low level as a reference point. You may also exit the trade manually if the system conditions reverse.

  • Initial stop loss 5-10 pips above/below the signal bar depends on the time frame.
  • Profit target M5 7- 12 pips, M15 8-15 pips, M30 15- 25 pips.

It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL below the entry price using previous support/resistance as a reference point Or on the previous high/low swing. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

Conclusion

In conclusion, the 1-2-3 Pattern Strategy offers a robust system for traders to align their trades with market trends. Its effective use of a range of indicators helps traders to pinpoint entries accurately, making it an appealing choice for those in Forex intraday trading. Moreover, this Day Trading Strategy comes with additional indicators, allowing for further experimentation and refinement of signal filtering.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/1-2-3-pattern-day-trading-strategy-free-download/feed/ 2 88453
TDI with BB Trigger Trend Reversal Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tdi-with-bb-trigger-trend-reversal-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tdi-with-bb-trigger-trend-reversal-strategy-free-download/#respond Sat, 24 Jun 2023 21:53:46 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=88365 TDI with BB Trigger is a Trend Reversal Strategy that is free to download. TDI with BB Trigger system is an advanced trading template premised on three key indicators: Bollinger Bands, Trader Dynamic Index (TDI), and BB Trigger. This strategy identifies potential trend reversals based on the overbought/oversold price status within the Bollinger Bands. The TDI and the BB Trigger work in synergy to determine the right timing for market entry.

Indicators Used in this Trend Reversal Strategy

To grasp the complete picture of this strategy, let’s dive deep into each component and indicator.

Bollinger Bands

Bollinger Bands are a statistical chart characterizing a financial instrument or commodity’s prices and volatility over time. They consist of a simple moving average (middle band) and two standard deviation lines (upper and lower bands). When prices are highly volatile, the bands widen and move further away from the average, and during less volatile periods, the bands contract.

In this Trend Reversal Strategy context, the price’s interaction with the Bollinger Bands is vital. The strategy dictates that traders should wait for the price to bounce off or break the lower Bollinger Band before considering entry into the market.

Trader Dynamic Index (TDI)

The TDI is an indicator that gathers information on price direction, volatility, and market sentiment. The TDI displays a Green line (fast-moving average), a Red line (slow-moving average), and a Blue line (market baseline). The crossover of the green and blue lines can often indicate potential market reversals.

With this strategy, traders should wait until the green line on the TDI indicator crosses upward over the blue line, signaling a potential increase in the price trend.

BB Trigger

The BB Trigger is another crucial aspect of this Trend Reversal Strategy. This momentum indicator can show when a particular asset is overbought or oversold within the trader’s chosen time frame. This, in turn, gives signals for potential trend reversals.

The BB Trigger is an additional tool used to confirm trading signals. It’s essentially an oscillator that helps identify whether market conditions are overbought or oversold, and as such, it serves to pinpoint optimal entry and exit points.

Pivot Points Levels

Pivot points are technical analysis indicators that provide a set of potential support and resistance levels. They are usually calculated from the previous trading session’s high, low, and closing prices. In this strategy, pivot point levels can be used as targets for taking profits.

Trend Reversal Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

This TDI with BB Trigger System is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Trend Reversal Strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for TDI with BB Trigger System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this TDI with BB Trigger System.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy Position: Wait for the price to bounce or break the lower Bollinger Band. After this, look at the TDI indicator. You would want the Green line (representing the current market price) to cross upward over the Blue line (representing the market baseline). Meanwhile, the BB Trigger should indicate a long position. This confluence of conditions provides the go signal for a Buy position.

Sell Position: Wait for the price to bounce or break the upper Bollinger Band. After this, look at the TDI indicator. You would want the Green line (representing the current market price) to cross downward over the Blue line (representing the market baseline). Meanwhile, the BB Trigger should indicate a short position. This confluence of conditions provides the go signal for a Sell position.

Initial Stop Loss: Once you’ve entered a long position, it’s essential to manage risk. Place the initial stop loss on the previous low swing or 10-15 pips (the strategy you choose depends on your risk tolerance and the volatility of the market you’re trading).

Take Profit Options: With the position open, the next step is to establish a strategy for taking a profit. You have three options for this:

  • Middle Band: You can exit your position when the price reaches the middle Bollinger Band. This option is conservative, limiting potential losses and possibly limiting gains.
  • Opposite Band: A more aggressive strategy would be to wait until the price reaches the upper Bollinger Band. This could maximize your profits, but it also carries the risk of the price reversing before it hits the upper band.
  • Pivot Points Levels: A balanced approach could be to take profit at the pivot point levels, providing a good compromise between risk and reward.

Conclusion

In essence, the TDI with BB Trigger Trend Reversal Strategy works by combining the signals provided by these indicators. When the Bollinger Bands suggest that the price is overbought or oversold, the TDI verifies the market sentiment and trend direction. The pivot point levels provide support and resistance levels, while the BB Trigger ensures the timing for entry, signaling a trend reversal.

Intraday trading demands a strategy that combines precision, timing, and a keen understanding of market trends. The TDI with BB Trigger System ticks all these boxes, providing traders with a solid framework to navigate the fascinating yet unpredictable world of intraday trading.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tdi-with-bb-trigger-trend-reversal-strategy-free-download/feed/ 0 88365
Verified Profit Trend Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/verified-profit-trend-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/verified-profit-trend-strategy-free-download/#comments Tue, 06 Jun 2023 20:33:32 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=87615 Verified Profit System (VPS) has become a significant player in financial trading, providing a robust and intuitive approach to market analyses. This price action trend strategy is built on the principle of ‘TMA’ (Triangular Moving Average) for its trend orientation and an array of advanced tools such as levels of continuation/reversal, support, and resistance zones.

Indicators Used in this Trend Strategy

Let’s dive deeper into the specific indicators utilized in this system

Confluence 2 and Confluence 5

This proprietary indicator is a critical tool in the VPS, helping traders identify high-probability trading opportunities where multiple factors align in favor of a particular price move. The Confluence 2 and 5 indicators offer different degrees of analysis, giving traders a wider perspective of market conditions.

Zone Indicator

The Zone Indicator in the VPS is crucial for identifying support and resistance zones in the market. These are the price levels at which buying or selling pressure significantly changes, leading to possible price reversals or continuations. Recognizing these zones allows traders to anticipate potential price movements and plan their trades accordingly.

Trend Signal

The Trend Signal indicator is where the VPS truly stands out. These tools assist traders in identifying the market’s overall trend direction and potential entry points.

Trend Meter

The Trend Meter is an essential component of the VPS, providing a visual representation of market trends. It’s a helpful tool for traders, enabling them to gauge the strength of a trend at a glance, thereby assisting in informed decision-making.

Levels Reversal

The Levels Reversal tool in VPS is primarily employed to indicate potential turning points in the market. It pinpoints those areas where the price has a high probability of reversing direction. Recognizing these levels can help traders capitalize on potential opportunities in the market.

This Trend Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

This Verified Profit System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Verified Profit System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set this Indicator to send you a signal alert via E-mail, SMS, Mobile Notifications, or platform pop-ups. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Verified Profit System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for Verified Profit System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Trend Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • The best signals are when the price bounces off the level toward the trend.

Buy Entry

  • Trend Signal Light Blue Buy Arrow.
  • Blue bars are below the price.
  • Support Zone. (GREEN Box)
  • Level reversal Buy. (BLUE “Buy” text)

Sell Entry

  • Trend Signal Orange Sell Arrow.
  • Orange bars are above the price.
  • Resistance Zone. (RED Box)
  • Level reversal Sell. (Yellow “Sell” text)

Trade Exist

Any positions with this Verified Profit System can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support, resistance, or high-low level as a reference point. You may also exit the trade manually if the system conditions reverse.

  • Place initial stop loss below/above the last swing high/low.
  • Make profit before the next level of zone indicator or ratio stop loss 1 : 2.5

It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL below the entry price using previous support/resistance as a reference point Or on the previous high/low swing. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

Conclusion

In conclusion, the Trend Strategy is a comprehensive strategy that enables traders to navigate the complexities of financial markets efficiently. Its well-rounded set of indicators provides a multifaceted approach to trend analysis, making it suitable for novice and experienced traders. Its unique combination of functionality and user-centric interface ensures a dynamic and practical trading experience, making it a go-to solution for those aiming to maximize their trading endeavors.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/verified-profit-trend-strategy-free-download/feed/ 3 87615
Asian Breakout Trading System FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/asian-breakout-trading-system-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/asian-breakout-trading-system-free-download/#respond Sat, 03 Jun 2023 20:00:53 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=87491 Asian Breakout System is an Asian Session High Low Breakout Trading System. AHAL (Asian High Asian Low) strategy has emerged as a popular choice for its simplicity and potential profitability. This daily scalping trading method discards traditional trading tools such as Fibonacci retracements, trend lines, chart patterns, and oscillators, favoring a more straightforward approach. This system can be adapted and modified to include personalized trading rules.

Understanding the AHAL Breakout Strategy

The bedrock of the AHAL strategy is identifying the highest (Asian High) and the lowest (Asian Low) price points during the Asian trading session. To do this, traders chart lines marking the extreme price points between 21:00 GMT and 06:00 GMT, the standard time frame for the Asian trading session. By 06:00 GMT, traders can conclusively establish the Asian High and Low of the day.

The breakout trading system is built around the anticipation that the price of an asset will move significantly in either direction, especially after being confined within a relatively narrow price range. The AHAL method sits squarely within this system, utilizing the High and Low of the Asian session to predict potential breakouts during subsequent trading sessions.

Once the Asian High and Low are identified, traders can use these points to mark potential breakouts during the European or American trading sessions. The underlying presumption here is that significant price movements are likely to occur once the price of an asset moves beyond the High or falls below the Low established during the Asian session.

Leveraging AHAL for Profitable Trades

Traders utilizing the AHAL method usually place buy orders just above the Asian High and sell orders just below the Asian Low. The logic behind this strategy is that if the price breaks out of the established range, a strong trend (upward or downward) is likely to follow.

A buy order above the Asian High anticipates a bullish trend, while a sell order below the Asian Low predicts a bearish trend. This provides an opportunity for traders to capitalize on substantial price movements that could potentially result in profitable trades.

This Asian Breakout System is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

AHAL System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Breakout Trading System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Breakout Trading System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts.

Risk Management in this Breakout Trading System

While the AHAL method has proven profitable for many traders, it is not without risk, like any trading strategy. A critical aspect of managing this risk is properly setting stop-loss orders. In this case, stop-loss orders are typically set just below the Asian High for buy orders and just above the Asian Low for sell orders. This strategy helps limit potential losses if the price unexpectedly reverses after the breakout.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules for Asian Breakout System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Asian Breakout System.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Setup for Entry and Exit

  • Work best on GBPUSD. It also works on all other pairs, but try it out with different SL and TP.
  • Use 55 EMA to spot high-probability trades, thus avoiding entering any positions against the trend. Identify the trend using the EMA on the hourly chart, then switch to M5 TimeFrame to enter either buy at the Asian High or sell order at Asian Low.
  • You must adjust trading session times to match your broker server time in the input parameters. Default settings are for GMT 2+. (which is the default on most brokers)
    • Dark Gray Box – the Asian session
    • Medium Gray Box – the European Session
    • Light Gray Box – the America session

Buy Entry

  1. 55 EMA on the hourly chart is in uptrend mode. (EMA is blue with price above the EMA)
  2. Place a pending buy order at the Asian High.
  3. Set the stop-loss 30 pips below the Asian High.
  4. Set the first targeted profit at 15 pips.
  5. Set the second target profit at the next mid-pivot price level or the next pivot point.

Sell Entry

  1. 55 EMA on the hourly chart is in downtrend mode. (H1 EMA is red with price below the EMA)
  2. Place a pending sell order at the Asian low.
  3. Set the stop-loss 30 pips above the Asian low.
  4. Set the first targeted profit at 15 pips.
  5. Set the second target profit at the next mid-pivot price level or the next pivot point.
  • Move the stop-loss to break even after the first target profit is hit.
  • Exit the second trade if an M5 candle close higher than the nearest pivot point.
AHAL System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Conclusion of AHAL System

The AHAL System is a relatively simple yet effective trading strategy, allowing traders to leverage price movements outside the established Asian High and Low. While it discards many conventional trading tools, its simplicity and potential for profitability make it an appealing option for both new and experienced traders. However, as with any investment strategy, thorough understanding, careful implementation, and thoughtful risk management are vital to success.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/asian-breakout-trading-system-free-download/feed/ 0 87491
Precision Long Trend MT4 Hedge Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/precision-long-trend-mt4-hedge-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/precision-long-trend-mt4-hedge-strategy-free-download/#respond Fri, 14 Apr 2023 22:19:49 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=83670 Precision Long Trend Trading system is an MT4 Hedge Strategy FREE to Download. Trend following is a popular trading strategy that relies on identifying and following the direction of a market trend. This approach is based on the premise that markets tend to move in trends and that traders can capitalize on these trends by following them and entering trades in the same direction as the trend. The Precision Long Trend Trading system is a trend-following strategy that uses trend indicators to generate trading signals. This article will explore this strategy and how it can be used to trade the markets.

The MT4 Hedge Strategy is a trend-following strategy based on two trend indicators: Precision Trend (slow) and Parabolic SAR. The configuration of the Precision Trend is very slow to determine a solid trend. The Parabolic SAR only determines the timing signals in the direction of the trend defined by the Precision Trend. On the chart, TMA Bands are inserted as dynamic support and resistance levels, which can be interpreted as fast target levels.

The main idea behind this strategy is to use trend indicators to identify the direction of the trend and then use Parabolic SAR to time entries in the direction of the trend. The Precision Trend indicator is used to confirm the direction of the trend and provide a solid basis for the strategy. The Parabolic SAR indicator is used to provide entry signals in the direction of the trend, while TMA Bands provide dynamic support and resistance levels to help traders determine fast target levels.

This MT4 Hedge Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Precision Long Trend System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Precision Long Trend Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

This MT4 Hedge Strategy is straightforward. Even a complete beginner can start trading and making profits with this system. You can set it to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, platform pop-ups, and Email. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This Precision Long Trend Indicator can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts.

Using this strategy for hedging

This strategy was designed for hedging, so those who use this technique can use a reverse order instead of the stop loss. This means that instead of using a stop loss to limit losses, traders can use a reverse order to enter a trade in the opposite direction of the trend, effectively hedging their position. This approach can help traders limit their losses if the market moves against them.

Benefits of the MT4 Hedge Strategy

One of the main benefits of the Precision Long Trend Hedge Strategy is its simplicity. This strategy is based on a few simple indicators, making it easy for traders to understand and implement. Additionally, the strategy is designed for hedging, which can help traders limit their losses and protect their positions in adverse market moves.

Another benefit of this strategy is its effectiveness in trending markets. Since the strategy is based on trend indicators, it is well-suited for trending markets where the trend direction is clear. The strategy can generate profitable trades in these markets by following the trend and entering trades in the same direction.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading Rules of Precision Long Trend Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this Precision Long Trend Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

  • Trades only in the direction of the trend.
  • Do not open positions when the price is overbought or oversold in the dynamic support and stability levels drawn by the TMA.

Buy Entry

  • Precision Trend Green bar.
  • Parabolic Sar Aqua dot below the candle.

Sell Entry

  • Precision Trend Red bar.
  • Parabolic Sar Purple dot above the candle.

Trade Exist

Any positions with MT4 Hedge Strategy can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support, resistance, or high-low level as a reference point. You may also exit the trade manually if the system conditions reverse.

  • Place stop loss above below the dots of the Parabolic Sar.
  • Fast profit target at levels of TMA.
  • Exit position when parabolic sar changes direction or when the precision trend changes direction.
  • This strategy was designed for hedging, so those who use this technique can use a reverse order instead of the stop loss.

Set SL below/above the entry price using previous support/resistance as a reference point Or on the previous high/low swing. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

Conclusion

The Precision Long Trend Hedge Strategy is a powerful tool for trend following that uses trend indicators to generate trading signals. This simple and effective strategy makes it well-suited for traders of all levels. Additionally, the strategy is designed for hedging, which can help traders limit their losses and protect their positions. By using this strategy, traders can take advantage of trending markets and generate profitable trades by following the direction of the trend.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/precision-long-trend-mt4-hedge-strategy-free-download/feed/ 0 83670
Spike Detector MT5 Forex System FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/spike-detector-mt5-forex-system-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/spike-detector-mt5-forex-system-free-download/#comments Tue, 11 Apr 2023 20:42:30 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=83162 Spike Detector Indicator is an MT5 Forex System FREE to Download. It is a highly effective trend-following system designed for day trading and scalping in the Forex market. The system combines two powerful technical indicators, the Spike Detector and the SuperTrend, to identify high-probability trading opportunities in the market.

The Spike Detector Indicator is price action and trend-following strategy that identifies key price levels and trend directions. It is ideal for day traders and scalpers looking to make quick, short-term trades based on market conditions.

The Spike Detector is a unique indicator that identifies sudden price movements, or spikes, in the market. News events or other market catalysts often cause these spikes and can provide valuable trading opportunities for skilled traders. The Spike Detector with SuperTrend MT5 system allows traders to interpret these spikes in two ways: either as an opportunity to hunt for spikes using the renko spike bar MT5 or as an opportunity to open trades that agree with the main trend.

The SuperTrend indicator is a popular trend-following indicator that helps traders identify the direction of the market trend. By using the SuperTrend with the Spike Detector, traders can increase their chances of success by identifying trading opportunities aligned with the overall market trend.

One of the advantages of this MT5 Forex System is its flexibility. Traders can use the system to trade various currency pairs and time frames, depending on their preferences and risk tolerance. The system can also be customized to suit individual trading styles, allowing traders to fine-tune it to their needs.

This Spike Detector Indicator is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and set protection or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

MT5 Forex System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, practicing trading on an MT4 demo account can be beneficial until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Main Chart of Spike Detector Indicator

Spike Detector Indicator FREE Download ForexCracked

This Spike Detector Indicator can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for this MT5 Forex System

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using this MT5 Forex System.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy Entry

  • Spike Detector gives a Blue arrow.
  • Damjan Blue bars.
  • Stochastic begins to cross upwards.
  • RSI Crossing level 30 upwards.
  • The Min-Max indicator shows Blue bars.
  • Heiken Ashi smoothed (4 ma Candles indicator) agrees with the main trend(Blue).
  • Optional – Supertrend Blue Line.

Sell Entry

  1. Spike Detector gives a Red arrow.
  2. Damjan Red bars.
  3. Stochastic begins to cross downwards.
  4. RSI Crossing level 70 downwards.
  5. The Min-Max indicator shows Red bars.
  6. Heiken Ashi smoothed (4 ma Candles indicator) agrees with the main trend(Orange).
  7. Optional – Supertrend Sell Line.

Trade Exist

Any positions with Spike Detector Indicator can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support, resistance, or high-low level as a reference point. You may also exit the trade manually if the system conditions reverse.

  • Place the initial stop loss below/above the supertrend line.

It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL below the entry price using previous support/resistance as a reference point Or on the previous high/low swing. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

Conclusion

The MT5 Forex System is a powerful trend-following system ideal for day traders and scalpers looking to capitalize on short-term trading opportunities in the Forex market. By combining the Spike Detector Indicator and SuperTrend indicators, traders can identify high-probability trading opportunities aligned with the overall market trend. With its flexibility and customization options, the system is a valuable tool for any trader looking to improve their trading performance.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/spike-detector-mt5-forex-system-free-download/feed/ 7 83162
FGM Profitable Forex Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/fgm-profitable-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/fgm-profitable-forex-strategy/#respond Fri, 10 Mar 2023 18:10:47 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=76278 The FGM Profitable Forex Strategy is a crossover trading strategy mainly based on the three moving averages and one trend filtering indicator.

FGM Profitable Forex Strategy

This strategy fits all kinds of timeframes and mt4 currency pairs.

How does it work? How to apply in forex trading?

Trading Rules Explanation

Buy Entry

The entry point for buy long trade occurs when the following conditions are met:

  • the FGM 8 moving average (blue) is above the FGM 21 moving average (aqua);
  • price stays above the FGM 50 moving average (yellow);
  • ProfitableStrategy1 indicator color turns green;
  • you can set the stop loss a few pips below FGM 50.

Sell Entry

The entry point for short sell trade occurs when the following conditions are met:

  • the FGM 8 moving average (blue) is below the FGM 21 moving average (aqua);
  • price stays below the FGM 50 moving average (yellow);
  • ProfitableStrategy1 indicator color turns red ;
  • you can set the stop loss a few pips above FGM 50.

Exit Trade / Take Profit

Exit trade when the FGM 8 cross below FGM 21 when long trade, and when FGM 8 crosses above FGM 21 when short trade.

FGM Profitable Forex

In the picture above, you can see the FGM Profitable Strategy in action.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Check also:

Bear Trap Pattern Forex Trading Strategy

Probe Scalper Robot FREE Download

Outside Bar Pattern Forex Trading Strategy

How to set up the FGM Profitable Strategy in MT4?

Files Included

Indicators:

  • FGM.ex4
  • GG-TrendBar.ex4
  • ProfitableStrategy_1.ex4
  • ProfitableStrategy_16.ex4

Templates:

  • FGM profitable strategy.tpl

Installation Guide

Copy and paste indicator files into the MQL4 folder of the MetaTrader 4 trading platform.

You can gain access to this folder by clicking the top menu options, which goes as follows:

File > Open Data Folder > MQL4 > Indicators (paste here).

Similarly, copy and paste the template file to the Templates folder.

Now, right-click on the chart, and hover over Templates. You will have displayed a list of available systems; left-click the template name you want to run.

Bottom Line

The FGM Profitable Strategy is worth adding to your trading collection but remembers to have realistic expectations. Like any other technical analysis tool, it cannot provide accurate signals 100% of the time. Thus, it will give false signals occasionally. Its performance will vary significantly depending on market conditions.

FGM Profitable Forex Strategy Free Download

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/fgm-profitable-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 76278
Trendline Scalper Forex Trading Indicator System https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trendline-scalper-forex-trading-indicator-system/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trendline-scalper-forex-trading-indicator-system/#comments Tue, 07 Mar 2023 16:40:48 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=75975 The Trendline Scalper Trading System explains what it is. It simply utilizes a trendline trading approach. It became famous among trend-following traders for its ability to plot the trendline slope quickly and accurately. This automatic trendline-supporting tool helps traders struggling to spot and draw trendlines for their trade entries.

Trendline Scalper Trading Indicator System

The Trendline Scalper Trading System fits all kinds of timeframes and currency pairs, but we suggest trading on lower timeframes. The Trendlines are displayed directly on the main trading chart, and the Stochastic Oscillator is displayed in a separate window below it. Feel free to experiment with the settings and parameters to fit your preferences.

How to trade with the Trendline Scalper Trading System?

The Trendline Scalper Trading System consists of only two indicators, which are the following:

  • Trendline V1.1: The system’s core spots the possible setups to draw the trendlines and automatically plots the slope. These levels can be considered the market’s dynamic support and resistance levels. It also defines entry points for traders. Green trendline stands for sell traders, and green trendline stands for buy trades.
  • Stochastic Oscillator: it’s of the most popular forex oscillators. Its value under 20 means the oversold market state, and above 80 reflects the overbought market state.

Buy Signal

Follow these steps for a long trade:

  • The price is above the red trendline.
  • The stochastic Oscillator drops below the 20 levels.
  • Price touches and rejects the red trendline.
  • Buy trade is triggered after the above-mentioned conditions are met.
  • Set stop-loss (SL) a few pips below the red trendline.
  • Take profit or exit trade whenever the price touches the green trendline, or use your preferred method of trade exit.
Trendline Scalper Trading Indicator

Sell Signal

Follow these steps for a short trade:

  • The price is below the green trendline.
  • The stochastic Oscillator rises above the 80 levels.
  • Price touches and rejects the green trendline.
  • Sell trade is triggered after the above-mentioned conditions are met.
  • Set stop-loss a few pips above the last swing low of the market.
  • Take profit or exit trade whenever the price touches the red trendline, or use your preferred method of trade exit.
Trendline Scalper Trading

As always, to achieve the best results, remember about good money management. It would help if you had discipline, emotions, and psychology to be an excellent profitable trader. It is a must to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during bad times and market conditions like low volatility/volume, major forex sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

How to set up the Trendline Scalper Trading System in MT4?

Installation Guide

Download the Trendline Scalper Trading indicator System.zip archive at the bottom of this post, unpack it, then copy and paste the forex indicators files of the Trendline Scalper Trading System into the MQL4 folder of the MetaTrader 4 trading platform.

You can open this folder by clicking the menu options, which goes as follows:

File > Open mql Data Folder > MQL4 > Indicators.

Furthermore, you must copy the template file into the templates folder to run the Trendline Scalper Trading System. To proceed, right-click on a chart, then Template > Open Templates, and copy the Trendline Scalper Trading indicator System. tpl file into that mql folder. Select the file and click Open to load the indicator system on your chart.

Bottom Line

The Trendline Scalper Trading System is well worth adding to your trading collection. A good forex strategy will enhance your chance of success. Nonetheless, remember to have realistic expectations. Like any other technical forex analysis tool, it cannot provide accurate entry signals 100% of the time. Thus, this forex trading indicator system provides false entry signals occasionally. Its performance will change significantly depending on market conditions.

Download the Free Forex MT4 Trendline Scalper Trading System

Read More Zeus Forex Scalping Indicator FREE Download

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trendline-scalper-forex-trading-indicator-system/feed/ 5 75975
Get Profit Forex Trading Indicator System https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/get-profit-forex-trading-indicator-system/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/get-profit-forex-trading-indicator-system/#respond Tue, 28 Feb 2023 18:02:07 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=76288 The Get Profit Forex Trading Indicator System is a dynamic trend channel trading strategy comprising three indicators. It was designed to give good profits to its users.

The first element is the Super Signal that displays buy/sell arrows. The second one is the Ozymandias Channel, which draws a three-band channel acting like dynamic support/resistance levels. Finally, the last indicator is the FXScalper 25, used as a momentum filter.

Get Profit Forex Trading Indicator System

The forex indicators of this system offer simplicity and good performance. Therefore it’s easy to master and can be applied for live trading by new and experienced traders.

This Indicator system fits all kinds of timeframes and currency pairs.

Read More:

Winning Forex Trading System FREE Download

Simple GBPUSD Breakout Forex Trading Strategy

How does it work? How to apply in forex trading?

Trading Rules Explanation

Buy Entry

The entry point for long buy trade occurs when the following conditions are met:

  • Super Signal displays an upward arrow below the price candle.
  • Ozymandias Channel turns green color.
  • FXScalper 25 bars turn green with rising values.
  • Set stop loss below the current Ozymandias Channel position

Sell Entry

The entry point for short-sell trade occurs when the following conditions are met:

  • Super Signal displays a downward arrow above the price candle
  • Ozymandias Channel turns into red color
  • FXScalper 25 bars turn red with falling values
  • Set stop loss above the current Ozymandias Channel position

Exit Trade / Take Profit

Exit trade when the Super Signal displays an opposite arrow, or use your method of trade exit.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

How to set up the Get Profit Trading System in MT4?

Files Included

Indicators:

  • Ozymandias.mq4
  • PremiumFXScalper_build600.ex4
  • super-signals-channel.mq4
  • SweetSpotsGOLD_TRO_MODIFIED_VERSION.ex4

Templates:

  • Get Profit Trading System.tpl

Installation Guide

Copy and paste indicator files into the MQL4 folder of the MetaTrader 4 trading platform.

You can gain access to this folder by clicking the top menu options, which goes as follows:

File > Open Data Folder > MQL4 > Indicators (paste here).

Similarly, copy and paste the template file to the Templates folder.

Now, right-click on the chart, and hover over Templates. You will have displayed a list of available systems; left-click the template name you want to run.

Bottom Line

The Get Profit Trading System is worth adding to your forex trading collection but remembers to have realistic expectations. However, like any other technical analysis tool, it cannot provide accurate signals 100% of the time. Thus, it will give false signals occasionally. In addition, its performance will vary significantly depending on market conditions.

Get Profit Forex Trading Indicator System Free Download

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/get-profit-forex-trading-indicator-system/feed/ 0 76288
LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/lmt-formula-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/lmt-formula-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Sat, 25 Feb 2023 17:57:03 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=76108 The LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy is a forex trading strategy to use with candlestick patterns. The system has two main elements: a Moving Average and an oscillator called the Trigger. To decide on a trade, you must analyze candlestick formations and check signals provided by the indicators.

LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy

The LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy fits all timeframes (authors suggest 4H and Daily) and currency pairs. It is displayed directly on the main trading chart and in the window below. The default settings are good but can be modified. Feel free to test it with the settings and parameters to fit your preferences.

How to trade with the LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy?

The most important indicator is the LMT Trigger indicator. This indicator has a window below the chart and displays green or red histogram bars to reflect the trend momentum. Depending on the provided color, a trader can decide to go long or short trade. The second important element is the 10-period Exponential Moving Average, and where the price is above it, the trend is considered bullish. Similarly, when the price is below it, the trend is considered bullish. The third and last element to decide on trade is the candlestick pattern. Please consider only Engulfing Pattern, Pin Bar Formation, and Doji Pattern for that strategy’s needs.

Buy Signal

Follow these steps for a long trade:

  • The Trigger indicator provides at least three green bars in a row
  • The price is above the Exponential Moving Average
  • Price swings higher from recent low swing
  • Manually recognized one of the three candlestick patterns to take place
  • Buy-entry trade is triggered after the above-mentioned conditions are complete.
  • Set stop-loss(SL) a few pips below the last swing low of the market
  • Take profit or exit whenever the price drops below the Exponential Moving Average. Use your method of trade exit.
LMT Formula Forex Trading buy

Sell Signal

Follow these steps for a short trade:

  • The Trigger indicator provides at least three red bars in a row
  • The price is below the Exponential Moving Average
  • Price swings lower from recent high swing
  • Manually recognized one of the three candlestick patterns to take place
  • Sell trade is triggered after the above conditions are met
  • Set stop loss(SL) a few pips below the last swing low of the market
  • Take profit or exit whenever the price rises above the Exponential Moving Average. Use your method of trade exit.
LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy sell

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

How to set up the LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy in MT4?

Installation Guide

Download the LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy.rar archive at the bottom of this post, unpack it, then copy and paste the indicators files of the LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy into the MQL4 folder of the MetaTrader 4 trading platform.

You can gain access to this folder by clicking the top menu options, which goes as follows:

File > Open Data Folder > MQL4 > Indicators (paste here).

Furthermore, to run the LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy, you must copy the template file into the templates folder. To proceed, right-click on a chart, then Template > Open Templates, and copy the LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy. tpl file into that folder. Select the file and click Open to load the system on your chart.

Bottom Line

The LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy is worth adding to your trading collection. A good forex strategy will enhance your chance of success. Nonetheless, remember to have realistic expectations. Like any other technical analysis tool, it cannot provide accurate Entry signals 100% of the time. Thus, this forex trading system provides false signals occasionally. Its performance will vary significantly depending on market conditions.

Download Free MT4 LMT Formula Forex Trading Strategy

Read More MASTER ENTRY Indicator – [Cost $297] – For FREE

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/lmt-formula-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 76108
Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/triple-threat-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/triple-threat-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Sun, 19 Feb 2023 18:20:13 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=75741 The name of Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy is a forex trend-following forex indicator system based on just three Moving Averages(MA). Each Moving Average(MA) is set to a different period, and their crossover acts for a trade signal. What’s more, they also help in defining the dynamic stop level of the forex market trend.

Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy

The Forex Triple Threat Trading Strategy fits all mt4 timeframes and currency pairs. It is shown directly on the main trading chart. The settings can be modified directly from the input tab. Feel free to test out the settings and parameters to fit your preferences.

How to trade with the Forex Triple Threat Trading Strategy?

The Forex Triple Threat Trading Strategy consists of three Moving Average Indicators and Fractals Indicators. A detailed description is the following:

  • 15, 30 & 60 MAs: this forex indicator system includes 3 Simple Moving Averages of 15, 30, and 60-day periods. These MAs work together to provide entry signals in the form of crossover. For a bullish market trend, 30 MA must be above the 60 moving average, and 15 MA must be above 30 MA. For a bearish market trend, 60 MA must be greater than 30 MA, and 30 moving averages must be greater than 15 MA. The 60 MA level can also define the trailing stop level of the current forex market trend.
  • Fractals are suitable for defining the possible swing areas of the forex market. However, we need to stress that only some of the fractal signals are correct, and they frequently appear on the chart. This is why we suggest matching the fractal entry signals with the crossovers of the Moving Averages(MA) before you make a trade entry.

Buy Entry Signal

Follow these steps for a long trade:

  • 15 MA moves above 30 MA
  • 30 MA moves above 60 MA
  • A fractal appears below the current chart candlestick.
  • Buy-entry trade is triggered after the above conditions are met.
  • Set stop loss(SL) a few pips below the 60 MA.
  • Take profit(TP) or exit trade whenever 15 MA moves below 30 MA, or use your preferred method of trade exit.
simple Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy

Sell Signal

Follow these steps for a short trade:

  • 15 MA moves below 30 MA
  • 30 MA moves below 60 MA
  • A fractal appears above the current candlestick.
  • Sell trade is triggered after the above conditions are met.
  • Set stop loss a few pips above the 60 MA.
  • Take profit or exit trade whenever 15 MA moves above 30 MA, or use your preferred method of trade exit.
Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy indicator

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic mt4 currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Set up the Triple Threat Forex Strategy in MT4.

Installation Guide

Download the Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy.zip archive at the bottom of this post, unzip it, then copy and paste the given indicators files of the simple Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy into the MQL folder of the MetaTrader 4 platform.

You can open this data folder by clicking the menu options, which goes as follows:

File > Open Data Folder > MQL4 > Indicators.

Furthermore, to run the Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy, you must copy the given template file into the templates folder. To proceed, right-click on an mt4 chart, then Template > Open Templates, and then copy the simple Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy. tpl file into that folder. Select the file and click Open to load the system on your chart.

Bottom Line

The Simple Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy is worth adding to your trading collection. A good forex strategy will enhance your chance of success. Nonetheless, remember to have realistic expectations. Like any other forex technical analysis tool, it cannot provide accurate entry signals 100% of the time. Thus, this forex trading indicator system provides false signals occasionally. Moreover, its performance will change depending on forex market conditions.

Download Free MT4 Triple Threat Forex Trading Strategy

Read More Heiken-Ashi 1H Forex Strategy

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/triple-threat-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 75741
One Forex Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/one-forex-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/one-forex-strategy/#respond Thu, 16 Feb 2023 18:23:09 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=74017 The One Forex Strategy falls into the category of forex swing trading strategy. Advanced forex market momentum tools set this trading strategy with trade filters that work together to identify potentially profitable forex trade setups.

One Forex Strategy

The One Forex Trading Strategy fits all kinds of mt4 timeframes and currency pairs. It is displayed directly on the main forex trading chart and in two windows below it. The default settings can be modified now from the input tab. Feel free to test with the forex indicator settings and parameters to fit your preferences.

How to trade with the One Forex Trading Strategy?

The One Forex Trading Strategy consists of three complex indicators: THV Coral, Bamsbung with CCI, and SRCC. A detailed description is the following:

  • THV Coral: The forex indicator displays upward/downward arrows. As a swing trading indicator, it’s used to identify the possible swing areas of the market based on the price envelope theory.
  • Bamsbung with CCI is an advanced combination of two powerful momentum indicators. When its value rises above -35 when the momentum is considered bullish. Similarly, when it drops below 35, the momentum turns into bearish mode. The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) plots bullish/bearish crossover by intercepting each other (red & white lines).
  • SSRC: it is a Price Envelope-based Relative Strength Index indicator. When its value rises near 95, the market is overbought. Conversely, the market is clearly under the oversold condition when it drops around five.

Buy Signal

Follow these steps for a long trade:

  • THV Coral draws an upward arrow
  • Bamsbung with CCI value bounces up from the -35 level with a bullish crossover.
  • SSRC value drops near 5 level
  • Buy-entry trade is triggered after the mentioned conditions are met.
  • Set stop loss (SL) a few pips below the last swing low of the market.
  • Take profit(TP) or exit trade whenever the Risk: Reward ratio hits 1:1+ (or better), or use your preferred method of trade exit.
One Forex Strategy free download

Sell Signal

Follow these steps for a short trade:

  • THV Coral draws a downward arrow
  • Bamsbung with CCI value drops from the -35 level with a bearish crossover.
  • SSRC value rises near 95 level
  • The sell-entry trade is triggered after the mentioned conditions are met.
  • Set stop-loss a few pips above the last swing high of the market.
  • Take profit or exit trade whenever the Risk: Reward ratio hits 1:1+ (or better), or use your preferred method of trade exit.
One Forex Strategy and indicator

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when to trade and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

How to set up the One Forex Strategy in MT4?

Installation Guide

Download the One Forex Strategy.zip archive at the end of this article, unzip it, then copy and paste the mt4 forex indicators files of the One Forex Strategy into the MQL4 Data folder of the MetaTrader 4 trading platform.

You can gain access to this folder by clicking the top menu options, which goes as follows:

File > Open Data Folder > MQL4 > Indicators (paste here).

Furthermore, you must copy the template file into the templates folder to run the One Forex Strategy. To proceed, right-click on a chart, then Template > Open Templates, and copy the One Forex Strategy. tpl file into that template folder. Please select the file and Open it to load the strategy on your chart.

Bottom Line

The One Forex Strategy is well worth adding to your trading collection. A good forex strategy will enhance your chance of success. Nonetheless, remember to have realistic expectations. Like any other technical analysis tool, it cannot provide accurate signals 100% of the time. This forex trading strategy gives false entry signals occasionally. Its performance will change depending on market conditions.

Download Free MT4 One Forex Strategy

Read More Cobra Adrenaline EA For FREE Download

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/one-forex-strategy/feed/ 0 74017
Stryder Forex Trading Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/stryder-forex-trading-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/stryder-forex-trading-strategy/#respond Mon, 13 Feb 2023 18:33:45 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=72513 The Stryder Forex Trading Strategy is a trend-following trading system based on the Stryder entry Signal and the Rate of Change indicator. That ROC forex indicator examines the true changes in price actions. Besides defining the forex market trends, this forex strategy also provides information about the current chart support and resistance of the forex market and, most importantly, the best potential chart entry points for trades marked with buy/sell arrows.

Stryder Forex Trading Strategy

The Stryder Forex trading Strategy fits all kinds of timeframes and mt4 currency pairs. It is shown directly on the main trading chart and in a window below it. The main default settings can be modified directly from the input tab. Experiment with the parameters and settings to fit your preferences.

How to trade with the Stryder Forex Trading Strategy?

The Stryder Forex Trading Strategy consists of just two forex indicators, which are the following:

  • Stryder entry Signals: this is a core element of the forex strategy as it defines trend direction. It is just a main chart trend line and two bands representing the market’s short-term overbought/oversold area. It automatically changes its colors when a change in the chart trend takes place. Additionally, it plots signals as buy/sell arrows triggering potential market entries.
  • Stryder Rate of Change: this indicator watches up to 20 currency pairs and keeps calculating the rate of changes in the instruments. It turns green when there is a positive change (bullish) in the asset’s price and red in the case of an adverse change (bearish) in its price.

Buy Signal

Follow these steps for a long trade:

  • Stryder Signal turns blue.
  • An upward arrow is placed.
  • Stryder ROC shows a positive change in price action.
  • Buy entry trade is triggered after the above conditions are met.
  • Set stop loss(SL) a few pips below the triggering arrow
  • Take profit or exit trade whenever the opposite arrow is plotted, or use your preferred method of trade exit.
Stryder Forex Trading Strategy 1

Sell Signal

Follow these steps for a short trade:

  • Stryder Signal turns red.
  • A downward arrow is placed.
  • Stryder ROC shows an adverse change in price action.
  • Sell entry trade is triggered after the above conditions are met.
  • Set stop loss(SL) a few pips above the triggering arrow.
  • Take profit or exit trade whenever the opposite arrow is plotted, or use your preferred method of trade exit.
Stryder Forex Trading Strategy 2

As always, remember to achieve the best results in forex money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and forex market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

How to set up the Stryder Forex Trading Strategy in MT4?

Installation Guide

Download the Stryder Forex Trading Strategy.zip archive at the end of this post, unzip it, then copy and paste the indicators files of the Stryder Forex Trading Strategy into the MQL4 folder of the MT4 trading platform.

You can gain access to this folder by clicking the top menu options, which goes as follows:

File > Open Data Folder > MQL4 > Indicators (paste here).

Furthermore, you must copy the template file into the templates folder to run the Stryder Forex Trading Strategy. To proceed, right-click on a chart, then Template > Open Templates, and copy the Stryder Forex Trading Strategy.tpl file into that folder. Next, select the file and click Open to load the system on your chart.

Bottom Line

The Forex Stryder Strategy is well worth adding to your trading collection. A good forex strategy will enhance your chance of success. Nonetheless, remember to have realistic expectations. Like any other technical analysis tool, is not capable of providing accurate signals 100% of the time. Thus, this forex trading strategy provides false entry signals occasionally. Its performance will vary significantly depending on market conditions.

Download Free MT4 Stryder Forex Trading Strategy

Read More Super Hedge Forex Robot FREE Download

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/stryder-forex-trading-strategy/feed/ 0 72513
Advanced Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/advanced-trendline-forex-scalping-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/advanced-trendline-forex-scalping-strategy/#comments Fri, 10 Feb 2023 18:38:52 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=72251 The Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy utilizes an excellent idea to trade the forex market trend in a highly effective and straightforward way. It has been designed with two powerful forex trading indicators: Advanced Trendlines and Exponential Moving averages. These forex indicators work together to give accurate signals.

advanced-trendline-scalping-strategy (1)

The Advanced Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy is recommended for all timeframes (M15) and currency pairs. It is shown directly on the main trading chart. The main default settings can be modified directly from the input tab. Feel free to test the settings and parameters to fit your preferences.

How to trade with the Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy?

The Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy consists of just two forex indicators, which are the following:

  • Advanced Trendline: this forex indicator draws trendlines automatically on the mt4 chart. A red colored trendline is a bearish resistance level. On the other hand, a blue colored trendline is considered a bullish chart support level.
  • 50 Exponential Moving Average(EMA): the 50 EMA represents the 50 days Exponential Moving Average. As with other moving averages, 50 EMA works in the same manner. A price floating above its level signals a bullish trend; however, a price diving below it indicates a bearish trend.

Buy Signal

Follow these steps for a long trade:

  • The blue-colored Advanced Trendline supports the price.
  • Price crosses and close over the 50 EMA
  • Buy-entry trade is triggered after the above conditions are met.
  • Set stop loss(SL) a few pips below the blue Trendline.
  • Take profit(TP) or exit trade whenever the price reaches the red Trendline, or use your preferred method of trade exit.
advanced-trendline-scalping-strategy-buy-trade

Sell Signal

Follow these steps for a short trade:

  • The red-colored Advanced Trendline resists price.
  • Price crosses and close under the 50 EMA
  • Sell entry trade is triggered after the above conditions are met.
  • Set stop loss(SL) a few pips above the red Trendline.
  • Take profit(SL) or exit trade whenever the price reaches the blue Trendline, or use your preferred method of trade exit.
advanced-trendline-scalping-strategy-sell-trade

As always, to achieve better results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable forex trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid entering trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major market sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

How to set up the Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy in MetaTrader (MT4)?

Installation Guide

Download the Advanced Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy.zip archive at the end of this post, unzip it, then copy and paste the forex indicators files of the Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy into the MQL4 folder of the MT4 trading platform.

You can gain access to this data folder by clicking the menu options, which goes as follows:

File > Open Data Folder > MQL4 > Indicators.

Furthermore, you must copy the template file into the templates folder to run the Advanced Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy. To proceed, right-click on an mt4 chart, then Template > Open Templates, and then copy the Advanced Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy. tpl file into that folder. Select the file and click Open to load the system on your chart.

Bottom Line

The Advanced Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy is worth adding to your forex trading collection. A good forex strategy will up your chance of success. Nonetheless, remember to have realistic expectations. Like any other technical analysis tool, is not capable of providing accurate signals 100% of the time. Thus, this forex trading system provides false signals occasionally. Its performance will vary significantly depending on market conditions.

Download Free MT4 Advanced Trendline Forex Scalping Strategy

Read More Simple Trendline Breakout Forex Trading Strategy

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/advanced-trendline-forex-scalping-strategy/feed/ 2 72251
TW Trend Following Forex Trading Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tw-trend-following-forex-trading-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tw-trend-following-forex-trading-strategy-free-download/#comments Thu, 09 Feb 2023 22:00:38 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=70668 TW System is a Forex Trading Strategy that uses a Trend Following Strategy. This system is based on 15 different indicators. The system itself is quick to learn and extremely easy to implement, even if you are completely new to trading.

It uses several momentum and moving average-based indicators to form an advanced trend following strategy. This system closely monitors the market trends, plots the trade signals within the trend directions, and produces exit signals for its users.

It can be applied to all currency pairs and is best on Major currency pairs. When it comes to timeframes, It works best on the M30 and 4-hour timeframes. These timeframes usually produce the best results. However, the TW System can be traded on all other timeframes with similar success.

This Forex Trading Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Trend Following Indicator can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Indicators Used in this Forex Trading Strategy

The Forex Trading Strategy uses 15 custom-made indicators. Here are some of these indicators explained.

Trend Following Forex Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com - Copy
  • Snake & T3 Moving Average: These two indicators intersect and produce crossover signals. The snake above the T3 Moving Average represents the bullish crossover, and an opposite scenario will be considered the bearish crossover signal.
  • Support/Resistance & Pivot Custom: Both indicators define the event areas of the market. Support/Resistance levels are plotted for short-term trading and Pivot Custom for intraday and longer-term trading purposes.
  • AFL Winner: AFL Winner is a momentum indicator used to indicate the overbought/oversold conditions of the market. Its value near 11 represents the oversold conditions of the market, and if it reaches near 95, it is considered as the market’s overbought condition.
  • Trend Session, xSuper Trend & FSP: All these three indicators work similarly to identify the market trends. All the bars of these indicators turn yellow when the trend is bullish and transforms into red to signal the bearish momentum of the market.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

This MetaTrader 4 Trading System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts. Work best on M15 or H4 TimeFrames.

Trading rules for this Trend Following Strategy

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events when using the Trend Following Strategy.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility conditions, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy Entry

  • The snake moves above the T3 Moving Average.
  • Price is supported by the lower Support/Resistance or the Pivot Custom levels.
  • AFL bounces upwards from its oversold level
  • Trend Session, xSuper Trend, and FSP turn yellow at the same time
  • Buy triggers when all of the above conditions are met

Sell Entry

  • The snake moves below the T3 Moving Average.
  • Price is resisted by the upper Support/Resistance or the Pivot Custom levels.
  • AFL drops downwards from its overbought level
  • Trend Session, xSuper Trend, and FSP turn to red at the same time
  • Sell triggers when all of the above conditions are met.

Trade Exist

Any positions with this Forex Trading Indicator can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support, resistance, or high-low level as a reference point. You may also exit the trade manually if the conditions of the system reverse (the opposite signal appears).

  • Exit long whenever Snake and T3 Moving Average plot the bearish/bullish crossover signal.

It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL below the entry price using previous support/resistance as a reference point Or on the previous high/low swing. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tw-trend-following-forex-trading-strategy-free-download/feed/ 2 70668
The Essential Guide to Effective and Profitable Forex Strategies https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-essential-guide-to-effective-and-profitable-forex-strategies/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-essential-guide-to-effective-and-profitable-forex-strategies/#respond Sun, 05 Feb 2023 07:15:41 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=59483 You want to start trading Forex but need to know where to start. You’ve heard stories of traders striking it rich, but you’re not sure if Forex is even legitimate—or if you have what it takes to be a successful trader.

Don’t worry. We’re here to help. In this guide, we’ll teach you the essential concepts of trading Forex and some practical and profitable Forex strategies you can use in your trades.

forexcracked.com Guide to Effective and Profitable Forex Strategies

Overview of the Forex Trading Market

Before we explore the different forex strategies, let’s first look at the Forex market. Forex represents foreign exchange and refers to the buying and selling of currencies. So it’s a global marketplace where traders can buy and sell currencies from all over the world.

The Forex market is only open 24 hours a day, five days a week. This makes it the perfect market for day traders, who can trade throughout the day and take advantage of all the different price movements.

Forex is also a very liquid market, which means you can get in and out of trades quickly and easily. This is also why it’s perfect for day traders, who need to respond quickly to changing market conditions.

Developing a Forex Trading Strategy

Developing a successful forex trading strategy takes work. You need to combine technical analysis with fundamental analysis, and you need to be patient and disciplined. Of course, it would help if you also had a good understanding of the market conditions and you needed to read the charts correctly.

There are many different forex strategies that you can use, and you need to find one that suits your personality and your trading style. You also need to be able to adapt your strategy to the current market conditions.

There is no perfect strategy, and you may have to experiment before finding one that works for you. But once you find a profitable strategy, you must stick with it and be disciplined enough to follow it religiously.

Basic Forex Trading Strategies

There are many basic Forex trading strategies out there. You could read about them in a book or on the internet. But, like anything else, the best way to learn is by doing.

You’ll want to start by paper trading. This means trading without risking any real money. You can even use a demo account to do this. This will allow you to try different strategies and see which ones work best.

forexcracked.com Basic Forex Trading Strategies

Once you’ve found a strategy that you’re comfortable with and proven profitable, you can start trading with real money. Always trade within your means, and never invest more money than you can afford to lose.

Advanced Forex Trading Strategies

If you’re ready to take your forex trading to the next level, it’s time to delve into some of the more advanced strategies. These strategies require more excellent knowledge of market conditions and a greater understanding of the forces that move currency prices. Such strategies can be profitable, but they also come with higher risks and can be complex to execute.

One popular advanced strategy is trading against current market trends, also known as contrarian trading. This entails betting against the current trend in hopes that it will reverse soon. This strategy can potentially generate significant returns—if done correctly—but is not recommended for inexperienced traders due to its higher risk factor.

Another popular advanced strategy is arbitrage trading. This involves simultaneously buying and selling currencies in different markets at different times to take advantage of price discrepancies between them. This type of trading requires much experience and skill to be profitable, so it’s not recommended for beginners either.

forexcracked.com Advanced Forex Trading Strategies

It’s important to remember that even the most advanced forex strategies are only as good as your understanding of the markets and capital management techniques. Without knowledge and expertise, even the most successful strategy won’t make you a successful trader overnight.

Risk Management Strategies for Profitable Forex Trading

Risk management is an essential part of successful forex trading. To manage your risk correctly, you need to have a strategy. The most popular strategies are using stop losses and limiting orders.

Stop-loss orders help protect your account from heavy losses by instructing your broker to close the trade at a particular price if the market moves against you. Limit orders are slightly different in that they allow you to specify the profit you would like to achieve on each trade before exiting the market.

forexcracked.com Risk Management Strategies for Profitable Forex Trading

Another risk management strategy is to use leverage carefully. Lower leverage means smaller potential profits and less risk, so finding an appropriate balance between risk and reward is essential. Technical analysis forex tools such as trend lines and indicators can help identify potentially profitable trades while minimizing risk exposure. Effective forex trading strategies must include a well-thought-out approach to managing risk to be successful and profitable in the long run.

Tips for Successful and Profitable Forex Trading

If you’re serious about becoming a successful and profitable Forex trader, there are some essential tips you’ll want to keep in mind. First and foremost, it’s important to remember that the Forex market is incredibly volatile and high-risk. As such, you should always approach it cautiously and check your risk tolerance level.

It’s also important to remember that patience is key in Forex trading. Take your time getting caught up in the excitement of the markets, or rush into trades by doing your research first. Instead, make sure you have a plan and stick to it no matter what.

Finally, remember to stay informed by monitoring current events and financial news. Keeping up with the global news cycle can help you spot opportunities or potential threats before they happen, allowing you to make more informed decisions when buying or selling currencies.

Conclusion

So, these are the essential things you need to know to be successful in your forex trading strategies. Remember always to do your research, stay up to date with the latest news and market fluctuations, and use a demo account to practice before trading with real money. With a solid foundation and these essential tips, you’re well on becoming a successful and profitable forex trader.

forexcracked.com successful and Profitable Forex Trading

Additional considerations could also help improve your forex trading strategies. First, you should always consider the risk associated with any trading decision. Even the most experienced trader can make mistakes, so use stops and manage your risk carefully. Additionally, leverage can be a powerful tool – but it can also lead to significant losses if used unwisely. Finally, learn to use various forex trading strategies and take the time to develop and test your strategy before you put real money at risk.

Overall, forex trading strategies are essential to successful trading, and having a comprehensive guide like this can help you be better informed and make more informed decisions. By being mindful of the above tips and guidelines, you should be able to create reliable and profitable trading strategies. Additionally, staying up to date on the latest market developments and news can give you the advantage you need to maximize your trading potential. With the right insights and strategy, you can become the successful forex trader you were always meant to be.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/the-essential-guide-to-effective-and-profitable-forex-strategies/feed/ 0 59483
A Simple Breakout Forex Strategy for Positive Pips https://www.forexcracked.com/education/a-simple-breakout-forex-strategy-for-positive-pips/ https://www.forexcracked.com/education/a-simple-breakout-forex-strategy-for-positive-pips/#comments Sat, 28 Jan 2023 18:51:36 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=54107 Introduction We all know that a 100% winning breakout forex strategy is likely to come across if you’re aiming for a minimal amount of pips with a huge stop loss that can withstand months, even years, of the target getting hit. But what if I told you I have a system that produced positive pips 89% of the days traded over three months? And with an average daily pip profit of 31 pips, it’s my closest Strategy to a holy grail. That’s why I want to share it with you.

The Simple Breakout Forex Strategy 

This system is based on a simple breakout concept that’s broken down into three times a day to set buy/sell entry orders. This can produce anywhere from 2-6 open trade positions, depending on forex market volatility, ranges, or trending days.

breakout forex strategy

Example of this powerful range breakout forex strategy on the DE30 (DAX)

  1. Identify a range based on a set of hours each day or 1x1h candle.
  2. Set buy and sell entry orders at the top of each range.
  3. TP is always 20 pips, and SL is always 50 pips.
  4. Set an opposite market order at the bottom of our 50 pips SL (only if the order is opened). This is to recover our loss.
  5. The recovery Take Profit is always 50 pips with SL 50 pips.
  6. Close all positions when the next orders are set.

PART 1+2/3

Market: DE30 (DAX)

Range 1: 1:00-9:00(GMT+1)

Range 2: 12:00-13:00(GMT+1)

A Simple Breakout

Range 1: Once we have identified our chart high and low during 1:00-9:00(GMT+1), we will set a buy entry order at the top and a sell entry order at the bottom of the range. In this chart example above, we broke out of the chart range, and Take Profit was cleared (we could have taken more good profit, but we are trying only to target 20pips each trade for consistency).

Range 2: This range is high and low for the 12h candles; again, we repeat the above process. Buy order at the top and sell order at the bottom. Furthermore, TP is always 20 pips. This time, we do not place a market recovery trade if our SL is hit, as it’s very rare that the 12h candle is more significant than 50 pips, so we just set our Stop Loss to the high/low and let the opposite chart trade open to recover 20 pips towards any losses.

A Simple Breakout Strategy
Breakout Strategy for Positive Pips

Recovery Positions if Stop Loss is hit: All trades during this chart range have a 50 pip Stop Loss; once an order is opened, we set an opposite position where our Stop Loss for the current open trade is. The Take Profit this time is 50pips with a 50pip Stop Loss. This recovers any trade losses from the previous trade. So YES!! There will be days when we lose both open trades and end up with a 100 pip trade loss (this is very rare, as explained earlier, 88% of days end with profit, and with these losses taken into account, we still average a good +30 pip a day).

PART 3/3:

Market: NAS100 (NASDAQ)

Range 3: 8:00-15:00(GMT+1)

Simple Breakout Strategy for Positive Pips

Range 3 is an identical copy of the DE30 range one trades. Identified our high and low during 8:00-15:00(GMT+1), we will set a buy order at the top and a sell order at the bottom of the range.

Breakout Strategy

Recovery positions, if Stop Loss is hit: (Repeat range one recovery plan) all trades during this range have a 50 Pip Stop Loss; once an order is opened, we set an opposite position where our Stop Loss for the current open trade is. The Take Profit this time is 50pips with a 50pip Stop Loss. This recovers any losses from the previous trade.

Simple Breakout Strategy for

Of course, there are going to be manual adjustments that are learned as you trade a strategy; just one example is if we don’t have a position open during the 1st range and one opens during the 2nd range chart breakout where the TP is in the middle of where the 1st range breakout TP would be, we could always extend the open positions TP to match the 1st positions.

We hope you all enjoy this post as much as We have traded it; it’s the first system in which I have a lot of faith.

My favorite part is the simplicity; you don’t need to watch the screen for hours.

1. Set an alarm on your smartphone 10 minutes before range hours close, draw your range from highs and lows, and set orders.

2. Wait for an alert then one has been opened.

3. Place recovery trade if it’s during ranges 1 or 3.

4. Enjoy your day, get off with your life and leave the forex market to do the rest.

Read More How to Trade Forex DOUBLE BOTTOM PATTERN

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/education/a-simple-breakout-forex-strategy-for-positive-pips/feed/ 4 54107
FX Profitude Forex Indicator FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/fx-profitude-indicator-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/fx-profitude-indicator-free-download/#respond Sat, 14 Jan 2023 22:41:32 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=45027 FX Profitude Forex Indicator is a NON-Repaint(arrows) easy-to-use buy/sell signal. This system is based on four different indicators. The Forex Profitude system is a trend-following system. The system itself is quick to learn and extremely easy to implement. Even if you are completely new to trading.

FX Profitude Trading System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Indicators Used in the FX Profitude Indicator

The FX Profitude Indicator System uses four custom-made indicators:

FXProfitude Indicator FREE download ForexCracked.com
  • The Array
  • The Arrows
  • The Validator
  • The Trend

The Array

The Array is the main indicator of the FX Profitude System. The Array will give us a trend direction and signals to buy or sell.

The Array has two edges to it:

  • The leading edge. This is the edge that is generally closest to the price.
  • The trailing edge. This is the edge that is generally farthest from the price.

Uptrend:
The Array will be green in an uptrend, and the leading edge will be above the trailing edge. The price will pull into the Array, and several lines will turn red, but as long as the trailing edge is green and the leading edge is above the trailing edge, the trend is up.
Downtrend:
The Array will be red in a downtrend, and the leading edge will be below the trailing edge. The price will pull into the Array, and several lines will turn green, but as long as the trailing edge is red and the leading edge is below the trailing edge, the trend is down.

The Array Phases

The Array has 2 phases to it. When the colors of the array are all the same, we are in the first phase; then, when the colors of the array start to switch, we have a second phase.

Forex Profitude Indicator FREE download ForexCracked.com

The Array has 2 phases to it:

  • The Ordered Phase.
  • The Unordered Phase.


Ordered Phase:
The ordered phase is when all the lines of the Array are the same color. We will have a green Array or an all-red Array. Although this is what we need to see when there is a signal, the Array can last in this ordered phase for more than just one candle.
Unordered Phase:
The unordered phase is when one or more lines in the Array are not the same color as the rest of the Array. We can have just one line with a different color, or we can have all but one line with a different color (and anything in between). This is important during the setup of the trades.

The Arrows

FX Profitude FREE download ForexCracked.com

Technically, the Arrows are part of the Array, but they provide different information. They will be part of generating a signal, but that’s not what they are showing us.

Up Arrow (green and under the price):
When the entire Array turns green, we will get a green Arrow that appears under the price. This can happen as a result of a reversal or simply a pullback.
Down Arrow (red and above the price):
When the entire Array turns red, we will get a red arrow that appears above the price. This can happen as a result of a reversal or simply a pullback.

The Arrows will serve as an entry signal, provided the other indicators agree.

The Validator

Profitude FREE download ForexCracked.com

The Validator is a very short-term trend indicator. It gives us an alternative picture to the Array indicator. With the Validator, we can see precisely if the market is up or down candle by candle.

Bullish Trend:
When the green Arrow appears on the chart, the Validator should also be
green at the time of the signal.
Bearish Trend:
When the red arrow appears on the chart, the Validator should also be red at the time of the signal.

The Trend

The Trend indicator is how we know what direction to trade. This indicator will guide the way. The Trend indicator is the first indicator we should be looking at, as all the other indicators will need to be considered ONLY in the direction of the trend.

Forex Profitude FREE download ForexCracked.com

The Trend indicator is what we would consider a medium-term trend. and the best opportunities will come when we pair the Trend indicator with the Array indicator.

Bullish Trend:
When the Trend indicator is green, we will only look for buy trades.
The other indicators will only be recognized in that direction.
Bearish Trend:
When the Trend indicator is red, we will only look for sell trades.
We want to use this indicator hand-in-hand with the other indicators.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

You can set the Forex Profitude Indicator for MT4 to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, E-mail, and platform pop-ups. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

This Profitude Indicator can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc.

Trading rules for FXProfitude Indicator

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility conditions, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Like most systems, Profitude will work on virtually every pair you are comfortable trading. You want to stick mainly to the higher timeframes like the 1-hour, 4-hour, and Daily if you don’t have a regular trading schedule. If you can spare a few hours to trade during the London session, you can trade this system on the lower timeframes like the 5-minute and the 15-minute. These are great timeframes for the scalping, but you want to trade these during the London session. Outside of the London session is when the market starts to wander, become directionless, and move very little.

Again, like with any system, red-flagged news events that have the potential to move the market should be taken into account before placing any trade. You can find the time and dates of these events on several online Forex calendars. Forex Factory has an excellent one that I personally use.

Buy Entry

  • Identify an Uptrend
    The Trend indicator will be green.
    The Array indicator will turn all green.
    The leading edge of the Array will be above the trailing edge.
  • Look for a pullback
    The price drops below the leading edge of the Array, and the Array is no longer completely green. The leading edge (and possibly more lines of the Array) will turn red.
  • Signal
    A candle will close above the Array, and the Array will turn all green.
    A green Arrow will appear under the price / Array.
    The Validator Dots will be green.
  • Entry
    Entry will be at the close of the candle, which meets all the requirements.
    Green Trend / Green Array / Green Arrow / Green Validator Dot.
  • Stop Loss
    Place the stop loss just below the market’s most recent swing low.
  • Target
    Target 1:1 (target is the same number of pips as the stop loss).
  • Trade management
    Once a candle closes above the entry price (in profit), trail the stop loss along the trailing edge of the Array indicator. As each new candle closes, the stop loss will be placed below the tailing edge of the Array indicator of that candle.

Sell Entry

  • Identify a Downtrend
    The Trend indicator will be red.
    The Array indicator will turn all red.
    The leading edge of the Array will be below the trailing edge.
  • Look for a pullback
    The price moves above the leading edge of the Array, and the Array is no longer completely red. The leading edge (and possibly more lines of the Array) will turn green.
  • Signal
    A candle will close below the Array, and the Array will turn all red.
    A red Arrow will appear above the price / Array.
    The Validator Dots will be red.
  • Entry
    Entry will be at the close of the candle, which meets all the requirements.
    Red Trend / Red Array / Red Arrow / Red Validator Dot.
  • Stop Loss
    Place the stop loss just above the market’s most recent swing high.
  • Target
    Target 1:1 (same number of pips as the stop loss)
  • Trade management
    Once a candle closes below the entry price (in profit), trail the stop loss along the trailing edge of the Array indicator. As each new candle closes, the stop loss will be placed above the tailing edge of the Array indicator of that candle.
FXProfitude FREE download ForexCracked.com
]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/fx-profitude-indicator-free-download/feed/ 0 45027
White Walker MetaTrader 4 Trading System FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/white-walker-metatrader-4-trading-system-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/white-walker-metatrader-4-trading-system-free-download/#respond Sat, 24 Dec 2022 20:04:51 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=35549 White Walker Indicator is a MetaTrader 4 Trading System that gives NON-Repaint buy/sell signals. This system is based on 3 different indicators. The system itself is quick to learn and extremely easy to implement. Even if you are completely new to trading

It can be applied to all currency pairs and is best on Major currency pairs. When it comes to timeframes, It works best on the M15 and 1-hour timeframes, these timeframes usually produce the best results. However, the White Walker Indicator System can be traded on all other timeframes with similar success.

This Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

White Walker Trading System can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Indicators Used in this MetaTrader 4 Trading System

The White Walker Trading System uses three custom-made indicators:

  • WW_Arrows
  • WW_Line
  • WW_Histogram


The WW_Arrows indicator is placed on the chart, while WW_Line and WW_Histogram have their own windows at the bottom of the chart.
For a valid trade entry, all three indicators must align and give a proper signal.
Here’s what your chart will look like after installing the indicators and the White Walker Trading System template:

White Walker Trading System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

WW_Arrows

WW_Arrows is an indicator that relies on the logic of the Exponential Moving Average. The upwards arrow signals a potential buy trade, while the downward arrow signals a potential sell trade.
When searching for a trade, this is the first indicator you’ll look at. After the arrow has appeared and all other indicators aligned as well, only then will you take the trade.
Once the arrow appears, and you take the trade, you can enter the next trade only when the next arrow appears.

WW_Line

WW_Line is a custom trend-following momentum indicator that is calculated by
subtracting the long-term EMA (estimated moving average) from the short-term EMA. It triggers buy signals when it crosses above the zero line (blue) or sell signals when it crosses below the zero line (red).

WW_Histogram

WW_Histogram displays the neutral (white), buy (blue) or sell (red) oportunities. It is designed to identify convergence, divergence, and crossovers.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

This MetaTrader 4 Trading System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts. Work best on M15 or H1 TimeFrames.

Trading rules for White Walker Indicator

Remember to tighten your Stop Losses around High Impact News Releases or avoid trading at least 15 minutes before and after these events.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility conditions, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Buy Entry

  • The upwards White Walker arrow must appear on the chart.
  • WW Line must cross above 0 level and turn blue.
  • WW Histogram must become blue.
  • Once all the conditions have been met, enter the buy/long trade at the close of the candle.
  • Note: After the WW_Arrow has appeared, the other two indicators must align within the next three candles. If not, we won’t consider it as a valid signal anymore.

Sell Entry

  • The downwards White Walker Trading System arrow must appear on the chart.
  • WW Line must cross below 0 level and turn red.
  • WW Histogram must become red.
  • Once all the conditions have been met, enter the sell/short trade at the close of the candle.
  • Note: After the WW_Arrow has appeared, the other two indicators must align within the next three candles. If not, we won’t consider it as a valid signal anymore.

Trade Exist

  • Place your Stop Loss below the most recent swing high/low point
  • Place your Take Profit the same distance from the Entry point as your Stop
    Loss (1:1 Risk To Reward ratio)

You may also exit the trade manually if the conditions of the system reverse (the opposite Arrow appears). It is recommended to use a stop loss. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/white-walker-metatrader-4-trading-system-free-download/feed/ 0 35549
Forex Hedge Fund Strategy for FREE https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-hedge-fund-strategy/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-hedge-fund-strategy/#respond Sun, 11 Dec 2022 17:53:20 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=33218 USA Bank Academy FX Hedge Fond Strategy is a Forex Hedge Fund Strategy that gives Non-Repaint buy/sell signals. This system is based on 3 different indicators. They are DST_WeeklyTrend, DST_WeeklyTrendBars, and TOP_Ultimate_Breakout.

There are different templates for Buy trades and Sell trades. Also, If you want easier visibility in candle sticks, you can also use colored candle sticks in the colors of the weekly trend. You get this indicator of colored candles in the content, so you can use them as much as you like your eyes, unlike ordinary candle sticks. for that Load “WEEKLY BARS” Templates.

Here are indicators that help, based on the global picture of the trend to find ideal positions for market entrances as well as their minimum Stop Losses and projected calculated Take Profit Zones.

The indicators used are “NO REPAINT”, This means after the candle is finished and closed and the new candle is opened, Old Signals will never change their color or anything like that.

This FOREX Hedge Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward.

FX Hedge Fond Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Main Chart of this Forex Hedge Fund Strategy

USA Bank Academy FX Hedge Fond Strategy for FREE ForexCracked.com
  • BLUE” or “MAGENTA” Trend indicator. It shows you a weekly Global Trend.
    • If it is in “BLUE”, that means the Trend is “BUY” and you can look for “BUY” setups only
    • If it “MAGENTA” that means the Trend is “SELL” and you can look for “SELL” setups only
  • Light Blue Line is the line where you can place your STOP LOSS. Also as a price moves, this line is dynamic, and you can use it as a “TRAILING STOPLOSS”.
  • WHITE LINE” is the line where you can place your order (BUY or SELL).
  • YELLOW LINE” is the line of your first TP1.
  • MAGENTA LINE” is the line of your second TP2.
  • KEEP ON MIND: When the price Hit your TP1, move your SL on Break Even, and after that, use “LIGHT BLUE LINE” as your Trail SL

You can set the USA Bank Academy Indicator System to send you a signal alert. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

FX Hedge Fond Strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules for this Forex Hedge Strategy

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility conditions, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

The FX Hedge Fond Strategy is very precise on H4, because we have adjusted the fixed weekly trend indicator, you can also use H1 or M30, M15 … but our recommendation is to use “Exclusively on H4 TimeFrame” due to the implemented optimization of all indicators according to H4 time frame.

First, Load One of 4 Templates given.

Buy Entry

  • The trend must be for BUY (BLUE BARS).
  • When you first detect a global trend (bottom trend indicator), load the appropriate TEMPLATE for that direction. In this case, Load “BUY TEMPLATE.”
  • After you notice that the candle has touched or passed through “LIGHT BLUE LINE” after your Closed previous trades or Stop Loss hit, place a pending order (BUY STOP) on “GREEN LINE” which is located above “LIGHT BLUE LINE”.
  • When BUY STOP is activated, you will be shown the network with the displayed (ENTER line “WHITE”, TP1 line YELLOW, TP2 line MAGENTA). Place your TP1/TP2 there, and SL few pips below “LIGHT BLUE LINE”, for TP3, use Trail Stop and close TP3 when Price hits “LIGHT BLUE LINE”.
  • NOTE: The Advice is when you enter in BUY (manually or with pending order) (Do this with 3 orders), because you have 3 TP (TP1/TP2/TP3).
  • KEEP ON MIND: When the price Hit your TP1, move your SL on Break Even, and after that, use “LIGHT BLUE LINE” as your Trail SL.

Sell Entry

  • The trend must be for SELL (MAGENTA BARS)
  • When you first detect a global trend (bottom trend indicator), load the appropriate TEMPLATE for that direction. In this case, Load “SELL TEMPLATE
  • After you notice that the candle has touched or passed through “LIGHT BLUE LINE” after your Closed previous trades or Stop Loss hit, place a pending order (SELL STOP) on “GREEN LINE” which is located below “LIGHT BLUE LINE”
  • When SELL STOP is activated, you will be shown the network with the displayed (ENTER line “WHITE”, TP1 line YELLOW, TP2 line MAGENTA). Place your TP1/TP2 there, and SL few pips above “LIGHT BLUE LINE”, for TP3 use Trail Stop and close TP3 when Price hits “LIGHT BLUE LINE
  • NOTE: The Advice is when you enter in SELL (manually or with pending order) (Do this with 3 orders), because you have 3 TP (TP1/TP2/TP3)
  • KEEP ON MIND: When the price Hit your TP1, move your SL on Break Even, and after that, use “LIGHT BLUE LINE” as your Trail SL
]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-hedge-fund-strategy/feed/ 0 33218
Boom and Crash Indicator System MT5 FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/boom-and-crash-indicator-system-mt5-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/boom-and-crash-indicator-system-mt5-free-download/#comments Mon, 05 Dec 2022 19:21:59 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=32963 Boom and Crash Indicator is a Non-Repaint (arrows) Boom and Crash Spike detector Indicator FREE to Download. The Boom and Crash Indicator is a very popular software to trade Boom & Crash plus US100 and Currency pairs, with awesome features.

It supports all Boom, crash, US100 Indices and Currency pairs. It is best on H1 TimeFrame.

The Boom And Crash Market periodically modifies its pattern. Sometimes similarly effective tactics will yield different outcomes, and other times a strategy will just stop working altogether. As a result, you need to have more than one plan at your disposal to support you.

This Scalping Strategy is primarily manual. The NON Repaint indicator does produce Arrow BUY/SELL signals, but you need to filter them using the given strategy or your own one. Any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Boom Crash Indicator system can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT5 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Main Chart of this Boom and Crash Indicator

Boom Crash Indicator System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Boom & Crash MT5 Indicator System made to be used on all forex pairs. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts. It is best on H1 TimeFrame.

It is straightforward to use even by complete forex beginners. You don’t have to be a professional to use it. Just load one of 2 different Templates to your chart.

  • Boom and Crash [Boom&Crash] – This template is optimized for Boom 1000, Boom 500, Crash 1000, and Crash 500.
  • Boom and Crash [Currencies & NAS100] – This template is optimized for Currency pairs and NAS100, also known as the USTech or US100.

For Boom and Crash Indices. We Recommend Dervi DMT5 Account.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Follow money management & Don’t enter to trade within the high-impact news period. Exit from your trades half & an hour from the high-impact forex news.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/boom-and-crash-indicator-system-mt5-free-download/feed/ 9 32963 Forex strategies Archives - ForexCracked nonadult
Trend Following Profitable Forex Strategy FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-following-profitable-forex-strategy-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-following-profitable-forex-strategy-free-download/#respond Sat, 26 Nov 2022 21:14:51 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=32610 Black Panther Forex Strategy is a Trend Following Profitable Forex Strategy that gives easy-to-use buy/sell signals. This system is based on 4 different indicators. It comes with ON-SCREEN dashboards that show you ATR, Daily High/Low, and other various helpful information.

It’s a trend-following trading system with a robust filter whose purpose is to have an average profitability of between 56 and 70%, even with outputs of positions at predetermined price levels. The system is straightforward. It is based on two indicators only on the chart. One defines the market trend and also plays the role of a filter, and the other defines market entry timing.

A few words about the trend arrows filter indicator: I point out that it is a good indicator that can also be used in other trading systems(trend, breakout, and trend-momentum, also with the pattern of price).

This Trend Following Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Black Panther Indicator can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Profitable Forex Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Follow money management & Don’t enter to trade within the high-impact news period. Exit from your trades before half & an hour from the high-impact forex news.

There are two pattern indicators; Pattern recognition and Candlestick alert. The Pattern Recognition Master indicator is more stable, so you have to select the best patterns, which can be chosen from those proposed by the other Candlestick indicator or from a personal choice.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

You can set this Profitable Forex Strategy to send you a signal alert. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Trend Following Forex Strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute through to the 1-month charts. Work best on M15 or higher TimeFrames.

Trading rules for this Profitable Forex Strategy

Follow money management & Don’t enter to trade within the high-impact news period. Exit from your trades half & an hour from the high-impact forex news.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader, you must master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when and when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility conditions, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

This Trend following strategy works well with trending currencies. Recommend using this trend arrows indicator in a higher timeframe to identify the trend.

Buy Entry

  • White Trend arrows below the chart.
  • BuySellwait white arrow.

Sell Entry

  • Blue Trend arrows above the chart.
  • BuySellwait Blue arrow.

Trade Exist

Profit Target on the lines of levels, profit ratio stop/loss 1:1 to 1:11.5.

Any positions with this system can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support or resistance as a reference point. You can draw a line from the previous support/resistance to run horizontally to set your Take Profit a few pips below that level. You may also exit the trade manually if the conditions of the system reverse (the opposite Arrow appears).

It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL below the entry price using previous support/resistance as a reference point Or on the previous high/low swing. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-following-profitable-forex-strategy-free-download/feed/ 0 32610
Vulkan Forex System for MT4 FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/vulkan-forex-system-for-mt4-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/vulkan-forex-system-for-mt4-free-download/#respond Sun, 20 Nov 2022 20:52:08 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=31758 Vulkan Forex System is a Non-Repaint Forex System for MT4. It’s a trend reversal forex system based on the Vulkan Profit Indicator. The principle of the System is simply the signals generated by the Vulkan profit indicator filtered by 100 pips trend and ADX but the price has previously touched or broken the TMA bands.

The system of filters is formed by

  • Vulkan Profit
  • 100pips Trend
  • Nihilist_Ultra_ADX
  • TBL Colored MA
  • TMA with Distances

This trend reversal forex system is a good fit to trade in the M15 and H1 charts. It adjusts with all kinds of currency pair charts. Before you go along with this strategy, you’ll have to understand its multiple tools to master it well once you’re done with that, keep strictly following its rules.

This Scalping Strategy is mostly manual. The Vulkan Profit indicator does produce Arrow BUY/SELL signals, but you need to filter them using the given strategy or your own one. Any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

You can set the Vulkan Indicator System to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, platform pop-ups, and Email. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Vulkan Trading System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as commodities, Cryptos, Binary Options, Stock markets, Indices, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minutes to the 4-Hour charts. Work best on M5 and H1 timeframes.

Vulkan Profit Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Vulkan Forex FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Trading rules for this Forex System

Follow money management & Don’t enter to trade within the high-impact news period. Exit from your trades before half & an hour from the high-impact forex news.

As always, to achieve good results, remember about proper money management. To be a profitable trader you need to master discipline, emotions, and psychology. It is crucial to know when to trade, but also when not to trade. Avoid trading during unfavorable times and market conditions like low volume/volatility conditions, beyond major sessions, exotic currency pairs, wider spread, etc.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Buy Entry 

  • The Vulkan Profit indicator displays a Green upward arrow.
  • 2 Blue buy arrows of 100 Pips Trend Indicator and 1 ADX green/dodger blue bar OR 2 ADX green/dodger blue bars and one Blue buy arrow of 100 Pips Trend Indicator.
  • Optional: the price touches or breaks the TMA lower band.

Sell Entry

  • The Vulkan Profit indicator displays a Red downward arrow.
  • 2 Red sell arrows of 100 Pips Trend Indicator and 1 ADX red/dark orange bar OR 2 ADX red/dark orange bars and one Red sell arrow of 100 Pips Trend Indicator.
  • Optional: the price touches or breaks the TMA upper band.

Trade Exist

Any positions with this system can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support or resistance as a reference point. You can draw a line from the previous support/resistance to run horizontally to set your Take Profit a few pips below that level. You may also exit the trade manually if the conditions of the system reverse (Vulkan Profit opposite signal appears).

It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL below the entry price using previous support/resistance as a reference point Or on the previous high/low swing. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/vulkan-forex-system-for-mt4-free-download/feed/ 0 31758
Tornado Scalping Strategy for MT4 FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tornado-scalping-strategy-for-mt4-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tornado-scalping-strategy-for-mt4-free-download/#respond Thu, 17 Nov 2022 19:39:44 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=31534 Tornado Scalping System is an easy-to-use Scalping Strategy for MT4. It’s a complex trading system for scalping and day trading it’s based on more indicators of trend and momentum. This system is based on logic to detect when the market is trending and take trades accordingly. It is not based on a single indicator but is a complete pack of technical trend indicators that detect the right moment to trade.

The system of filters is formed by Bollinger Band Squeeze, FX Prime V.2, BB MACD. The entry into the market is based on the crosses of Mon lag MA, LWMA 6, LWMA 12 of the Soeasy bands.

Forex Tornado Scalping Strategy is a good fit to trade in M5 and M15 charts. It adjusts with all kinds of currency pair charts. Before you go along with this strategy, you’ll have to understand its multiple tools to master it well once you’re done with that, keep strictly following its rules.

This Scalping Strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Tornado Scalping Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Tornado Scalping FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Indicators Used in this Scalping Strategy for MT4

  • LWMA6 & LWMA12: These are specially edited weighted moving averages based on 6 and 12 periods, respectively. 6 period MA above the 12 signals a bullish trend and is considered a bearish trend in case of opposite action.
  • Soeasy BBands: This is a very simple and easy trend identifier. Price above the band means a bullish trend below the band is considered a bearish trend.
  • MOACX Non Lag MA25: This is a 25-period-based moving average that reacts very sensitively with the current price action than ordinary moving averages. It helps traders to find shorter-length momentum for scalping purposes.
  • BB Macd: It is also a trend-following oscillator. Its colored dots appear above its dual dynamic channel, and its value is positive, indicates a strong bullish trend, and signals a bearish thrust if the opposite happens.
  • FX Prime V2: It is a trend strength meter. Its bluish color means bullish strength and bearish control if it turns green/ash.
  • BB Squeeze: It works almost the same as the MACD oscillator. Its value is positive, which indicates bullish momentum, and a negative value addresses bearish momentum. It also helps to spot trade exit areas.

You can set the Tornado Scalping Indicator System to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, platform pop-ups, and Email. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Tornado Scalping System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as commodities, Cryptos, Binary Options, Stock markets, Indices, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minutes to the 4-Hour charts. Work best on M5 and M15 timeframes.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Tornado Scalping Strategy Trading rules

Follow money management & Don’t enter to trade within the high-impact news period. Exit from your trades before half & an hour from the high-impact forex news.

Buy Entry 

  • Two MA in color applied, and Max_NonLagMA price crosses the Soeasy BBand upward.
  • BB Macd dots appear above its channels with a positive value.
  • Fx Prime Final V2 blue bar.
  • BBSqeeze stays above zero level.

Sell Entry

  • Two MA in color applied, and Max_NonLagMA price crosses the Soeasy BBand downward.
  • BB Macd dots appear below its channels with a negative value.
  • Fx Prime Final V2 red bar.
  • BBSqeeze stays below zero level.

Trade Exist

Any positions with this system can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support or resistance as a reference point. You can draw a line from the previous support/resistance to run horizontally to set your Take Profit a few pips below that level. You may also exit the trade manually if the conditions of the system reverse (BB Squeeze Value).

It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL below the entry price using previous support or resistance as a reference point. In this case, you may set the exit stop above/below the support/resistance. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated.  Or on the previous high/low swing.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/tornado-scalping-strategy-for-mt4-free-download/feed/ 0 31534
Janus Forex Scalping Strategy For MT4 FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/janus-forex-scalping-strategy-for-mt4-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/janus-forex-scalping-strategy-for-mt4-free-download/#respond Wed, 02 Nov 2022 20:50:20 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=30820 Janus Scalping Strategy is a NON-Repaint Strategy For MT4 that gives easy-to-use buy/sell signals. It is a Forex Scalping strategy based on the strength of currency pairs and the trend intraday. This system comprises XPS V. 8 Trend bars, Indicator 1, ATR Projection, Financial banks, Support Resistance Level, Currency Heat Map, and Currency Heat Map Indicators.

The currency heat map is the most crucial indicator as you need to find the best asset with this tool. Using the colored box, you can correlate different assets and trade the pairs formed by the weakest and strong currency. It improves your chances of winning the trades significantly.

It catches fast and profitable price movements and gives accessible BUY/ SELL signals. The system carefully verifies every trading signal to produce only the highest probability trades.

Janus Indicator system can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Forex Scalping Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set this Janus Scalping to send you a signal alert via Email, Mobile Notification, or platform pop-ups. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Forex Scalping strategy can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minute to the 4-month charts.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trading rules of this Strategy For MT4

The Janus Forex strategy is straightforward to use. Search by Currency Heat Map the best currency pairs on which to trade. If the EUR has more green rectangles and the USD has more red rectangles, EUR is stronger, and the U.S dollar is weaker. So that indicates a EURUSD bullish trend. Then only take EURUSD Buy trades.

The ideal time frame to use this scalping method is M15 and M30. But avoid taking trades in the choppy market as it can hunt down the stops.

Buy

  • Arrow Dodger Blue.
  • XPS V8 trendbar Dodger blue.
  • XPS V 8 Oscillator bar Dodger blue.

Sell

  • Arrow Dodger Purple .
  • XPS V8 trendbar Purple .
  • XPS V 8 Oscillator bar Purple .

Exit position 

You can take profit from your order at the opposite signal or use the risk-to-reward ratios.

  • On the last swing, high for Sell trades.
  • On the last swing, low for Buy trades.
  • Close to important support/resistance area.
  • Or exit on the opposite arrow signal.
  • Janus Scalping System FREE Download ForexCracked.com
  • Janus Forex Scalping Strategy FREE Download ForexCracked.com
  • Janus Scalping FREE Download ForexCracked.com
  • Strategy For MT4 FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Download Forex Scalping Strategy FREE HERE

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/janus-forex-scalping-strategy-for-mt4-free-download/feed/ 0 30820
Trend Squeezer Forex System MT4 FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-squeezer-forex-system-mt4-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-squeezer-forex-system-mt4-free-download/#comments Sat, 29 Oct 2022 18:54:43 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=30656 Trend Squeezer Trading System is a Forex System MT4 that gives easy-to-use NON-Repaint buy/sell signals. It’s a trend-following strategy based on the trending characteristics of the forex market. This system is based on logic to detect when the market is trending and take trades accordingly. It is not based on a single indicator but is a complete pack of technical trend indicators that detect the right moment to trade.

The system’s Red and Green dots does not repaint and do not recalculate. If the Dot signals appear in the last closed candle, they will not vanish. That makes the system valuable. There is no matter whether you are a completely new trader or you have been trading for some time, the system is straightforward to use with accurate tools.

The strategy is entirely manual. The indicators produce the signals, but any decisions to enter the market and to set protection stops or profitable exit stops will depend on the trader. Therefore, the trader must be familiar with the principles of risk and reward and use initial support and resistance areas to set entries and exits.

Trend Squeezer Strategy can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Trend Squeezer Trading System FREE Download ForexCracked.com

Indicators Used in this Forex System MT4

You can see that the trading system is entirely based on following the trend. The system confirms the trading signals and all the indicators involved in it.

  • The Trend Squeezer line is the primary indicator in this system. It is based on moving averages. If the price lies above the line, the trend is considered bullish, while if the price remains below the line, the trend is considered bearish. This triggering indicator alerts the traders about the beginning of a fresh trend. (02)
  • The Trend Squeezer filter indicator shows arrows, squares and X confirming the trend’s reversal or continuation. The green arrow and green dots show a bullish trend, while the red arrow and red dots show bearishness. (04)
  • The Trend Squeezer Oscillator indicator has two lines (white and red). The bullish trend is confirmed when the white line crosses above the red line. The bearish trend is confirmed when the white line crosses below the red line. (06)
  • Trend Squeezer signal bar indicator shows the trend in the form of bars. Green bars show bullishness, while red bars show bearishness. Keep in mind that from my experience, this indicator seems to repaint. (07)
  • The Candlestick time counter indicator appears on top of the chart and tells about the time left for the current candle to close. The decision to enter or exit the market is taken after the candle closes. Therefore, this indicator informs how much time is left before the candle closes and you take the trade. (08)

Forex System MT4 can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as commodities, Cryptos, Binary Options, Stock markets, Indices, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, from the 1-minutes to the 4-Hour charts. Work best on H1 and H4 timeframes.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Trend Squeezer Trading rules

Follow money management & Don’t enter to trade within the high-impact news period. Exit from your trades before half & an hour from the high-impact forex news.

This system has an excellent distribution of profitability. We recommend using this system in trend.

Buy Entry 

  • The color of the running line indicator on the main chart should change from red to green.
  • Wait for the current candle to close; if the candle’s color is blue (bullish), continue to check the other parameters below.
  • The trend filter indicator (01) should have a green arrow pointed upwards, and there should also be more than one other green symbol.
  • The Trend Squeezer Oscillator (06) indicator should show the white line crossing above the red line, whether it has recently crossed or has been staying above it for some time.
  • The signal bar indicator(07) should show a green This is the final confirmation.

Sell Entry

  • The color of the running line indicator on the main chart should change from green to red.
  • Wait for the current candle to close; if the candle’s color is red (bearish), you can continue checking other parameters below.
  • The trend filter indicator (01) should have a red arrow pointed downwards, with at least one other red symbol below it.
  • The Trend Squeezer Oscillator (06) indicator should show the white line crossing below the red line. The cross may be a recent cross, or the white line may have crossed a lot earlier and stayed below the red line.
  • The signal bar indicator (07) should show a red bar. This is the final confirmation.

Trade Exist

Any positions with this system can be liquidated using a fixed profit target. Alternatively, the profit target should be set using previous support or resistance as a reference point. You can draw a line from the previous support/resistance to run horizontally to set your Take Profit a few pips below that level. You may also exit the trade manually if the conditions of the system reverse (for instance, candles change color).

It is recommended to use a stop loss. Set SL a few pips below the entry price using previous support or resistance as a reference point. In this case, you may set the exit stop above/below the support/resistance. Using fixed stop loss settings without any reference points is not advocated. 

This system can produce a risk-reward ratio of at least 1:3, so you should aim for this minimum level whenever possible.

]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/trend-squeezer-forex-system-mt4-free-download/feed/ 2 30656
Forex Rebellion Trading System for MT4 FREE Download https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-rebellion-trading-system-for-mt4-free-download/ https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-rebellion-trading-system-for-mt4-free-download/#comments Wed, 26 Oct 2022 22:20:47 +0000 https://www.forexcracked.com/?p=30577 Forex Rebellion 3 Indicator System is a NON-Repaint Trading System for MT4 that gives easy-to-use buy/sell signals. It was created by forex trader John Kincade, who was also responsible for developing several other trading systems.

The system is based on the principles of technical analysis, fundamental analysis, trend following, and several other strategies unique to Forex trading. The system is designed to be simple to use so that even beginners can easily understand it.

It catches profitable price movements and gives you accessible BUY/ SELL signals. The system carefully verifies every trading signal to produce only the highest probability trades.

The timeframe is M30 or higher, But the best time frame is H4, in which the system expresses all its potential for trading by generating clear and precise signals that mitigate stress. Even when it goes into loss, the system manages to recover the losses having good profitability.

Forex Rebellion V3 can give you trading signals you can take as they are or add your additional chart analysis to filter the signals further, which is recommended. While traders of all experience levels can use this system, it can be beneficial to practice trading on an MT4 demo account until you become consistent and confident enough to go live.

Forex Rebellion V3 Trading System for MT4 FREE Download ForexCracked.com

You can set the Forex Rebellion Version 3 to send you a signal alert via Mobile Notification, platform pop-ups, and Email. This is helpful as it means you do not need to stare at the charts all day, waiting for signals to appear, and you can monitor multiple charts simultaneously.

Forex Rebellion Indicator System can be used on any Forex currency pair and other assets such as stocks, commodities, cryptos, precious metals, oil, gas, etc. You can also use it on any time frame that suits you best, But its works best on higher time frames from M30 to D1.

Indicators of This Trading System for MT4

  • Donchian channel with ChannelPeriod 21
  • EMA-Crossover indicator with periods 4/5 (which draws the arrows)
  • 2 moving averages signal.
  • MACD with EMA
  • The QQE ADV indicator
  • Expert Tarek, this EA helps to manage positions.

Latency: 0.46 ms
2 Weeks Free Trial
100% Free for 24 Months
Licensed Window Server 2022
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
10$
1:2000
Yes ✅ (Cent)
MT4, MT5
0 Pip Spread
No Commission
Minimum Deposit
Max Leverage
Small Accounts
Platforms
50$
1:2000
Yes ✅
MT4, MT5
Allow USA Traders
 

Download a Collection of Indicators, Courses, and EA for FREE

Forex Rebellion Indicators Explained

The EMA Crossover

The EMA Crossover indicates the direction of the short-term trend.
This indicator is made up of faster 4 EMA and slower 5 EMA. When they cross, an arrow is shown on the chart. The actual EMA’s are not shown, strictly to keep the charts free of too much clutter. The arrows are unmistakable, and this works very well.

The QQE Adv

The QQE Adv is short for the Quantitative Qualitative Estimator Advanced.
This indicator is an advanced modification of the QQE, hence the QQE Adv. This powerful indicator has the ability to eliminate, or filter out, a lot of bad trades.

This indicator is fairly simple to use but does need some explanation. The QQE is essentially a smoothed RSI indicator with a signal line. The signal line is a smoothing average known as Wilder’s Period. Together the two lines work like that of a Stochastic Oscillator or a 2-line MACD. The lines have to be in the right order for a trade signal to be valid. A line is drawn through the middle of the indicator window, which is called the 50 lines.

Tarek EMA EA

This EA helps to manage positions. It shows the entry rules. If the four rules are in the same direction, that’s an excellent entry to take, and EA will send a notification too.

  • Forex Rebellion Trading System FREE Download ForexCracked.com
  • Forex Rebellion Version 3 FREE Download ForexCracked.com
  • Forex Rebellion Version 3 Trading System FREE Download ForexCracked.com
  • Forex Rebellion Version 3 Trading System for MT4 FREE Download ForexCracked.com
  • Forex Rebellion FREE Download ForexCracked.com
]]>
https://www.forexcracked.com/forex-indicator/forex-rebellion-trading-system-for-mt4-free-download/feed/ 3 30577